WO2025163445A1 - Semiconductor device - Google Patents
Semiconductor deviceInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025163445A1 WO2025163445A1 PCT/IB2025/050748 IB2025050748W WO2025163445A1 WO 2025163445 A1 WO2025163445 A1 WO 2025163445A1 IB 2025050748 W IB2025050748 W IB 2025050748W WO 2025163445 A1 WO2025163445 A1 WO 2025163445A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- insulating layer
- conductive
- film
- semiconductor
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B10/00—Static random access memory [SRAM] devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B12/00—Dynamic random access memory [DRAM] devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B41/00—Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates
- H10B41/70—Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates the floating gate being an electrode shared by two or more components
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B99/00—Subject matter not provided for in other groups of this subclass
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D30/00—Field-effect transistors [FET]
- H10D30/60—Insulated-gate field-effect transistors [IGFET]
- H10D30/67—Thin-film transistors [TFT]
Definitions
- One aspect of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device.
- One aspect of the present invention relates to a transistor.
- One aspect of the present invention relates to a memory device.
- one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field.
- Examples of technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification and the like include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, memory devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices, input/output devices, driving methods thereof, and manufacturing methods thereof.
- a semiconductor device refers to any device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.
- a CPU is a collection of semiconductor elements processed from a semiconductor wafer, containing chipped semiconductor integrated circuits (at least transistors and memory), and on which electrodes serving as connection terminals are formed.
- CPUs, memories, and other LSI semiconductor circuits are mounted on circuit boards, such as printed wiring boards, and used as components in a variety of electronic devices.
- transistors are widely used in electronic devices such as integrated circuits and image display devices (also simply referred to as display devices).
- Silicon-based semiconductor materials are widely known as semiconductor thin films that can be used in transistors, but oxide semiconductors are also attracting attention as other materials.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a low-power CPU that utilizes the property of low leakage current.
- Patent Document 2 discloses a memory device that can retain stored content for a long period of time.
- Patent Document 3 discloses a technique for increasing the density of integrated circuits by stacking a first transistor using an oxide semiconductor film and a second transistor using an oxide semiconductor film, thereby providing multiple memory cells in a superimposed manner.
- Patent Document 4 discloses a vertical transistor in which the side surface of an oxide semiconductor is covered with a gate electrode via a gate insulator.
- Patent Document 5 discloses a semiconductor memory device having a channel pattern with a vertical channel portion on a bit line, and a word line arranged on the channel pattern so as to cross the bit line.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a semiconductor device that can be easily miniaturized. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device that enables high integration. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device in which the wiring load is reduced. Another object is to provide a highly reliable semiconductor device. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device that exhibits favorable electrical characteristics. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device with high operating speed.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a semiconductor device, memory device, or electronic device having a novel structure.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to alleviate at least one of the problems of the prior art.
- One aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device comprising a first conductive layer, a pair of second conductive layers, a pair of third conductive layers, a pair of semiconductor layers, a first insulating layer having an opening, and a pair of second insulating layers, each of the pair of semiconductor layers including a first metal oxide, each of the pair of semiconductor layers having a first region and a second region, at least a portion of the first region functioning as a channel formation region, the second region having a higher resistivity than the first region, the first conductive layer extending in a first direction, the pair of third conductive layers, the pair of semiconductor layers, the pair of second insulating layers, and the opening extending in a second direction intersecting the first direction, and the pair of third conductive layers, the pair of semiconductor layers, and the pair of second insulating layers
- the semiconductor device has a first insulating layer disposed symmetrically within the opening, the first and second regions alternately arranged in the second direction, a first insulating layer disposed on the first
- the second region contains either aluminum or hafnium, or both.
- the second region has a higher concentration of either or both of aluminum and hafnium than the first region.
- the first conductive layer has a first conductive film and a second conductive film on the first conductive film, that each of the pair of semiconductor layers is in contact with the second conductive film, that the second conductive film contains a second metal oxide, and that the first conductive film contains a metal.
- the first metal oxide and the second metal oxide contain one or more of the same elements selected from In, Sn, Zn, Ga, and Ti.
- the second conductive film has a recess
- the pair of semiconductor layers have portions located within the recess and contact the side and top surfaces of the second conductive film within the recess.
- the device has a pair of third insulating layers, each covering the vertical portion and the horizontal portion via the second insulating layer and the third conductive layer, and that the third insulating layers have the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen.
- a capacitive element is provided on the second conductive layer, and that the capacitive element has a fourth conductive layer in contact with the second conductive layer, a fifth conductive layer, and a fourth insulating layer therebetween.
- the fourth conductive layer has a recess
- the fourth insulating layer has a portion that is provided along the recess
- the fifth conductive layer has a portion that is located within the recess via the fourth insulating layer and that contacts the side and top surfaces of the fourth insulating layer within the recess.
- the fourth conductive layer has a columnar shape
- the fourth insulating layer covers the fourth conductive layer
- the fifth conductive layer is provided so as to cover the top and side surfaces of the fourth conductive layer via the fourth insulating layer.
- a transistor is provided below the first conductive layer, the transistor contains silicon in the semiconductor in which the channel is formed, and one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the transistor is connected to the first conductive layer.
- a semiconductor device that can be easily miniaturized can be provided.
- a semiconductor device that enables high integration can be provided.
- a semiconductor device with reduced wiring load can be provided.
- a highly reliable semiconductor device can be provided.
- a semiconductor device that exhibits favorable electrical characteristics can be provided.
- a semiconductor device with high operating speed can be provided.
- the present invention it is possible to provide a semiconductor device, memory device, or electronic device having a novel configuration. According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to at least alleviate at least one of the problems of the prior art.
- 1A and 1B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 2A and 2B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 3A and 3B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 4A and 4B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- FIG. 5 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- FIG. 6 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 7A and 7B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 8A and 8B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 9A to 9D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 10A to 10D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 11A to 11D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 12A to 12C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 14A and 14B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 15A and 15B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 16A and 16B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 17A to 17C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 18A to 18C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 19A to 19C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 20A and 20B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- 21A to 21C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
- FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
- 23A to 23H are diagrams illustrating examples of the circuit configuration of a memory cell.
- 24A and 24B are perspective views illustrating a configuration example of a semiconductor device.
- FIG. 25 is a block diagram illustrating the CPU.
- 26A and 26B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
- 27A and 27B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
- 28A and 28B show examples of the configuration of electronic components.
- 29A to 29C show examples of the configuration of a mainframe computer.
- Fig. 30A is a configuration example of space equipment
- Fig. 30B is a configuration example of a storage system.
- a transistor is a type of semiconductor element that can perform functions such as amplifying current or voltage, and switching to control conduction or non-conduction.
- transistor includes IGFETs (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors) and thin film transistors (TFTs).
- source and drain may be interchangeable when transistors of different polarities are used, or when the direction of current changes during circuit operation. For this reason, in this specification, the terms “source” and “drain” may be used interchangeably.
- connection includes, as an example, “electrical connection.”
- electrical connection is sometimes used to define the connection relationship between circuit elements as an object.
- electrical connection includes “direct connection” and “indirect connection.”
- a and B are directly connected means that A and B are connected without the intervention of a circuit element (e.g., a transistor, a switch, etc.; note that wiring is not a circuit element).
- a and B are indirectly connected means that A and B are connected via one or more circuit elements. Note that A and B represent objects such as elements, circuits, wiring, electrodes, terminals, semiconductor layers, and conductive layers.
- a and B are indirectly connected
- a and B are connected via the source and drain of one or more transistors.
- an example of a case where it cannot be said that "A and B are indirectly connected” is when an insulator is present in the path from A to B. Specifically, this would be the case when a capacitive element is connected between A and B, or when a transistor gate insulating film or the like is present between A and B. Therefore, it cannot be said that "the transistor gate (A) and the transistor source or drain (B) are indirectly connected.”
- top surface shapes that roughly match means that at least a portion of the contours of stacked layers overlap. For example, this includes cases where the upper and lower layers are processed using the same mask pattern, or where only a portion of the mask pattern is the same. However, strictly speaking, the contours may not overlap, and the upper layer may be located inside the lower layer, or outside the lower layer; in these cases, the term “top surface shapes that roughly match” may also be used.
- the top surface shape of a certain component refers to the contour shape of that component when viewed from a plan view.
- a plan view refers to a view from the normal direction of the surface on which the component is formed, or the surface of the support (e.g., substrate) on which the component is formed.
- the channel length direction of a transistor refers to one of the directions parallel to the line connecting the source region and the drain region over the shortest distance.
- the channel length direction corresponds to one of the directions of current flowing through the semiconductor layer when the transistor is in the on state.
- the channel width direction refers to the direction perpendicular to the channel length direction. Note that, depending on the structure or shape of the transistor, the channel length direction and channel width direction may not be defined as a single direction.
- film and “layer” are interchangeable.
- insulating layer may be interchangeable with the term “insulating film.”
- off-state current refers to the drain current when a transistor is in an off state (also called a non-conducting state or cut-off state).
- the off state refers to a state in which the voltage Vgs between the gate and source of an n-channel transistor is lower than the threshold voltage Vth (higher than Vth for a p-channel transistor).
- a semiconductor device has a plurality of memory cells.
- Each memory cell has one transistor and one memory element.
- Various elements capable of retaining stored information can be used as the memory element, such as a capacitor, a variable resistance element, a ferroelectric element, a charge trap element, or a floating gate element. Below, an example in which a capacitor is used as the memory element is described.
- the source and drain electrodes are located at different heights, and current flows in the height direction through the semiconductor layer.
- the channel length direction can be said to have a component in the height direction (vertical direction). Therefore, one aspect of the present invention can be called a VFET (Vertical Field Effect Transistor), vertical transistor, vertical channel transistor, vertical channel transistor, etc.
- VFET Vertical Field Effect Transistor
- a first insulating layer having an opening and functioning as a spacer is provided on a lower electrode (first conductive layer), which is one of the source and drain electrodes.
- the upper electrode (second conductive layer), which is the other of the source and drain electrodes, is provided so as to have a portion located above the first insulating layer.
- the opening in the first insulating layer has a sidewall that is approximately perpendicular to the upper surface of the lower electrode, and is provided so that a portion of the sidewall overlaps with the lower electrode.
- the semiconductor layer has a vertical portion (also referred to as a vertical portion) along the sidewall, a portion that contacts the upper electrode, and a portion that contacts the lower electrode.
- the portion of the semiconductor layer that contacts the lower electrode may have a portion (also referred to as a horizontal portion or lateral portion) that is parallel to the upper surface of the lower electrode.
- a gate insulating layer (second insulating layer) is provided covering the vertical and horizontal portions of the semiconductor layer, and a gate electrode (third conductive layer) is provided covering the vertical and horizontal portions via the gate insulating layer.
- a third insulating layer is provided covering the vertical and horizontal portions via the gate insulating layer and gate electrode.
- the two transistors in two adjacent memory cells are arranged symmetrically within the opening.
- a pair of semiconductor layers, a pair of gate insulating layers, a pair of gate electrodes, a pair of third insulating layers, and a pair of upper electrodes can be arranged along a pair of side surfaces of the opening. This allows for even higher density arrangement of transistors.
- the semiconductor layer preferably uses a metal oxide (oxide semiconductor) that exhibits semiconducting properties.
- a metal oxide oxide semiconductor
- first regions that function as channel formation regions and second regions that function as element isolation regions are alternately arranged.
- the second regions are metal oxides to which metal elements (aluminum, hafnium, etc.) have been added, and have a higher resistivity than the first regions.
- the etching process may not be sufficient at the bottom of the openings, etc. This can lead to the risk of electrical conduction between adjacent first regions.
- sufficient element isolation can be achieved by forming the semiconductor layer to cover the openings and alternately forming the first and second regions. This allows transistors with a three-dimensional structure to be manufactured with a high yield.
- the second region may have lower crystallinity and more oxygen vacancies than the first region. This allows the second region to capture or fix the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in the first region. This reduces the hydrogen and excess oxygen in the first region, which functions as a channel formation region.
- the hydrogen concentration in the first region it is possible to suppress a negative shift in the transistor's initial characteristics and achieve normally-off characteristics. It is also possible to suppress negative drift degradation in a +GBT (Gate Bias-Temperature) stress test. It is also possible to suppress excessive positive shift in the transistor's initial characteristics by reducing the concentration of excess oxygen in the first region. It is also possible to suppress excessive positive drift degradation in a +GBT stress test.
- FIG. 1A shows a schematic top view of the semiconductor device 10.
- FIGS. 2A and 2B show perspective views of the semiconductor device 10.
- FIGS. 3A, 3B, 4A, and 4B show schematic cross-sectional views taken along the cutting lines A1-A2, B1-B2, C1-C2, and D1-D2 shown in FIG. 1A, respectively.
- Each figure also shows arrows indicating the X, Y, and Z directions (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction).
- the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction intersect with each other.
- the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction are preferably perpendicular to each other.
- the semiconductor device 10 has a configuration in which multiple memory cells 15 are arranged in the X and Y directions (this can also be referred to as a matrix arrangement or a row-and-row arrangement).
- conductive layers 24 that function as bit lines extend in the X direction
- conductive layers 23 that function as word lines extend in the Y direction.
- the memory cell 15 has a transistor 20 and a capacitive element 30 thereon.
- FIG. 1B shows a circuit diagram corresponding to semiconductor device 10.
- FIG. 1B shows multiple bit lines BL, multiple word lines WL that intersect each bit line at right angles, and wiring CL. While FIG. 1B shows an example in which the wiring CL is parallel to the bit lines BL, it is also possible for the wiring CL to be parallel to the word lines WL, or to be arranged in a grid pattern. Alternatively, the wiring CL may be a flat conductive film.
- Memory cell 15 consists of one transistor 20 and one capacitor 30.
- the gate of transistor 20 is connected to word line WL, one of the source and drain is connected to bit line BL, and the other is connected to one electrode of capacitor 30.
- the other electrode of capacitor 30 is connected to wiring CL.
- multiple memory cells 15 arranged along the X direction are arranged so that the orientations of the transistors 20 are staggered.
- two transistors 20 adjacent along the X direction are arranged symmetrically with respect to the Y-Z plane.
- the bit line BL functions as wiring for writing and reading data.
- the word line WL functions as wiring for controlling the on/off (conducting or non-conducting) of the transistor 20, which functions as a switch.
- the wiring CL functions as a constant potential line connected to the capacitance element 30.
- the transistor 20 and the capacitor 30 are provided on an insulating layer 11 provided on a substrate (not shown).
- the insulating layer 11 functions as a base insulating layer.
- FIG 7A shows an enlarged view of the transistor 20 and its vicinity in Figure 3A.
- the transistor 20 has a semiconductor layer 21, an insulating layer 22 that functions as a gate insulating layer, a conductive layer 23 that functions as a gate electrode, a conductive layer 24 that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode, and a conductive layer 25 that functions as the other.
- the conductive layer 24 has a conductive film 24a and a conductive film 24b located thereon.
- An insulating layer 41 is provided on insulating layer 11, and a conductive layer 24 and an insulating layer 42 are provided on insulating layer 41.
- the conductive layer 24 extends in the X direction and is embedded in the insulating layer 42. It is preferable that the heights of the upper surfaces of the conductive layer 24 and insulating layer 42 (heights from the upper surface of insulating layer 11) are roughly the same.
- the insulating layer 41 functions as a protective insulating layer, preventing impurities such as hydrogen from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 21 from the insulating layer 11 side.
- a film that is less susceptible to hydrogen diffusion than silicon oxide film (has barrier properties against hydrogen), such as a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, or gallium oxide film, can be used. It is particularly preferable to use a silicon nitride film or silicon nitride oxide film. Note that the insulating layer 41 need not be provided if it is not required.
- oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen
- silicon oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- silicon nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen
- the conductive layer 24 has a conductive film 24a and a conductive film 24b located thereon.
- the conductive film 24a is preferably made of a conductive material with lower resistance than the conductive film 24b. It is particularly preferable for the conductive film 24a to contain a metal material.
- the conductive film 24b is preferably made of a conductive metal oxide (oxide conductor).
- a conductive metal oxide for the conductive film 24b that contacts the semiconductor layer 21 containing a metal oxide reduces the contact resistance between them, thereby reducing the load on the wiring, which is preferable.
- the conductive film 24b it is preferable for the conductive film 24b to contain the same metal element as the metal element contained in the semiconductor layer 21, as this further reduces the contact resistance.
- both the semiconductor layer 21 and the conductive film 24b contain the same one or more elements selected from In, Sn, Zn, Ga, and Ti.
- using a metal material with a lower resistance than the conductive film 24b for the conductive film 24a reduces both the contact resistance and the wiring resistance, thereby further reducing the load on the wiring.
- An insulating layer 43 is provided on the conductive layer 24 and the insulating layer 42.
- the insulating layer 43 has an opening 47 extending in the Y direction.
- the shape of the opening 47 can be described as a groove, trench, slit, or the like.
- the opening 47 reaches the upper surface of the conductive film 24b and the upper surface of the insulating layer 42.
- the side surface of the opening 47 in the insulating layer 43 (which can also be called the sidewall of the opening 47) is approximately perpendicular to the surface on which it is formed (the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42).
- the depth of the opening 47 is greater than the width between adjacent openings 47 in the insulating layer 43.
- the insulating layer 43 may be a structure having a strip-shaped upper surface extending in the Y direction.
- the insulating layer 43 has a pair of side surfaces perpendicular to the X direction, with portions of these side surfaces overlapping the conductive layer 24.
- these side surfaces of the insulating layer 43 are approximately perpendicular to the surface on which they are formed.
- the height of the insulating layer 43 is greater than its width in the X direction.
- two surfaces are perpendicular means that the interior angle between them is between 80 degrees and 100 degrees.
- Tewo surfaces are approximately perpendicular means that the interior angle between them is between 60 degrees and 120 degrees.
- Tewo surfaces are parallel means that the interior angle between them is between -10 degrees and 10 degrees (including parallel).
- Tewo surfaces are approximately parallel means that the interior angle between them is between -30 degrees and 30 degrees (including parallel).
- the bottom edge of the opening 47 has a curved shape (which can also be called a rounded shape) with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in FIG. 7A.
- a curved shape which can also be called a rounded shape
- the edges of the recesses in the semiconductor layer 21, insulating layer 22, and conductive layer 23 can also be similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the edges of the recesses in the conductive layer 23. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of dielectric breakdown in the transistor 20.
- the semiconductor layer 21 extends in the Y direction.
- the semiconductor layer 21 has a vertical portion that contacts the sidewall of the opening 47 and a horizontal portion that contacts the top surface of the conductive layer 24. Note that the vertical portion is not limited to being strictly vertical; if the sidewall of the opening 47 is inclined with respect to the Z direction, the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21 is also inclined along the sidewall. Similarly, if the top surface of the conductive layer 24 is inclined with respect to the X-Y plane (e.g., the substrate surface), the horizontal portion of the semiconductor layer 21 is also inclined along the top surface.
- the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21 refers to a portion that is provided along the sidewall of the opening 47, and whose surface (either or both of the surface of the semiconductor layer 21 facing the insulating layer 43 or the surface of the insulating layer 22) is perpendicular or approximately perpendicular to the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42.
- the horizontal portion of the semiconductor layer 21 refers to a portion that is provided along the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42, and whose surface (the surface of the semiconductor layer 21 facing the conductive layer 24 or the surface of the insulating layer 22) is parallel or approximately parallel to the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42.
- the semiconductor layer 21 is also provided across the two transistors 20 provided in the opening 47. That is, the semiconductor layer 21 has a pair of vertical portions along the two opposing side walls of the opening 47, and one horizontal portion connected to these and in contact with the top surface of the conductive layer 24.
- transistor 20 the source electrode and drain electrode are located at different heights, so the current flowing through the semiconductor flows in the height direction.
- the channel length direction can be said to have a component in the height direction (vertical direction), and therefore a transistor according to one embodiment of the present invention can also be called a VFET, vertical transistor, vertical channel transistor, etc.
- transistor 20 allows two or more of the source electrode, semiconductor, and drain electrode to be stacked, it can occupy a significantly smaller area than a so-called planar transistor (which can also be called a lateral transistor, LFET (Lateral FET), etc.) in which the semiconductor is arranged on a flat surface.
- planar transistor which can also be called a lateral transistor, LFET (Lateral FET), etc.
- the channel length of the transistor 20 can be precisely controlled by the thickness of the insulating layer 43 (which can also be referred to as the depth of the opening 47), which functions as a spacer. This allows for extremely small variations in channel length compared to planar transistors. Furthermore, by thinning the insulating layer 43, transistors with extremely short channel lengths can be fabricated. For example, transistors with channel lengths of 2 ⁇ m or less, 1 ⁇ m or less, 500 nm or less, 300 nm or less, 200 nm or less, 100 nm or less, 50 nm or less, 30 nm or less, or 20 nm or less, and 5 nm or more, 7 nm or more, or 10 nm or more, can be fabricated. This allows for the realization of transistors with extremely short channel lengths that could not be achieved using mass-production exposure equipment. Furthermore, transistors with channel lengths of less than 10 nm can be fabricated without using the extremely expensive exposure equipment used in cutting-edge LSI technology.
- the semiconductor layer 21 has at least a portion that exhibits semiconductivity. As shown in Figures 1A, 2A, and 2B, the semiconductor layer 21 has multiple regions 21a and multiple regions 21b. Figure 2B shows the structure above regions 21a and 21b removed from Figure 2A to make regions 21a and 21b easier to see. Region 21a is a region that exhibits semiconductivity, and region 21b is a region that exhibits insulation. In the semiconductor layer 21 provided within the opening 47, multiple regions 21a and multiple regions 21b are arranged alternately in the Y direction. In other words, among the multiple transistors 20 arranged in the opening 47, the transistors 20 that include region 21a are each isolated by region 21b. For this reason, region 21b can also be called an isolation region.
- region 21a functions as a channel formation region. As shown in FIG. 7A, part of the vertical portion of region 21a functions as a channel formation region. The upper end of the vertical portion of region 21a contacts the lower end of conductive layer 25 and functions as either a source region or a drain region. The lower surface of the horizontal portion of region 21a contacts the upper surface of conductive film 24b and functions as the other of the source region or the drain region.
- Region 21b has a higher resistivity than region 21a.
- the resistivity of region 21b is preferably at least 10 times that of region 21a.
- Region 21b contains either aluminum or hafnium, or both.
- Region 21b has a higher concentration of either aluminum or hafnium, or both, than region 21a.
- One or more of aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, and hafnium aluminate are formed in region 21b.
- Region 21b is also less crystalline than region 21a, and preferably has an amorphous structure.
- region 21b As shown in FIG. 8A, region 21b, like region 21a, has vertical and horizontal portions. The upper end of the vertical portion of region 21b contacts the lower end of insulating layer 44. The lower surface of the horizontal portion of region 21b contacts the upper surface of insulating layer 42.
- the etching process may not be sufficient at the bottom of the opening 47, etc. This can lead to the risk of adjacent regions 21a becoming conductive.
- forming the semiconductor layer 21 to cover the opening 47 and alternately forming regions 21a and 21b can achieve sufficient element isolation. This can improve the yield of semiconductor devices.
- Insulating layer 22 is provided to cover the vertical and horizontal portions of semiconductor layer 21.
- Conductive layer 23 is located on insulating layer 22 and is provided to cover the vertical and horizontal portions of semiconductor layer 21 via insulating layer 22.
- Insulating layer 31 is provided on conductive layer 23. Insulating layer 31 is provided to cover the vertical and horizontal portions of semiconductor layer 21 via insulating layer 22 and conductive layer 23. Insulating layer 22, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 31 are provided to extend in the Y direction within opening 47.
- the insulating layer 31 is preferably made of an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen. This allows the insulating layer 31 to capture or fix hydrogen that may diffuse into the semiconductor layer 21 due to heat or other factors applied during the manufacturing process of the transistor 20 or memory cell 15, thereby reducing the concentration of hydrogen contained in the semiconductor layer 21. This makes it possible to achieve a transistor 20 or semiconductor device 10 with good electrical characteristics and high reliability. It is preferable to use a hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, aluminum oxide film, or the like as an insulating film that can be used for the insulating layer 31 and that can capture or fix hydrogen.
- Slits are provided in insulating layer 31, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 22 that reach semiconductor layer 21, dividing them at the slits. Furthermore, within the slits, insulating layer 32 is provided along and in contact with the side surfaces of insulating layer 31, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 22, as well as the top surface of semiconductor layer 21. Furthermore, insulating layer 33 is provided on insulating layer 32 so as to fill the slits. Insulating layer 32 and insulating layer 33 are provided within opening 47, extending in the Y direction.
- insulating layer 32 is preferably made of an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen. This prevents hydrogen contained in insulating layer 33 and the like from diffusing toward semiconductor layer 21.
- insulating layer 32 it is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, gallium oxide film, or the like. It is particularly preferable to use a silicon nitride film or silicon nitride oxide film.
- an insulating material with a low dielectric constant for the insulating layer 33. This reduces the parasitic capacitance between the pair of conductive layers 23 sandwiching the insulating layer 33.
- inorganic insulating materials such as silicon oxide and silicon oxynitride can be used for the insulating layer 33.
- Insulating layer 34 is provided in contact with the upper surfaces of conductive layer 23, insulating layer 31, insulating layer 32, and insulating layer 33. Insulating layer 34 can also be provided in contact with the side surface of insulating layer 22 (the side surface on the insulating layer 33 side). Insulating layer 34 is provided within opening 47, extending in the Y direction.
- insulating layer 34 As with insulating layers 32 and 41, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen as insulating layer 34. This makes it possible to prevent hydrogen from diffusing from above insulating layer 34 toward semiconductor layer 21. It is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, gallium oxide film, or the like for insulating layer 34. In particular, it is preferable to use a silicon nitride film or silicon nitride oxide film.
- an insulating film for the insulating layer 34 that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen, similar to the insulating layer 31.
- An insulating layer 44 is provided to cover insulating layers 43, 22, and 34.
- the insulating layer 44 functions as an interlayer insulating film.
- an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride can be used.
- a conductive layer 25 is provided on the insulating layer 34, the insulating layer 22, and the semiconductor layer 21.
- the upper surface of the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21 can be located below the upper surface of the insulating layer 22, and a portion of the conductive layer 25 can be provided in the gap surrounded by the insulating layer 43, the insulating layer 22, and the semiconductor layer 21.
- the upper surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is preferably located below the upper surface of the conductive layer 23. If the upper surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is located above the upper surface of the conductive layer 23, a so-called offset region, where no gate electric field is applied, may be formed.
- Figure 7A and other figures show a case where the sidewall of the opening 47 and the side surface of the insulating layer 44 are flush with each other, in a plan view, the side surface of the insulating layer 44 can be positioned outside the sidewall of the opening 47. In this case, a portion of the conductive layer 25 will be in contact with the upper surface of the insulating layer 43.
- a portion of insulating layer 44 is provided in the gap surrounded by insulating layer 43, insulating layer 22, and semiconductor layer 21.
- region 21a of semiconductor layer 21 contacts conductive layer 25, and in the cross section shown in FIG. 8B, region 21b of semiconductor layer 21 contacts insulating layer 44.
- region 21a contacts conductive layer 25
- region 21b contacts insulating layer 44.
- another portion of region 21a contacts insulating layer 44.
- another portion of region 21b contacts conductive layer 25.
- two transistors 20 are provided symmetrically in the opening 47 when viewed cross-sectionally in the Y direction. More specifically, the semiconductor layer 21, a pair of conductive layers 25, a pair of conductive layers 23, a pair of insulating layers 22, a pair of insulating layers 31, etc. are provided symmetrically in the opening 47 with respect to the Y-Z plane. In this way, providing the transistors 20 along each of the two opposing sidewalls of the opening 47 is preferable because it increases the integration density of the transistors 20.
- An insulating layer 45 is provided covering the conductive layer 25 and the insulating layer 44. Similar to the insulating layers 34, 32, and 41, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen for the insulating layer 45. This makes it possible to prevent hydrogen from diffusing from above the insulating layer 45 toward the semiconductor layer 21. It is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, gallium oxide film, or the like for the insulating layer 45. It is particularly preferable to use a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride oxide film.
- Insulating layer 46 is provided on insulating layer 45. Insulating layer 46 functions as an interlayer insulating layer. As with insulating layer 44, insulating layer 46 can be made of an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride.
- insulating layers 45 and 46 have openings that reach conductive layer 25.
- Capacitive element 30 is provided in the openings provided in insulating layers 45 and 46.
- the openings in insulating layers 45 and 46 are vertical holes, and, unlike opening 47, preferably do not extend in the X or Y directions.
- the capacitor element 30 has a conductive layer 51 that functions as a lower electrode, a conductive layer 53 that functions as an upper electrode, and an insulating layer 52 disposed therebetween and that functions as a dielectric.
- the conductive layer 51 has a vertical portion that is provided along the side surfaces of the openings in the insulating layers 45 and 46, and a horizontal portion that contacts the upper surface of the conductive layer 25.
- the conductive layer 51 has a cylindrical (also called cup-shaped) shape with a bottom and a recess.
- the insulating layer 52 has a portion that is provided along the recess of the conductive layer 51, a portion that contacts the upper surface of the conductive layer 51, and a portion that contacts the upper surface of the insulating layer 46.
- the conductive layer 53 is provided so as to fill the recess of the conductive layer 51 via the insulating layer 52.
- the conductive layer 53 also has a portion that is provided on the insulating layer 46 via the insulating layer 52.
- the conductive layer 51 is provided individually for each memory cell, while the conductive layer 53 is provided in common to multiple memory cells.
- the upper part of the conductive layer 53 also serves as the wiring CL.
- the edges of the bottom surfaces of the openings in insulating layer 45 and insulating layer 46 have a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature.
- the curved shape may be formed only in insulating layer 45, or may be formed across insulating layer 45 and insulating layer 46.
- the edges of the recesses in insulating layer 52 and the edges of the protrusions in conductive layer 53 can also be similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the edges of the protrusions in conductive layer 53. This makes it possible to suppress dielectric breakdown in capacitive element 30.
- the upper end of the conductive layer 51 can be configured to be lower than the upper surface of the insulating layer 46.
- the upper end of the conductive layer 51 can also be tapered.
- the upper end of the conductive layer 51 and the upper end of the insulating layer 46 preferably have a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in FIG. 7A.
- the insulating layer 52 can also be similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the upper end of the conductive layer 51. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dielectric breakdown from occurring in the capacitance element 30.
- the outline of the conductive layer 51 in a planar view is circular, but this is not limited to this.
- the shape of the outline of the conductive layer 51 in a planar view is not limited to a circle, and can be an ellipse, a rectangle with rounded corners, or the like. It may also be a regular polygon such as an equilateral triangle, square, or regular pentagon, or a polygon other than a regular polygon.
- the outline is a concave polygon, such as a star-shaped polygon, with at least one interior angle exceeding 180 degrees, the capacitance of the capacitive element 30 can be increased.
- Other shapes include a polygon with rounded corners, or a closed curve that combines straight lines and curves.
- the horizontal cross-sectional shape of the conductive layer 51 can also be considered to be annular.
- the horizontal cross-sectional shape of the conductive layer 51 is not limited to annular, and can be any shape as long as it is annular.
- it can be an annular, elliptical, regular polygonal, polygonal other than a regular polygonal, concave polygonal, polygonal with rounded corners, etc.
- the capacitive element 30 illustrated in Figure 3A and elsewhere is a so-called cylinder-type or trench-type capacitive element.
- the configuration of the capacitive element 30 is not limited to this, and a pillar-type capacitive element, for example, may also be used.
- Figure 5 shows an example in which a pillar-type capacitive element 30a is used.
- a columnar conductive layer 51 is provided on conductive layer 25, and an insulating layer 52 is provided covering the top and side surfaces of conductive layer 51.
- a conductive layer 53 is further provided to cover the top and side surfaces of conductive layer 51 via insulating layer 52.
- the outline shape of conductive layer 51 in a plan view is typically circular, but can also be any of the various shapes described above.
- the semiconductor device 10 be provided with a layer in which the memory cells 15 are provided, stacked on top of a layer in which the functional circuits are provided.
- the functional circuits may include, for example, a drive circuit for driving the memory cells 15, as well as an arithmetic circuit and a power supply circuit.
- the drive circuit may include, for example, one or more of a row decoder, column decoder, row driver, column driver, input circuit, output circuit, sense amplifier, etc. This not only reduces the footprint of the semiconductor chip including the semiconductor device 10, but also shortens the wiring length compared to when the functional circuits and memory cells 15 are arranged side by side, thereby achieving high-speed operation and low power consumption.
- Figure 6 shows an example in which a transistor 90 that constitutes a functional circuit is placed below the insulating layer 11.
- one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the transistor 90 is connected to a conductive layer 24 that functions as a bit line.
- Transistor 90 is a transistor in which a channel is formed in a portion of substrate 91, which is a single-crystal semiconductor substrate.
- Substrate 91 is typically made of single-crystal silicon.
- Substrate 91 can also be made of a semiconductor made of a single element such as germanium, or a compound semiconductor made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide, gallium oxide, or gallium nitride.
- substrate 91 can be a semiconductor substrate having an insulator region within the aforementioned semiconductor substrate, such as an SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrate.
- SOI Silicon On Insulator
- Transistor 90 is provided on substrate 91 and has a conductive layer 94 that functions as a gate, an insulating layer 93 that functions as a gate insulating layer, a semiconductor region 92 that is part of substrate 91, and low-resistance regions 95a and 95b that function as source and drain regions. Transistor 90 may be either a p-channel or n-channel type. An element isolation layer 98 is provided on substrate 91 between two adjacent transistors 90.
- the semiconductor region 92 in which the channel is formed has a convex shape (fin shape). Also, although not shown in FIG. 6, in the X direction, the side and top surfaces of the semiconductor region 92 are covered with a conductive layer 94 via an insulating layer 93. Such a transistor 90 is also called a FIN-type transistor.
- An insulating layer 85 is provided covering the transistor 90, an insulating layer 86 is provided on the insulating layer 85, and an insulating layer 87 is provided on the insulating layer 86.
- a conductive layer 81 is provided so as to be embedded in the insulating layer 87.
- An insulating layer 11 is provided covering the conductive layer 81 and the insulating layer 87.
- a plug 82 is provided inside an opening provided in the insulating layer 85 and the insulating layer 86, and the plug 82 connects the conductive layer 81 to the low-resistance region 95b.
- a plug 83 is provided inside an opening provided in the insulating layer 41 and the insulating layer 11, and the plug 83 connects the conductive layer 24 (specifically, the conductive film 24a) to the conductive layer 81.
- a conductive layer 81 is provided as a wiring layer
- a structure in which interlayer insulating layers and wiring layers are alternately stacked also called a multilayer wiring layer
- Substrates on which transistors are formed may be, for example, insulating substrates, semiconductor substrates, or conductive substrates.
- insulating substrates include glass substrates, quartz substrates, sapphire substrates, stabilized zirconia substrates (e.g., yttria-stabilized zirconia substrates), and resin substrates.
- semiconductor substrates include semiconductor substrates made of silicon or germanium, or compound semiconductor substrates made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide, gallium oxide, and gallium nitride.
- Examples of semiconductor substrates having an insulating region within the aforementioned semiconductor substrate include silicon-on-insulator (SOI) substrates.
- Examples of conductive substrates include graphite substrates, metal substrates, alloy substrates, and conductive resin substrates. Substrates containing metal nitrides and substrates containing metal oxides can also be used. Examples of substrates include an insulating substrate having a conductive layer or semiconductor layer provided thereon, a semiconductor substrate having a conductive layer or insulating layer provided thereon, and a conductive substrate having a semiconductor layer or insulating layer provided thereon.
- a substrate provided with elements may be used, such as a capacitor, a resistor, a switch (including a transistor), a light-emitting element, a memory element, or the like.
- the semiconductor layer 21 preferably contains a metal oxide (oxide semiconductor).
- metal oxides examples include In oxide, Ga oxide, and Zn oxide.
- the metal oxide preferably contains at least In or Zn.
- the metal oxide preferably contains two or three elements selected from In, element M, and Zn.
- Element M is a metal or semimetal element with a high bond energy with oxygen, such as a metal or semimetal element with a higher bond energy with oxygen than indium.
- Specific examples of element M include Al, Ga, Sn, Y, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Zr, Mo, Hf, Ta, W, La, Ce, Nd, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, B, Si, Ge, and Sb.
- the element M contained in the metal oxide is preferably one or more of the above elements, and is preferably one or more selected from Al, Ga, Y, and Sn, with Ga being more preferred.
- a metal oxide having In, M, and Zn may be referred to as an In-M-Zn oxide.
- metal elements and metalloid elements may be collectively referred to as "metal elements," and the term “metal elements" used in this specification may include metalloid elements.
- the metal oxide is an In-M-Zn oxide
- the atomic ratio of In in the In-M-Zn oxide be equal to or greater than the atomic ratio of M.
- a composition close to these may include a range of ⁇ 30% of the desired atomic ratio.
- the atomic ratio of In in In-M-Zn oxide may be less than the atomic ratio of M.
- the metal oxide may contain one or more non-metallic elements.
- the presence of non-metallic elements in the metal oxide may increase the field-effect mobility of the transistor.
- non-metallic elements include carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and hydrogen.
- a metal oxide that does not contain Ga or has a low Ga content in the semiconductor layer 21 it is possible to create a transistor that is highly reliable when a positive bias is applied. In other words, it is possible to create a transistor with a small amount of threshold voltage variation in a PBTS (Positive Bias Temperature Stress) test. Furthermore, when using a metal oxide that contains Ga, it is preferable to make the Ga content lower than the In content. This makes it possible to realize a transistor that is both highly reliable and highly mobile.
- the metal oxide becomes highly crystalline, which can suppress the diffusion of impurities in the metal oxide. This therefore suppresses fluctuations in the transistor's electrical characteristics and improves reliability.
- the semiconductor layer 21 may have a stacked structure having two or more metal oxide layers.
- the two or more metal oxide layers of the semiconductor layer 21 may have the same or substantially the same composition.
- a stacked structure may also be used in which two or more oxide semiconductor layers with different compositions are stacked.
- the ALD method it is possible to form metal oxide layers whose compositions vary continuously in the thickness direction. This not only broadens the range of design options compared to using films with fixed compositions, but also prevents the generation of interface states between two layers with different compositions, thereby improving electrical properties and reliability.
- a metal oxide layer with a stacked structure may be formed using both the sputtering method and the ALD method.
- the semiconductor layer 21 has a two-layer structure
- a material with higher mobility (higher conductivity) for the second layer i.e., the side closer to the gate electrode, than for the first layer.
- This allows for a normally-off transistor with a large on-current. This makes it possible to achieve both low power consumption and high performance.
- a material with higher mobility than the second layer may be used for the first layer, i.e., the side in contact with the source electrode and drain electrode. This reduces the contact resistance between the semiconductor layer 21 and the source electrode or drain electrode, thereby reducing parasitic resistance and enabling a transistor with a large on-current.
- the semiconductor layer 21 has a three-layer structure
- high mobility and high conductivity mentioned above can be expressed, for example, by the high indium content. Furthermore, whether or not an element other than indium that contributes to improved conductivity is included, as well as the content of that element, also affects mobility and conductivity.
- a crystalline metal oxide layer for the semiconductor layer 21.
- a metal oxide layer having a CAAC (c-axis aligned crystal) structure, a polycrystalline structure, or a nanocrystalline (nc) structure can be used.
- CAAC c-axis aligned crystal
- nc nanocrystalline
- Region 21a of semiconductor layer 21 preferably has the above-described configuration.
- region 21b of semiconductor layer 21 is a metal oxide obtained by adding a metal element (either aluminum or hafnium, or both) to the above-described metal oxide.
- a metal element either aluminum or hafnium, or both
- the resistivity of region 21b is preferably at least 10 times that of region 21a.
- Region 21b has a higher concentration of either aluminum or hafnium, or both, than region 21a.
- the composition of the metal oxides in regions 21b and 21a was analyzed using secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS), energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDX), X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS), and Auger electron spectroscopy (AES).
- SIMS secondary ion mass spectrometry
- EDX energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy
- XPS X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy
- AES Auger electron spectroscopy
- Methods that can be used include Auger Electron Spectroscopy, Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometry (ICP-MS), and Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometry (ICP-AES).
- ICP-MS Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometry
- ICP-AES Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic
- Either or both of the aluminum and hafnium added to region 21b may combine with oxygen and exist in region 21b as aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, or hafnium aluminate. While aluminum and hafnium are described above as elements to be added to region 21b, the present invention is not limited to this.
- the element to be added to region 21b may be any element that at least increases the resistivity of region 21b.
- silicon or gallium may be added to region 21b. In this case, the concentration of silicon or gallium in region 21b will be higher than in region 21a.
- the crystallinity of region 21b may decrease due to the addition of the above-mentioned metal elements. In this case, the crystallinity of region 21b may be lower than that of region 21a.
- region 21a may have a CAAC structure, while region 21b may have an amorphous structure.
- the crystallinity of the metal oxides in regions 21b and 21a can be analyzed using, for example, X-ray diffraction (XRD), transmission electron microscopy (TEM), or electron diffraction (ED).
- Region 21b has low crystallinity and contains more oxygen vacancies than region 21a, and therefore has the function of capturing or fixing (this can also be called gettering) the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21a.
- the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21a can be captured or fixed in region 21b.
- the oxygen or hydrogen profile is measured using SIMS, the oxygen or hydrogen concentration is higher in region 21b than in region 21a.
- excess oxygen refers to oxygen in an amount greater than that which satisfies the stoichiometric composition.
- the hydrogen concentration in region 21a which functions as a channel formation region, can be reduced, thereby suppressing a negative shift in the initial characteristics of transistor 20 and achieving normally-off characteristics. Furthermore, negative drift degradation during +GBT stress testing can be suppressed.
- the excess oxygen in region 21a in region 21b can be reduced, and the formation of electron traps caused by the excess oxygen can be suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress an excessive positive shift in the initial characteristics of transistor 20 caused by the electron traps. It also makes it possible to suppress excessive positive drift degradation in a +GBT stress test. As described above, by gettering the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21a to region 21b, the electrical characteristics and reliability of transistor 20 can be improved.
- OS transistors have extremely high field-effect mobility compared to transistors using amorphous silicon. Furthermore, OS transistors have extremely low source-drain leakage current in an off state (hereinafter also referred to as off-state current), and can retain charge accumulated in a capacitor connected in series with the transistor for a long period of time. Furthermore, the use of OS transistors can reduce the power consumption of semiconductor devices.
- a semiconductor device can also be applied to a display device, for example.
- a display device For example, To increase the light-emitting luminance of a light-emitting device included in a pixel circuit of a display device, it is necessary to increase the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device. To achieve this, it is necessary to increase the source-drain voltage of a driving transistor included in the pixel circuit. Because an OS transistor has a higher source-drain breakdown voltage than a transistor using silicon (hereinafter referred to as a Si transistor), a high voltage can be applied between the source and drain of the OS transistor. Therefore, by using an OS transistor as the driving transistor included in the pixel circuit, it is possible to increase the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device and increase the light-emitting luminance of the light-emitting device.
- an OS transistor When the transistor operates in the saturation region, an OS transistor can reduce the change in source-drain current in response to a change in gate-source voltage compared to a Si transistor. Therefore, by using an OS transistor as the driving transistor included in a pixel circuit, the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device can be precisely controlled. This allows for a greater number of gray levels in the pixel circuit. Furthermore, a stable current can be supplied even if the electrical characteristics (e.g., resistance) of the light-emitting device fluctuate or vary.
- OS transistors exhibit little change in electrical characteristics due to radiation exposure, meaning they have high radiation resistance, making them suitable for use in environments where radiation may be present. It can also be said that OS transistors have high reliability against radiation.
- OS transistors can be used favorably in pixel circuits of X-ray flat panel detectors.
- OS transistors can be used favorably in semiconductor devices used in outer space.
- radiation include electromagnetic radiation (e.g., X-rays and gamma rays) and particle radiation (e.g., alpha rays, beta rays, proton rays, and neutron rays).
- the semiconductor material that can be used for the semiconductor layer 21 is not limited to oxide semiconductors.
- semiconductors made of single elements or compound semiconductors can be used.
- semiconductors made of single elements include silicon (including single crystal silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline silicon, and amorphous silicon) and germanium.
- compound semiconductors include gallium arsenide and silicon germanium.
- compound semiconductors include organic semiconductors, nitride semiconductors, and oxide semiconductors. Note that these semiconductor materials may contain impurities as dopants.
- the semiconductor layer 21 may have a layered material that functions as a semiconductor.
- a layered material is a general term for a group of materials that have a layered crystal structure.
- a layered crystal structure is a structure in which layers formed by covalent or ionic bonds are stacked via bonds weaker than covalent or ionic bonds, such as van der Waals bonds.
- Layered materials have high electrical conductivity within each layer, that is, high two-dimensional electrical conductivity.
- transition metal chalcogenides that can be used as the semiconductor layer of a transistor include molybdenum sulfide (typically MoS 2 ), molybdenum selenide (typically MoSe 2 ), molybdenum tellurium (typically MoTe 2 ), tungsten sulfide (typically WS 2 ), tungsten selenide (typically WSe 2 ), tungsten tellurium (typically WTe 2 ) , hafnium sulfide (typically HfS 2 ), hafnium selenide (typically HfSe 2 ), zirconium sulfide (typically ZrS 2 ), and zirconium selenide (typically ZrSe 2 ).
- MoS 2 molybdenum sulfide
- MoSe 2 molybdenum selenide
- MoTe 2 moly MoTe 2
- tungsten sulfide typically WS 2
- tungsten selenide
- the crystallinity of the semiconductor material used for the semiconductor layer 21 is not particularly limited, and any of an amorphous semiconductor, a single-crystal semiconductor, or a semiconductor with crystallinity other than single crystal (a polycrystalline semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or a semiconductor with a crystalline region in part) may be used.
- the use of a crystalline semiconductor is preferable because it can suppress degradation of the transistor characteristics.
- a nitride insulating film such as silicon nitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum nitride, or aluminum nitride oxide can also be used for the insulating layer 22.
- the insulating layer 22 may have a stacked structure, for example, a stacked structure including one or more oxide insulating films and one or more nitride insulating films.
- the insulating layer 22 is preferably made of a laminated insulating material made of a high-k material, and preferably has a laminated structure of a material with a high dielectric constant (high-k) and a material with a higher dielectric strength than the high-k material.
- the insulating layer 22 can be made of an insulating film (also called ZAZ) in which zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, and zirconium oxide are laminated in this order.
- the insulating film also called ZAZA
- the insulating film can be made of an insulating film (also called hafnium zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, hafnium zirconium oxide, and aluminum oxide) in this order.
- an insulating film also called hafnium zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, hafnium zirconium oxide, and aluminum oxide.
- a material exhibiting ferroelectricity may be used for the insulating layer 22.
- materials exhibiting ferroelectricity include metal oxides such as hafnium oxide, zirconium oxide, and HfZrO x (X is a real number greater than 0).
- metal oxides such as hafnium oxide, zirconium oxide, and HfZrO x (X is a real number greater than 0).
- a metal oxide obtained by adding Y (yttrium) to HfZrO x (X is a real number greater than 0) may be used. Adding Y (yttrium) to HfZrO x (X is a real number greater than 0) can enhance the ferroelectricity.
- the insulating layer 22 has a two-layer structure
- an insulating film that captures or fixes hydrogen it is preferable to use a hafnium oxide film, a hafnium silicate film, an aluminum oxide film, etc. Furthermore, as an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen, it is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, a gallium oxide film, etc.
- an insulating film that releases oxygen when heated may be used for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, and an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen may be used for the film located on the conductive layer 23 side.
- an insulating film that releases oxygen when heated may be used for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, and an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen may be used for the film located on the conductive layer 23 side.
- the insulating layer 22 has a three-layer structure, it is preferable to use an insulating film made of a material with a lower dielectric constant than the other films for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, an insulating film with barrier properties against hydrogen and oxygen for the film on the conductive layer 23 side, and an insulating film with the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen for the film between them.
- Silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride can be used as a material with a low dielectric constant. With this configuration, oxygen can be supplied to the semiconductor layer 21 from the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21. Furthermore, the film on the conductive layer 23 side prevents oxygen from diffusing toward the conductive layer 23, suppressing oxidation of the conductive layer 23.
- an insulating film having barrier properties against oxygen it is preferable to use an aluminum oxide film, silicon nitride film, hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, etc.
- an insulating film having barrier properties against oxygen and hydrogen it is preferable to use an aluminum oxide film, silicon nitride film, hafnium oxide film, etc.
- the insulating layer 22 has a four-layer structure, it is preferable to use an insulating film with oxygen barrier properties for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, an insulating film made of a material with a lower dielectric constant than the other films for the film next closest to the semiconductor layer 21, an insulating film with the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen for the film next closest to the semiconductor layer 21, and an insulating film with hydrogen and oxygen barrier properties for the film closest to the conductive layer 23. That is, in addition to the three-layer structure described above, a configuration can be achieved in which a film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21 is added. By using an insulating film with oxygen barrier properties for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, oxygen desorption from the semiconductor layer 21 can be suppressed. In this case, it is preferable to use an aluminum oxide film for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21. Aluminum oxide not only has oxygen barrier properties, but also has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen, which effectively prevents hydrogen from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 21.
- each insulating film is preferably a thin film.
- the thickness of the insulating layer 22 1 nm or more and 20 nm or less, preferably 3 nm or more and 10 nm or less, the subthreshold swing value (also known as the S value) of the transistor can be reduced.
- each insulating film is preferably 0.1 nm or more and 10 nm or less, more preferably 0.1 nm or more and 5 nm or less, more preferably 0.5 nm or more and 5 nm or less, more preferably 1 nm or more and less than 5 nm, and even more preferably 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less.
- a four-layer structure is used in which an aluminum oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, and a silicon nitride film are stacked in this order from the semiconductor layer 21 side, and the thicknesses of these films are preferably 1 nm, 2 nm, 2 nm, and 1 nm from the semiconductor layer 21 side.
- carrier property refers to a property that makes it difficult for a corresponding substance to diffuse (also referred to as a property that makes it difficult for a corresponding substance to permeate, a property that the permeability of a corresponding substance is low, or a function that suppresses the diffusion of a corresponding substance).
- hydrogen refers to at least one of, for example, a hydrogen atom, a hydrogen molecule, and a substance bonded to hydrogen, such as a water molecule or OH ⁇ .
- impurities when impurities are described as a corresponding substance, unless otherwise specified, they refer to impurities in a channel formation region or a semiconductor layer, and refer to at least one of, for example, a hydrogen atom, a hydrogen molecule, a water molecule, a nitrogen atom, a nitrogen molecule, a nitrogen oxide molecule (such as N 2 O, NO, or NO 2 ), a copper atom, and the like.
- oxygen when oxygen is described as a corresponding substance, it refers to at least one of, for example, an oxygen atom, an oxygen molecule, and the like.
- the electrical characteristics of a transistor using a metal oxide film can be stabilized by surrounding it with an insulating film that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities and oxygen.
- the insulating film that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities and oxygen can be, for example, an insulating film containing one or more elements selected from boron, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine, magnesium, aluminum, silicon, phosphorus, chlorine, argon, gallium, germanium, yttrium, zirconium, lanthanum, neodymium, hafnium, and tantalum, and can be used in a single layer or a stacked layer.
- the insulating film that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities and oxygen can be made of metal oxides such as aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, gallium oxide, germanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zirconium oxide, lanthanum oxide, neodymium oxide, hafnium oxide, or tantalum oxide, or nitrides such as aluminum nitride, silicon nitride oxide, or silicon nitride.
- metal oxides such as aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, gallium oxide, germanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zirconium oxide, lanthanum oxide, neodymium oxide, hafnium oxide, or tantalum oxide
- nitrides such as aluminum nitride, silicon nitride oxide, or silicon nitride.
- insulating film materials that function to suppress the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen include metal oxides such as aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, gallium oxide, germanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zirconium oxide, lanthanum oxide, neodymium oxide, hafnium oxide, and tantalum oxide.
- examples of insulating film materials that function to suppress the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen include oxides containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate).
- examples of insulating film materials that function to suppress the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen include nitrides such as aluminum nitride, aluminum titanium nitride, silicon nitride oxide, and silicon nitride.
- Insulating film materials capable of capturing or adhering hydrogen include metal oxides such as oxides containing hafnium, oxides containing magnesium, oxides containing aluminum, and oxides containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate). These metal oxides may also contain zirconium, such as oxides containing hafnium and zirconium. Metal oxides with an amorphous structure have dangling bonds in some oxygen atoms, which enhance their ability to capture or adhering hydrogen. Therefore, these metal oxides preferably have an amorphous structure. For example, an amorphous structure may be achieved by including silicon in these oxides. For example, it is preferable to use an oxide containing hafnium and silicon (hafnium silicate). Metal oxides may have crystalline regions and/or grain boundaries in some areas.
- the conductive layer 24 and the conductive layer 25 are in contact with the semiconductor layer 21.
- an oxide semiconductor is used as the semiconductor layer 21
- an insulating oxide e.g., aluminum oxide
- titanium, tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium, and oxides containing lanthanum and nickel are preferable because they are conductive materials that are resistant to oxidation or materials that maintain their conductivity even when oxidized.
- conductive oxides such as indium oxide, zinc oxide, In-Sn oxide, In-Zn oxide, In-W oxide, In-W-Zn oxide, In-Ti oxide, In-Ti-Sn oxide, In-Sn-Si oxide, and Ga-Zn oxide can be used.
- Conductive oxides containing indium are particularly preferred due to their high conductivity.
- oxide materials such as In-Ga-Zn oxide that can be used for the semiconductor layer 21 can also be used as a conductive layer by increasing the carrier concentration.
- conductive layer 24 and conductive layer 25 can each be a single-layer structure of the above-mentioned conductive oxide film, a three-layer structure in which a titanium nitride film, a tungsten film, and a titanium nitride film are laminated in this order, a two-layer structure in which a ruthenium film or a ruthenium oxide film is laminated on tungsten, a two-layer structure in which a ruthenium film or a ruthenium oxide film is laminated on the above-mentioned conductive oxide film, or a two-layer structure in which the above-mentioned conductive oxide film is laminated on a ruthenium film or a ruthenium oxide film.
- the conductive layer 23 functions as a gate electrode and can be made of a variety of conductive materials.
- a metal element selected from the group consisting of aluminum, chromium, copper, silver, gold, platinum, tantalum, nickel, cobalt, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, indium, ruthenium, iridium, strontium, and lanthanum, or an alloy containing such a metal element.
- Nitrides of the above metals or alloys, or oxides of the above metals or alloys may also be used.
- tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium, and oxides containing lanthanum and nickel are preferable.
- Highly conductive semiconductors, such as polycrystalline silicon containing impurity elements such as phosphorus, and silicides such as nickel silicide may also be used.
- nitrides and oxides that can be used for the conductive layers 24 and 25 may also be applied to the conductive layer 23.
- conductive layer 23, conductive film 24a, and conductive layer 25 also function as wiring, it is preferable to use a laminate of low-resistance conductive materials.
- the upper layer of conductive film 24a and conductive layer 25 can be made of a low-resistance conductive material that can be used for conductive layer 23 described above.
- the insulating layer 43 can be used as an interlayer insulating film.
- it is preferably formed by a film formation method such as a sputtering method or a plasma CVD method.
- a film formation method such as a sputtering method or a plasma CVD method.
- a sputtering method without using hydrogen gas as a film formation gas, a film with an extremely low hydrogen content can be obtained. Therefore, the supply of hydrogen to the semiconductor layer 21 can be suppressed, and the electrical characteristics of the transistor 20 can be stabilized.
- the insulating layer 43 is in contact with the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 21, it is preferable to use an oxide insulating film. In particular, it is preferable to use an oxide insulating film that releases oxygen when heated.
- the oxide insulating film that can be used for the gate insulating layer described above can be used as the insulating layer 43.
- the insulating layer 43 functions as an interlayer insulating layer, it is preferable to use a film formation method that allows film formation at a higher film formation rate than other insulating layers.
- the insulating layer 43 can be formed by a plasma CVD method.
- TEOS Tetra-Ethyl-Ortho-Silicate, chemical formula: Si( OC2H5 ) 4 ). This can improve productivity.
- Insulating layer 11, insulating layer 42, insulating layer 44, and insulating layer 46 each function as an interlayer insulating layer.
- the insulating materials that can be used for insulating layer 43 above can be used for insulating layer 11, insulating layer 42, insulating layer 44, and insulating layer 46.
- the insulating layer 52 functions as a dielectric for the capacitance element 30.
- the same insulating material as the insulating layer 22 can be used for the insulating layer 52.
- the capacitance element 30 can be made into a ferroelectric capacitor, thereby realizing a non-volatile memory device.
- a resistance change type memory element that utilizes the electric field induced giant resistance change (CER: Colossal Electro-Resistance) effect can also be used as the capacitance element 30.
- a recess is formed in the conductive film 24b of the conductive layer 24. More specifically, the thickness of the non-overlapping area of the conductive film 24b is thinner than the area where the conductive film 24b overlaps with the insulating layer 43. Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 21 contacts not only the top surface of the recess in the conductive film 24b but also the side surfaces. This configuration increases the contact area between the semiconductor layer 21 and the conductive film 24b, further reducing the contact resistance between them.
- the end of the recess in the conductive film 24b has a curved shape (which can also be called a rounded shape) with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 8B.
- the ends of the recesses in the insulating layer 22 and conductive layer 23 can also be made similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the end of the recess in the conductive layer 23. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of dielectric breakdown in the transistor 20.
- conductive layer 25 can have a layered structure of conductive film 25a and conductive film 25b on conductive film 25a.
- a recess can be formed in conductive film 25b, similar to conductive film 24b shown in Figure 8B.
- conductive layer 51 contacts not only the top surface of conductive film 25b in the recess, but also the side surfaces. With this configuration, the contact area between conductive layer 51 and conductive film 25b can be increased, further reducing the contact resistance between them.
- the ends of the recesses in the conductive film 25b can also be made similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the ends of the protrusions in the conductive layer 53. This makes it possible to prevent dielectric breakdown in the capacitive element 30.
- FIG. 9A differs from the above-described configuration example mainly in that the insulating layer 31 is not provided.
- insulating layer 32 is provided in contact with the surface of conductive layer 23 on the insulating layer 33 side. A portion of insulating layer 32 covers the horizontal portion of semiconductor layer 21 via conductive layer 23 and insulating layer 22. In addition, insulating layer 33 has a portion that covers the horizontal portion of semiconductor layer 21 via insulating layer 32, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 22. By not providing insulating layer 31, the step of forming insulating layer 31 can be omitted, which is preferable because it simplifies the manufacturing process.
- Figure 9B shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses illustrated in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration.
- an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen is preferable to use as insulating layer 32 or insulating layer 33 instead of insulating layer 31. It is preferable to use a hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, aluminum oxide film, etc. as an insulating film that can capture or fix hydrogen and that can be used as insulating layer 32 or insulating layer 33.
- FIG. 9C differs from the second modification mainly in that it does not have the insulating layer 33 and that the shape of the insulating layer 32 is different.
- Insulating layer 32 is provided so as to fill the area surrounded by conductive layer 23, insulating layer 22, semiconductor layer 21, and insulating layer 34. This configuration eliminates the need for steps to form insulating layers 31 and 33, thereby simplifying the manufacturing process.
- Figure 9D shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses illustrated in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration.
- insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen as insulating layer 32 instead of insulating layer 31.
- insulating films that can be used for insulating layer 32 and that have the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen include hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, and aluminum oxide film.
- FIG. 10A differs from the above-described configuration example mainly in that an insulating layer 22 is provided between an insulating layer 32 and a semiconductor layer 21 .
- the top surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is not exposed during the process of forming the insulating layer 32 and is covered by the insulating layer 22, thereby reducing damage to the semiconductor layer 21 and improving reliability.
- Figure 10B shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses exemplified in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration.
- Figures 10C and 10D show an example in which the insulating layer 31 is not provided, as in Variation 2 above. Although not shown here, a configuration in which the insulating layer 31 and insulating layer 33 are not provided may also be used, as in Variation 3 above.
- FIG. 11A differs from the above-described configuration example mainly in that a region 21b is disposed between a pair of regions 21a in a cross-sectional view of the semiconductor layer 21 in the Y direction.
- a pair of regions 21a separated by region 21b is formed between two transistors 20 provided in opening 47. Furthermore, insulating layer 32 is provided in contact with the upper surface of region 21b. In this case, it is preferable that the boundary between region 21a and region 21b is roughly flush with the side surfaces of insulating layer 22, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 31. In other words, it is preferable that region 21b is provided so as to overlap the region between the pair of insulating layers 22, the region between the pair of conductive layers 23, and the region between the pair of insulating layers 31.
- Figure 11B shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses exemplified in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration.
- Figures 11C and 11D show an example in which the insulating layer 31 is not provided, as in Variation 2 above.
- a configuration in which the insulating layer 31 and insulating layer 33 are not provided may also be used, as in Variation 3 above.
- Example of manufacturing method An example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described below, taking the semiconductor device 10 including the memory cell 15 exemplified in the above structure example as an example.
- the thin films (insulating films, semiconductor films, conductive films, etc.) that make up semiconductor devices can be formed using methods such as sputtering, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), vacuum evaporation, pulsed laser deposition (PLD), and atomic layer deposition (ALD).
- CVD methods include plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition (PECVD) and thermal CVD.
- PECVD plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition
- thermal CVD metal organic chemical vapor deposition
- thin films that make up semiconductor devices can be formed by methods such as spin coating, dipping, spray coating, inkjet printing, dispensing, screen printing, offset printing, doctor knife, slit coating, roll coating, curtain coating, and knife coating.
- Sputtering methods include RF sputtering, which uses a high-frequency power supply for sputtering; DC sputtering, which uses a direct current power supply; and pulsed DC sputtering, which changes the voltage applied to the electrode in a pulsed manner.
- RF sputtering is preferable for depositing films using insulating targets.
- DC sputtering is mainly used when depositing films using conductive targets.
- DC sputtering can also be used to form insulating films through reactive sputtering using pulsed DC sputtering.
- pulsed DC sputtering can be used when depositing films of compounds such as oxides, nitrides, and carbides using reactive sputtering.
- CVD methods can be classified into plasma-enhanced CVD (PECVD), which uses plasma; thermal CVD (TCVD), which uses heat; and photo-CVD (photo-CVD), which uses light. They can also be further divided into metal CVD (MCVD) and MOCVD, depending on the source gas used.
- PECVD plasma-enhanced CVD
- TCVD thermal CVD
- photo-CVD photo-CVD
- MOCVD metal CVD
- MOCVD metal CVD
- Plasma CVD can produce high-quality films at relatively low temperatures. Furthermore, because thermal CVD does not use plasma, it is possible to minimize plasma damage to the workpiece. Furthermore, because thermal CVD does not cause plasma damage during film formation, it can produce films with fewer defects.
- ALD methods that can be used include thermal ALD, in which the reaction between the precursor and reactant is carried out using only thermal energy, and PEALD, which uses plasma-excited reactants.
- CVD and ALD are film formation methods that are less affected by the shape of the workpiece and have good step coverage.
- ALD in particular, has excellent step coverage and excellent thickness uniformity, making it suitable for coating the surfaces of openings with high aspect ratios.
- CVD has a relatively slow film formation rate, it may be preferable to use it in combination with other film formation methods, such as CVD, which has a faster film formation rate.
- the CVD method allows for the deposition of films of any composition by adjusting the flow rate ratio of the raw material gases.
- the CVD method allows for the deposition of films with continuously changing compositions by changing the flow rate ratio of the raw material gases while the film is being deposited.
- the time required for film deposition can be shortened compared to when multiple deposition chambers are used, as no time is required for transport or pressure adjustment. This can potentially increase the productivity of semiconductor devices.
- films of any desired composition can be deposited by simultaneously introducing multiple different types of precursors.
- films of any desired composition can be deposited by controlling the number of cycles of each precursor.
- films with continuously changing compositions can be deposited.
- the thin films that make up the semiconductor device can be processed using methods such as photolithography.
- the thin films may be processed using methods such as nanoimprinting, sandblasting, and lift-off.
- island-shaped thin films may be directly formed using a film-forming method that uses a shielding mask such as a metal mask.
- the light used for exposure can be, for example, i-line (wavelength 365 nm), g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), or a mixture of these.
- Other light sources that can be used include ultraviolet light, KrF laser light, and ArF laser light.
- Exposure can also be performed using immersion exposure technology. Extreme ultraviolet (EUV) light or X-rays can also be used as light for exposure. Electron beams can also be used instead of light for exposure. Extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, or electron beams are preferred because they enable extremely fine processing. When exposure is performed by scanning a beam such as an electron beam, a photomask is not required.
- Methods such as dry etching, wet etching, and sandblasting can be used to etch thin films.
- FIGS. 12A to 21 are schematic cross-sectional views corresponding to each step in the exemplary fabrication method described below.
- FIGS. 12A to 12C, 13A, 14A, 15A, 16A, and 17A to 21 correspond to cross sections taken along the line O-P-Q in FIG. 1A.
- FIGS. 13B, 14B, 15B, and 16B correspond to cross sections taken along the line R-S in FIG. 1A.
- a substrate (not shown) is prepared, an insulating layer 11 is formed on the substrate, and an insulating layer 41 is formed on the insulating layer 11.
- the substrate used can be one that is heat-resistant enough to withstand at least the subsequent heat treatment.
- Insulating layer 11 can be an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film or a silicon oxynitride film.
- Insulating layer 41 can be an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride oxide film.
- the insulating layers 11 and 41 can be formed by sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, ALD, or other methods. If the surface on which insulating layer 11 is to be formed is not flat, a planarization process may be performed after insulating layer 11 is formed to flatten the top surface of insulating layer 11.
- a conductive film that will become conductive film 24a and a conductive film that will become conductive film 24b are formed in this order on insulating layer 41.
- Each conductive film can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
- a resist mask is formed on the conductive film that will become conductive film 24b, and unnecessary portions of each conductive film are removed by etching, thereby forming conductive layer 24 including conductive film 24a and conductive film 24b.
- conductive layer 24 is formed to extend in the X direction.
- an insulating film that will become insulating layer 42 is formed to cover conductive layer 24, and then planarization is performed until the top surface of conductive film 24b is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 42 ( Figure 12A).
- the insulating film that will become insulating layer 42 can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
- conductive layer 24 may also be formed after insulating layer 42 has been formed.
- an opening (or recess) for burying conductive layer 24 is formed to form insulating layer 42.
- two conductive films that will become conductive film 24a and conductive film 24b are deposited in order, and then a planarization process is performed until the top surface of insulating layer 42 is exposed, thereby forming conductive layer 24.
- an insulating layer 43 is formed on the conductive layer 24 and the insulating layer 42 ( Figure 12B).
- an insulating film that will become the insulating layer 43 is deposited.
- the insulating film is etched using photolithography to form an opening 47 extending in the Y direction.
- the opening 47 is formed so as to reach the conductive film 25b and the insulating layer 42. In this way, the insulating layer 43 having the opening 47 can be formed.
- the edge of the bottom surface of the opening 47 has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 7A, etc.
- insulating layer 43 when processing insulating layer 43, there is a risk that insulating layer 42 may be etched and become thinner. In such cases, an insulating layer that functions as an etching stop film can be provided below the insulating film that will become insulating layer 43. After forming insulating layer 43 by etching, the etching stop film can be subsequently etched to expose the top surface of insulating layer 42, etc.
- the thickness of the insulating layer 43 affects the channel length of the transistor, it is important to ensure that the thickness of the insulating layer 43 does not vary.
- the side surfaces of the insulating layer 43 may be inclined relative to the direction perpendicular to the surface on which they are formed, resulting in a tapered shape.
- a portion of the upper part of the conductive film 24b can be etched to reduce the thickness of the area that does not overlap with the insulating layer 43. This allows the conductive film 24b with a recess, as shown in Figure 8B, etc., to be formed. At this time, it is preferable to determine the etching conditions so that the conductive film 24b does not disappear, or to form the conductive film 24b thick in advance.
- the end of the recess in the conductive film 24b has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 8B.
- the insulating film that becomes insulating layer 43 is preferably an oxide film that contains enough oxygen to release oxygen when heated and has a low hydrogen content.
- the insulating film that becomes insulating layer 43 can be formed by a film formation method such as PECVD, sputtering, or ALD, but sputtering is particularly preferred.
- a film formation method such as PECVD, sputtering, or ALD, but sputtering is particularly preferred.
- a gas that does not contain hydrogen and instead contains oxygen an insulating film with an extremely low hydrogen content and excess oxygen can be formed.
- oxygen can be supplied from insulating layer 43 to the channel formation region of semiconductor layer 21, reducing oxygen vacancies.
- heat treatment may be performed.
- the heat treatment may be performed at a temperature of 250°C to 650°C, preferably 300°C to 500°C, and more preferably 320°C to 450°C.
- the heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere, or an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more.
- the oxygen gas concentration may be approximately 20%.
- the heat treatment may be performed under reduced pressure.
- the heat treatment may be performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere, followed by an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more to replenish desorbed oxygen.
- an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more to replenish desorbed oxygen.
- the gas used in the heat treatment be highly purified.
- the amount of moisture contained in the gas used in the heat treatment should be 1 ppb (0.001 ppm) or less, preferably 0.1 ppb or less, and more preferably 0.05 ppb or less.
- a process for supplying oxygen may be carried out. This allows oxygen to be supplied from insulating layer 43 to semiconductor film 21f later, due to heat or other factors applied after the formation of semiconductor film 21f.
- Examples of treatments for supplying oxygen include heat treatment in an oxygen-containing atmosphere and plasma treatment (including microwave plasma treatment) in an oxygen-containing atmosphere.
- microwave plasma treatment may refer to treatment using, for example, an apparatus having a power source that generates high-density plasma using microwaves.
- oxygen may be supplied to the insulating layer by depositing an oxide film (preferably a metal oxide film) in an oxygen-containing atmosphere by sputtering. The deposited oxide film may be removed immediately or may be left as is.
- the oxygen-containing atmosphere includes not only oxygen gas (O 2 ) but also atmospheres containing gases of oxygen-containing compounds such as ozone (O 3 ) and dinitrogen monoxide (N 2 O).
- a semiconductor film 21f which will later become the semiconductor layer 21, is deposited to cover the insulating layer 43, the conductive film 24b, and the insulating layer 42 ( Figure 12C).
- a metal oxide (oxide semiconductor) film with semiconductor properties can be used as the semiconductor film 21f.
- the metal oxide film can be formed using a suitable method, such as sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. It is preferable that the metal oxide film be formed in contact with the substantially vertical side surfaces of the insulating layer 43. Therefore, it is preferable to use a film formation method with good coverage for forming the metal oxide film, and it is more preferable to use the ALD method.
- the metal oxide film preferably has crystallinity.
- the metal oxide film preferably has a metal oxide having a CAAC structure.
- a treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film during or after the formation of the metal oxide film.
- treatments to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film include heat treatment, plasma treatment, microwave (typically 2.45 GHz) treatment, microwave plasma treatment, and light (e.g., ultraviolet light) irradiation treatment. Note that several of these treatments may be performed simultaneously or sequentially. For example, heat treatment and microwave plasma treatment may be performed simultaneously. Alternatively, microwave plasma treatment may be performed after heat treatment.
- the treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film multiple times during the formation of the metal oxide film.
- first metal oxide film and the second metal oxide film There are no particular limitations on the deposition method for the first metal oxide film and the second metal oxide film; ALD or sputtering may be used, respectively.
- Depositing the first metal oxide film by ALD is particularly preferable because it prevents elements from the layers constituting the surface to be formed from being mixed into the first metal oxide film and the second metal oxide film (also known as mixing). This is particularly suitable when the elements contained in the layers constituting the surface to be formed inhibit the crystallization of the metal oxide (e.g., when silicon, carbon, etc. are included).
- the first metal oxide film and the second metal oxide film may have different compositions. While a stacked structure of a first metal oxide film and a second metal oxide film is illustrated here, this is not a limitation. Similar processing can be applied to metal oxide films with a single layer or a stacked structure of three or more layers.
- treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film may be performed after the metal oxide film is formed. Specifically, this treatment may be performed directly on the formed metal oxide film, or may be performed via another film, such as an insulating film, formed on the metal oxide film.
- microwave plasma treatment may be performed after the metal oxide film is formed, or an insulating film (e.g., a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, etc.) may be formed after the metal oxide film is formed, and then heat treatment or microwave plasma treatment may be performed on the metal oxide film via the insulating film.
- the above-mentioned treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film can also serve as a treatment to remove impurities contained in the metal oxide film.
- impurities contained in the metal oxide film For example, carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, and the like contained in the metal oxide film can be preferably removed.
- oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide film can be reduced.
- the temperature of the heat treatment (substrate temperature) to room temperature (e.g., 25°C) or higher, 100°C or higher and 700°C or lower, 100°C or higher and 600°C or lower, or 300°C or higher and 450°C or lower.
- Metal oxide films can be formed, for example, by sputtering using a metal oxide target.
- the metal oxide film be a dense film with as few defects as possible. It is also preferable that the metal oxide film be a highly pure film with as little impurities as possible, such as hydrogen and water. It is particularly preferable to use a crystalline metal oxide film as the metal oxide film.
- oxygen gas when forming a metal oxide film, oxygen gas may be mixed with an inert gas (e.g., helium gas, argon gas, xenon gas, etc.).
- an inert gas e.g., helium gas, argon gas, xenon gas, etc.
- the higher the ratio of oxygen gas to the total film-forming gas when forming the metal oxide film hereinafter also referred to as the oxygen flow ratio
- the higher the ratio of oxygen gas to the total film-forming gas when forming the metal oxide film hereinafter also referred to as the oxygen flow ratio
- the lower the oxygen flow ratio the less highly crystallinity the metal oxide film can be, resulting in a transistor with a higher on-state current.
- the higher the substrate temperature the higher the crystallinity and density of the resulting metal oxide film.
- the lower the substrate temperature the lower the crystallinity and electrical conductivity of the resulting metal oxide film.
- the conditions for forming the metal oxide film are that the substrate temperature be between room temperature and 250°C, preferably between room temperature and 200°C, and more preferably between room temperature and 140°C.
- the substrate temperature be between room temperature and 250°C, preferably between room temperature and 200°C, and more preferably between room temperature and 140°C.
- a substrate temperature between room temperature and less than 140°C is preferred, as this increases productivity.
- the crystallinity can be reduced.
- a film formation method such as thermal ALD (Atomic Layer Deposition) or PEALD (Plasma Enhanced ALD).
- thermal ALD Atomic Layer Deposition
- PEALD Pasma Enhanced ALD
- the thermal ALD method is preferred because it exhibits extremely high step coverage.
- the PEALD method is also preferred because it not only exhibits high step coverage but also allows for low-temperature film formation.
- a metal oxide is used for the semiconductor layer 21, it can be deposited by the ALD method using a precursor containing the constituent metal elements and an oxidizing agent.
- three precursors can be used: a precursor containing indium, a precursor containing gallium, and a precursor containing zinc.
- two precursors can be used: a precursor containing indium and a precursor containing gallium and zinc.
- Indium-containing precursors that can be used include trimethylindium, triethylindium, tris(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-3,5-heptanedionate)indium, cyclopentadienylindium, indium(III) chloride, and (3-(dimethylamino)propyl)dimethylindium.
- precursors containing gallium that can be used include trimethylgallium, triethylgallium, tris(dimethylamido)gallium(III), gallium(III) acetylacetonate, tris(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-3,5-heptanedionate)gallium, dimethylchlorogallium, diethylchlorogallium, and gallium(III) chloride.
- zinc-containing precursors that can be used include dimethyl zinc, diethyl zinc, zinc bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-3,5-heptanedionate), zinc chloride, etc.
- oxidizing agents examples include ozone, oxygen, and water.
- Methods for controlling the composition of the resulting film include adjusting the flow rate ratio of the raw material gases, the time for which the raw material gases are flowed, and the order in which the raw material gases are flowed. Adjusting these also makes it possible to deposit a film whose composition changes continuously. It is also possible to deposit two or more films with different compositions in succession.
- the heat treatment may be performed within a temperature range in which the metal oxide film does not polycrystallize, such as 250°C to 650°C, preferably 400°C to 600°C.
- the heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere, or in an atmosphere containing 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more of an oxidizing gas.
- the oxygen gas concentration should be approximately 20%.
- the heat treatment may also be performed under reduced pressure.
- heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere containing 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more of an oxidizing gas to replenish the desorbed oxygen.
- the gas used in the heat treatment be highly purified.
- the amount of moisture contained in the gas used in the heat treatment should be 1 ppb or less, preferably 0.1 ppb or less, and more preferably 0.05 ppb or less.
- semiconductor film 21f is shown as a single layer, but it may also have a laminated structure.
- it may have a two-layer structure formed by the ALD method, a three-layer structure formed by the ALD method, a two-layer structure in which the first layer is formed by the ALD method and the second layer is formed by sputtering, or a three-layer structure in which the first layer is formed by the ALD method, the second layer is formed by sputtering, and the third layer is formed by either the ALD method or the sputtering method.
- Forming the first layer by the ALD method is preferable because it can suppress mixing, but it can also be formed by sputtering.
- Semiconductor film 21f may also have a laminated structure of four or more layers.
- a sacrificial layer 61 and a resist mask 65 are formed ( Figures 13A and 13B).
- the resist mask 65 and the sacrificial layer 61 function as masks for forming the above-mentioned region 21b in the semiconductor film 21f. Therefore, the opening in the resist mask 65 is formed so as to overlap with region 21b of the semiconductor layer 21, which will be formed in a later step. Therefore, as shown in Figures 13A and 13B, the top of the conductive layer 24, in other words, the portion where region 21a will be formed in a later step, is covered by the resist mask 65.
- the sacrificial layer 61 can be made of an organic or inorganic material formed by a coating method. More specific examples include coated insulating films such as SOC (Spin On Carbon) and SOG (Spin On Glass).
- the sacrificial layer 61 can also be formed by film formation methods such as sputtering and CVD. It is preferable that the material used for the sacrificial layer 61 satisfy certain conditions, such as being able to be formed thick, being able to be formed or processed vertically, and being easy to remove (leaving no residue and causing minimal damage to the surface on which it is formed).
- the sacrificial layer 61 need not be provided if it is not required.
- the portions of the sacrificial layer 61 that are not covered by the resist mask 65 are removed by etching to form openings ( Figures 14A and 14B).
- the openings in the sacrificial layer 61 are formed so as to overlap region 21b of the semiconductor layer 21, which will be formed in a later step.
- the resist mask 65 can be removed by wet etching or dry etching. After dry etching, dry cleaning using plasma or wet cleaning using a chemical solution (including acid or alkali) or water (including carbonated water) may also be performed.
- a sacrificial layer 67 is formed to cover the semiconductor film 21f and the sacrificial layer 61 ( Figures 15A and 15B).
- the sacrificial layer 67 functions as a layer for adding a metal element to the semiconductor film 21f in a later process.
- the metal element is preferably either aluminum or hafnium, or both. Therefore, the sacrificial layer 67 is preferably an oxide film containing either aluminum or hafnium, or both.
- aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, or hafnium aluminate can be used as the sacrificial layer 67.
- the amount of oxygen contained in the sacrificial layer 67 is preferably less than the amount that satisfies the stoichiometric composition.
- the sacrificial layer 67 is formed so as to contact the semiconductor film 21f located at the bottom of the opening in the sacrificial layer 61. For this reason, it is preferable to use a film formation method with good coverage for forming the sacrificial layer 67. It is also preferable that the sacrificial layer 67 has a thin film thickness. For example, it is preferable to make the film thickness thinner than the semiconductor film 21f, and specifically, the film thickness can be set to 0.5 nm or more and 1.0 nm or less. Therefore, it is preferable to form the sacrificial layer 67 using the ALD method, which has good coverage and can form an ultra-thin film with a precise thickness.
- plasma treatment is performed to add the metal elements contained in the sacrificial layer 67 to the semiconductor film 21f, forming regions 21fa and 21fb ( Figures 16A and 16B).
- plasma treatment is performed on the thin sacrificial layer 67, the metal elements contained in the sacrificial layer 67 are impacted, allowing the metal elements to be added to the semiconductor film 21f in the region where the sacrificial layer 67 and the semiconductor film 21f contact each other.
- the region of the semiconductor film 21f in contact with the sacrificial layer 67 is doped with the metal elements and becomes region 21fb, while the region of the semiconductor film 21f covered by the sacrificial layer 61 is not doped with the metal elements and becomes region 21fa.
- region 21fb contains either aluminum or hafnium, or both. Furthermore, region 21fb has a higher concentration of either aluminum or hafnium than region 21fa.
- one or more of aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, and hafnium aluminate are formed in region 21fb.
- region 21fb Furthermore, by adding metal elements as described above, oxygen vacancies are formed in region 21fb, resulting in a decrease in crystallinity. In this way, region 21fb has an amorphous structure. Therefore, region 21fb has more oxygen vacancies and lower crystallinity than region 21fa. Such region 21fb has a higher resistivity than region 21fa. Preferably, the resistivity of region 21fb is 10 times or more the resistivity of region 21fa. In this way, region 21fb, which functions as an element isolation region, can be formed.
- reverse sputtering refers to a method of modifying a surface by bombarding ions onto a surface to be treated, as opposed to the conventional sputtering method of bombarding a sputter target with ions.
- One method of bombarding ions onto the surface to be treated is to apply a high-frequency voltage to the surface to be treated in an argon atmosphere to generate plasma near the substrate.
- argon is added to region 21fb in addition to the metal elements. In this case, the argon concentration in region 21b is higher than that in region 21a.
- argon gas helium gas, nitrous oxide (N 2 O) gas, nitrogen gas, or oxygen gas can also be used.
- the above-mentioned plasma treatment is not limited to reverse sputtering treatment.
- the above-mentioned microwave plasma treatment may be performed.
- plasma treatment may be performed without applying a bias voltage to the treatment surface.
- a sputtering device, a CVD device, a dry etching device, a CVD device using a high-density plasma source, or a dry etching device using a high-density plasma source may be used.
- heat treatment may be performed instead of the plasma treatment, during the plasma treatment, before the plasma treatment, or after the plasma treatment.
- the heat treatment for gettering please refer to the heat treatment for gettering described below.
- metal elements to semiconductor film 21f is not limited to the above.
- the metal elements may be added using ion implantation or ion doping without providing a sacrificial layer 67.
- a heat treatment is performed to capture or fix (this can also be called gettering) the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21fa in region 21fb.
- region 21fb contains more oxygen vacancies than region 21fa. Therefore, by performing the heat treatment, the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in the adjacent region 21fa can be captured or fixed.
- the transistor 20 excess oxygen in the region 21fa, which functions as a channel formation region, can be reduced, and the formation of electron traps due to the excess oxygen can be suppressed. This can suppress an excessive positive shift in the initial characteristics of the transistor 20 due to the electron traps. Furthermore, excessive positive drift degradation in a +GBT stress test can be suppressed. As described above, by capturing or fixing the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in the region 21fa in the region 21fb, the electrical characteristics and reliability of the transistor 20 can be improved.
- the heat treatment is preferably performed at a substrate temperature of 200°C or higher and 500°C or lower, preferably 400°C or higher and 450°C or lower.
- the heat treatment is preferably performed for a treatment time of 1 hour or higher and 8 hours or lower.
- the heat treatment is preferably performed in an atmosphere that does not contain oxygen gas or has a low oxygen gas content.
- the heat treatment is preferably performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere.
- the gas used in the heat treatment is preferably highly purified.
- the moisture content of the gas used in the heat treatment should be 1 ppb or lower, preferably 0.1 ppb or lower, and more preferably 0.05 ppb or lower.
- the sacrificial layers 67 and 61 are removed ( Figure 17A).
- the sacrificial layers 67 and 61 can be removed by wet etching or dry etching. After dry etching, dry cleaning using plasma or wet cleaning using a chemical solution (including acid or alkali) or water (including carbonated water) may be performed.
- the sacrificial layer 67 may remain near region 21fb.
- the plasma treatment and heat treatment may make the interface between the sacrificial layer 67 and the semiconductor film 21f unclear, in which case the sacrificial layer 67 may remain near region 21fb.
- a new sacrificial layer 62 is formed ( Figure 17B).
- the sacrificial layer 62 can be formed using the same method as the sacrificial layer 61 described above.
- a planarization process is performed until the top surface of insulating layer 43 is exposed ( Figure 17C).
- the portion of semiconductor film 21f located on top of insulating layer 43 is removed, leaving the portion located inside opening 47.
- semiconductor layer 21 can be formed that is arranged along the inside of opening 47.
- the remaining portion of region 21fa becomes region 21a
- the remaining portion of region 21fb becomes region 21b.
- regions 21a and 21b are arranged alternately within opening 47.
- the planarization process can be performed using, for example, CMP (Chemical Mechanical Polishing) or dry etching.
- CMP Chemical Mechanical Polishing
- dry etching After the semiconductor layer 21 is formed, the sacrificial layer 62 is removed. The sacrificial layer 62 can be removed in the same manner as the sacrificial layer 61 described above.
- an insulating film 22f which will later become insulating layer 22, is formed to cover semiconductor layer 21, insulating layer 43, insulating layer 42, conductive layer 24, etc.
- the insulating film 22f can be formed by a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD. It is preferable to provide the insulating film 22f with as uniform a thickness as possible on the surface of the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21. For this reason, it is particularly preferable to form the insulating film 22f by the ALD method, which is a film formation method with extremely excellent coverage. Note that if the sidewalls of the insulating layer 43 are tapered, the insulating film 22f can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering or CVD.
- a conductive film 23f which will later become the conductive layer 23, is formed to cover the insulating film 22f.
- the conductive film 23f can be formed using a method such as CVD, ALD, or sputtering. From the standpoint of coverage, it is particularly preferable to form it by the CVD method.
- an insulating film 31f which will later become the insulating layer 31, is deposited to cover the conductive film 23f ( Figure 18A).
- the insulating film 31f can be formed using a deposition method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
- the insulating film 31f is anisotropically etched to form a pair of insulating layers 31 that are arranged along the vertical portions of the conductive film 23f and are symmetrically disposed with respect to the Y-Z plane within the opening 47.
- the conductive film 23f is anisotropically etched using the insulating layer 31 as a mask to form a pair of conductive layers 23 that are symmetrically disposed with respect to the Y-Z plane within the opening 47.
- the insulating film 22f is anisotropically etched to form a pair of insulating layers 22 that are symmetrically disposed with respect to the Y-Z plane within the opening 47, sandwiching the insulating layer 43 therebetween ( Figure 18B). In this way, a pair of insulating layers 31, a pair of conductive layers 23, and a pair of insulating layers 22 that are arranged along the interior of the opening 47 can be formed.
- the insulating film 31f, conductive film 23f, and insulating film 22f may be etched in order using different etching methods, or two or more films may be etched simultaneously in a single etching process.
- insulating film 22f may be etched subsequently under the same conditions after conductive film 23f.
- region 21b can be formed in the region overlapping the region between a pair of conductive layers 23.
- a method similar to the method shown in Figures 13 to 16 can be used.
- an insulating film that will become insulating layer 32 is deposited.
- an insulating film that will become insulating layer 33 is formed so as to fill the recesses in the insulating film.
- These insulating films can be formed independently using film deposition methods such as sputtering, ALD, and CVD.
- the insulating film that will become insulating layer 32 can be formed using ALD, and the insulating film that will become insulating layer 33 can be formed using CVD.
- the insulating film that will become insulating layer 33 and the insulating film that will become insulating layer 32 are anisotropically etched in order to expose the top surfaces of semiconductor layer 21, insulating layer 22, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 31.
- an insulating film that will become insulating layer 34 is deposited, and a planarization process is performed until the top surface of insulating layer 43 is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 34 that contacts the top surfaces of conductive layer 23, insulating layer 31, insulating layer 32, and insulating layer 33 ( Figure 18C).
- the insulating film that will become insulating layer 34 can be formed by a deposition method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
- the semiconductor layer 21 is etched so that the top surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is lower than the top surface of the conductive layer 23 ( Figure 19A).
- a recess is formed that is surrounded by the side surfaces of the insulating layer 43, the side surfaces of the insulating layer 22, and the top surface of the semiconductor layer 21.
- a conductive film is deposited to fill the recess, and unnecessary portions of the conductive film are etched and removed using photolithography to form the conductive layer 25 ( Figure 19B).
- a laminated structure of conductive film 25a and conductive film 25b can also be used.
- a laminated conductive film similar to the above-mentioned conductive film 24b and conductive film 24a is formed, and the laminated conductive film is processed to form conductive layer 25.
- transistor 20 can be formed.
- insulating film that will become insulating layer 44 is deposited and planarized until the top surface of conductive layer 25 is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 44 ( Figure 19C).
- the insulating film that will become insulating layer 44 can be formed by a film deposition method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD. Note that in areas where conductive layer 25 is not provided, as shown in Figure 3B, part of insulating layer 44 is embedded in a recess surrounded by the side surfaces of insulating layer 43, insulating layer 22, and the top surface of semiconductor layer 21 (e.g., region 21b).
- Insulating layer 45 is formed, and insulating layer 46 is formed on insulating layer 45.
- Insulating layers 45 and 46 can be formed independently by a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
- openings are formed in insulating layer 46 and insulating layer 45, reaching conductive layer 25 ( Figure 20A).
- the bottom edge of the opening has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 7A, etc.
- part of the top surface of conductive layer 25 may be etched.
- insulating layer 45 can be used as an etching stop film when etching insulating layer 46.
- the conductive layer 25 has a layered structure of conductive films 25a and 25b, it is possible to thin the thickness of the central portion of the conductive film 25b by etching a portion of the upper portion of the conductive film 25b. This makes it possible to form the conductive film 25b with a recess, as shown in Figure 7B, etc. In this case, it is preferable to determine the etching conditions so that the conductive film 25b does not disappear, or to form the conductive film 25b thick in advance.
- the end of the recess in the conductive film 25b has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 7B.
- a conductive film that will become conductive layer 51 is formed to cover the top surface of insulating layer 46, the side surfaces of insulating layer 46 within the opening, the side surfaces of insulating layer 45, and the top surface of conductive layer 25.
- This conductive film can be formed using a method such as CVD, ALD, or sputtering. From the standpoint of coverage, it is particularly preferable to form it by CVD.
- a sacrificial layer is formed on the conductive film so as to cover the recessed portion of the opening, and a planarization process is performed until the top surface of the insulating layer 46 is exposed.
- the sacrificial layer is then removed, thereby forming a conductive layer 51 that is located only inside the opening ( Figure 20B).
- the conductive film can also be etched to form the conductive layer 51.
- the upper end of the conductive layer 51 can be configured to be lower than the upper surface of the insulating layer 46.
- the upper end of the conductive layer 51 can also be tapered.
- an insulating layer 52 is formed along the surfaces of the insulating layer 46 and the conductive layer 51.
- the insulating layer 52 can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD, but ALD is preferable from the perspective of coverage.
- a conductive layer 53 is formed on the insulating layer 52 so as to fill the recesses in the openings of the insulating layer 46 ( Figure 21). Thereafter, the top surface of the conductive layer 53 may be planarized if necessary.
- a semiconductor device having a transistor 20 and a capacitor 30 can be manufactured.
- This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
- the semiconductor device 900 can function as a memory device.
- FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an example configuration of a semiconductor device 900.
- the semiconductor device 900 shown in FIG. 22 has a driver circuit 910 and a memory array 920.
- the memory array 920 has one or more memory cells 950.
- FIG. 22 shows an example in which the memory array 920 has a plurality of memory cells 950 arranged in a matrix.
- Memory cell 15 as exemplified in the above embodiment, can be applied to memory cell 950.
- the drive circuit 910 includes a PSW 931 (power switch), a PSW 932, and a peripheral circuit 915.
- the peripheral circuit 915 includes a peripheral circuit 911, a control circuit 912, and a voltage generation circuit 928.
- each circuit, signal, and voltage can be selected or removed as needed. Alternatively, other circuits or signals may be added.
- Signals BW, CE, GW, CLK, WAKE, ADDR, WDA, PON1, and PON2 are input signals from the outside, and signal RDA is an output signal to the outside.
- Signal CLK is a clock signal.
- signals BW, CE, and GW are control signals.
- Signal CE is a chip enable signal
- signal GW is a global write enable signal
- signal BW is a byte write enable signal.
- Signal ADDR is an address signal.
- Signal WDA is write data
- signal RDA is read data.
- Signals PON1 and PON2 are power gating control signals. Note that signals PON1 and PON2 may be generated by control circuit 912.
- the control circuit 912 is a logic circuit that has the function of controlling the overall operation of the semiconductor device 900. For example, the control circuit 912 performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operation mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the semiconductor device 900. Alternatively, the control circuit 912 generates a control signal for the peripheral circuit 911 so that this operation mode is executed.
- the control circuit 912 performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operation mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the semiconductor device 900.
- the control circuit 912 generates a control signal for the peripheral circuit 911 so that this operation mode is executed.
- Voltage generation circuit 928 has the function of generating a negative voltage.
- Signal WAKE has the function of controlling the input of signal CLK to voltage generation circuit 928. For example, when a high-level signal is given as signal WAKE, signal CLK is input to voltage generation circuit 928, and voltage generation circuit 928 generates a negative voltage.
- the peripheral circuit 911 is a circuit for writing and reading data to and from the memory cells 950.
- the peripheral circuit 911 includes a row decoder 941, a column decoder 942, a row driver 923, a column driver 924, an input circuit 925, an output circuit 926, and a sense amplifier 927.
- the row decoder 941 and column decoder 942 have the function of decoding the signal ADDR.
- the row decoder 941 is a circuit for specifying the row to be accessed
- the column decoder 942 is a circuit for specifying the column to be accessed.
- the row driver 923 has the function of selecting the row specified by the row decoder 941.
- the column driver 924 has the function of writing data to the memory cell 950, reading data from the memory cell 950, and retaining the read data.
- the input circuit 925 has the function of holding the signal WDA.
- the data held by the input circuit 925 is output to the column driver 924.
- the output data of the input circuit 925 is the data (Din) to be written to the memory cell 950.
- the data (Dout) read from the memory cell 950 by the column driver 924 is output to the output circuit 926.
- the output circuit 926 has the function of holding Dout.
- the output circuit 926 also has the function of outputting Dout to the outside of the semiconductor device 900.
- the data output from the output circuit 926 is the signal RDA.
- PSW931 has the function of controlling the supply of VDD to the peripheral circuit 915.
- PSW932 has the function of controlling the supply of VHM to the row driver 923.
- the high power supply voltage of the semiconductor device 900 is VDD
- the low power supply voltage is GND (ground potential).
- VHM is a high power supply voltage used to set the word line to a high level and is higher than VDD.
- the on/off of PSW931 is controlled by signal PON1, and the on/off of PSW932 is controlled by signal PON2.
- the number of power domains to which VDD is supplied in the peripheral circuit 915 is one, but there can be multiple. In this case, a power switch can be provided for each power domain.
- [DOSRAM] 23A shows an example of a circuit configuration of a DRAM memory cell.
- a DRAM using an OS transistor is referred to as a dynamic oxide semiconductor random access memory (DOSRAM).
- the memory cell 951 includes a transistor M1 and a capacitor CA.
- Transistor M1 may have a front gate (sometimes simply referred to as the gate) and a back gate.
- the back gate may be connected to a wiring that supplies a constant potential or a signal, or the front gate and back gate may be connected.
- the first terminal of transistor M1 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CA, the second terminal of transistor M1 is connected to wiring BIL, and the gate of transistor M1 is connected to wiring WOL.
- the second terminal of capacitance element CA is connected to wiring CAL.
- the wiring BIL functions as a bit line
- the wiring WOL functions as a word line.
- the wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of the capacitance element CA. When writing and reading data, it is preferable to apply a low-level potential (sometimes called a reference potential) to the wiring CAL.
- Data is written and read by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL, turning on the transistor M1, and bringing the wiring BIL and the first terminal of the capacitance element CA into a conductive state (a state in which current can flow).
- memory cell that can be used for memory cell 950 is not limited to memory cell 951, and the circuit configuration can be changed.
- the configuration of memory cell 952 shown in FIG. 23B may also be used.
- Memory cell 952 is an example in which the capacitor element CA and the wiring CAL are not included.
- the first terminal of transistor M1 is in an electrically floating state.
- the potential written via transistor M1 is held in the capacitance (also called parasitic capacitance) between the first terminal and gate, indicated by the dashed line. This configuration significantly simplifies the memory cell configuration.
- OS transistors have the characteristic of having an extremely low off-state current.
- the leakage current of transistor M1 can be made extremely low. That is, written data can be held by transistor M1 for a long time, reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cell. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cell can be made unnecessary.
- multilevel data or analog data can be held in memory cell 951 and memory cell 952.
- [NOSRAM] 23C shows an example circuit configuration of a gain cell type memory cell having two transistors and one capacitor.
- the memory cell 953 includes a transistor M2, a transistor M3, and a capacitor CB.
- a memory device having a gain cell type memory cell in which the transistor M2 is an OS transistor is referred to as a nonvolatile oxide semiconductor RAM (NOSRAM).
- NOSRAM nonvolatile oxide semiconductor RAM
- the first terminal of transistor M2 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CB, the second terminal of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WBL, and the gate of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WOL.
- the second terminal of capacitance element CB is connected to wiring CAL.
- the first terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring RBL, the second terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring SL, and the gate of transistor M3 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CB.
- Wiring WBL functions as a write bit line
- wiring RBL functions as a read bit line
- wiring WOL functions as a word line.
- Wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of capacitance element CB.
- a low-level potential sometimes called a reference potential
- Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL, turning on transistor M2, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring WBL and the first terminal of the capacitance element CB.
- transistor M2 when transistor M2 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring WBL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitance element CB and the gate of transistor M3.
- a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WOL, turning off transistor M2, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CB and the potential of the gate of transistor M3.
- Data is read by applying a predetermined potential to the wiring SL.
- the current flowing between the source and drain of transistor M3 and the potential of the first terminal of transistor M3 are determined by the potential of the gate of transistor M3 and the potential of the second terminal of transistor M3. Therefore, by reading the potential of the wiring RBL connected to the first terminal of transistor M3, the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3).
- the wiring WBL and the wiring RBL may be combined into a single wiring BIL.
- An example circuit configuration of such a memory cell is shown in Figure 23D.
- Memory cell 954 is configured such that the wiring WBL and the wiring RBL of memory cell 953 are combined into a single wiring BIL, and the second terminal of transistor M2 and the first terminal of transistor M3 are connected to the wiring BIL.
- memory cell 954 is configured to operate with the write bit line and the read bit line as a single wiring BIL.
- Memory cell 955 shown in Figure 23E is an example in which the capacitance element CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 953 have been omitted.
- memory cell 956 shown in Figure 23F is an example in which the capacitance element CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 954 have been omitted. This type of configuration allows for increased integration of the memory cells.
- OS transistor for at least transistor M2.
- OS transistors for transistors M2 and M3.
- OS transistors have an extremely low off-state current
- written data can be retained by transistor M2 for a long time, reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cells.
- refresh operations of the memory cells can be eliminated.
- multilevel data or analog data can be retained in memory cells 953, 954, 955, and 956.
- Memory cell 953, memory cell 954, memory cell 955, and memory cell 956, in which an OS transistor is used as transistor M2, are one embodiment of NOSRAM.
- Si transistor may also be used as transistor M3.
- Si transistors can increase field-effect mobility and can also be used as p-channel transistors, allowing for greater freedom in circuit design.
- the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
- Figure 23G shows a three-transistor, one-capacitor gain cell type memory cell 957.
- Memory cell 957 has transistors M4 to M6 and a capacitative element CC.
- the first terminal of transistor M4 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CC, the second terminal of transistor M4 is connected to wiring BIL, and the gate of transistor M4 is connected to wiring WOL.
- the second terminal of capacitance element CC is connected to the first terminal of transistor M5 and wiring GNDL.
- the second terminal of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of transistor M6, and the gate of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CC.
- the second terminal of transistor M6 is connected to wiring BIL, and the gate of transistor M6 is connected to wiring RWL.
- Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL, turning on transistor M4, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring BIL and the first terminal of the capacitance element CC.
- transistor M4 when transistor M4 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BIL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitance element CC and the gate of transistor M5.
- a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WOL, turning off transistor M4, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CC and the potential of the gate of transistor M5.
- Data is read by precharging the wiring BIL to a predetermined potential, then electrically floating the wiring BIL and applying a high-level potential to the wiring RWL. Because the wiring RWL is at a high-level potential, the transistor M6 is turned on, and the wiring BIL and the second terminal of the transistor M5 are electrically connected. At this time, the potential of the wiring BIL is applied to the second terminal of the transistor M5. The potential of the second terminal of the transistor M5 and the potential of the wiring BIL change depending on the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5). By reading the potential of the wiring BIL, the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5).
- Si transistors may be used as transistors M5 and M6. As mentioned above, Si transistors may have higher field-effect mobility than OS transistors depending on the crystalline state of the silicon used in the semiconductor layer.
- the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
- OS-SRAM 23H shows an example of a static random access memory (SRAM) using an OS transistor.
- SRAM static random access memory
- OS-SRAM oxide semiconductor SRAM
- a memory cell 958 shown in FIG. 23H is a memory cell of an SRAM capable of backing up data.
- Memory cell 958 includes transistors M7 to M10, transistors MS1 to MS4, and capacitors CD1 and CD2. Note that transistors MS1 and MS2 are p-channel transistors, and transistors MS3 and MS4 are n-channel transistors.
- the first terminal of transistor M7 is connected to wiring BIL, and the second terminal of transistor M7 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS1, the first terminal of transistor MS3, the gate of transistor MS2, the gate of transistor MS4, and the first terminal of transistor M10.
- the gate of transistor M7 is connected to wiring WOL.
- the first terminal of transistor M8 is connected to wiring BILB, and the second terminal of transistor M8 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS2, the first terminal of transistor MS4, the gate of transistor MS1, the gate of transistor MS3, and the first terminal of transistor M9.
- the gate of transistor M8 is connected to wiring WOL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS1 is connected to the wiring VDL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS2 is connected to the wiring VDL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS3 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
- the second terminal of transistor MS4 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
- the second terminal of transistor M9 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD1, and the gate of transistor M9 is connected to wiring BRL.
- the second terminal of transistor M10 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD2, and the gate of transistor M10 is connected to wiring BRL.
- the second terminal of the capacitance element CD1 is connected to the wiring GNDL, and the second terminal of the capacitance element CD2 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
- Wiring BIL and wiring BILB function as bit lines
- wiring WOL functions as a word line
- wiring BRL is a wiring that controls the on/off states of transistors M9 and M10.
- the wiring VDL is a wiring that applies a high-level potential
- the wiring GNDL is a wiring that applies a low-level potential.
- Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL and a high-level potential to the wiring BRL. Specifically, when the transistor M10 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BIL, and this potential is written to the second terminal of the transistor M10.
- memory cell 958 forms an inverter loop using transistors MS1 and MS2, an inverted signal of the data signal corresponding to the potential is input to the second terminal of transistor M8. Because transistor M8 is on, the potential applied to wiring BIL, i.e., the inverted signal of the signal input to wiring BIL, is output to wiring BILB. Furthermore, because transistors M9 and M10 are on, the potentials of the second terminals of transistors M7 and M8 are held in the first terminals of capacitors CD2 and CD1, respectively. Thereafter, a low-level potential is applied to wiring WOL and a low-level potential is applied to wiring BRL, turning off transistors M7 to M10, thereby holding the potentials of the first terminals of capacitors CD1 and CD2.
- the wiring BIL and wiring BILB are precharged to a predetermined potential, and then a high-level potential is applied to the wiring WOL and a high-level potential is applied to the wiring BRL.
- the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD1 is refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BILB.
- the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD2 is also refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BIL.
- the potentials of the wiring BIL and wiring BILB change from their precharged potentials to the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD2 and the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD1, respectively, so the potential held in the memory cell can be read from the potential of the wiring BIL or wiring BILB.
- OS transistors as transistors M7 to M10. This allows written data to be held for a long time by transistors M7 to M10, thereby reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cells. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cells can be made unnecessary.
- Si transistors may be used as transistors MS1 to MS4.
- the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 of the semiconductor device 900 may be provided on the same plane.
- the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 may be provided overlapping each other.
- the signal propagation distance can be shortened.
- the memory array 920 may be provided in multiple layers on top of the drive circuit 910.
- Figure 25 shows a block diagram of the arithmetic unit 960.
- the arithmetic unit 960 shown in Figure 25 can be applied to, for example, a CPU (Central Processing Unit).
- the arithmetic unit 960 can also be applied to processors such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), TPU (Tensor Processing Unit), or NPU (Neural Processing Unit), which have a larger number (tens to hundreds) of processor cores capable of parallel processing than a CPU.
- processors such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), TPU (Tensor Processing Unit), or NPU (Neural Processing Unit), which have a larger number (tens to hundreds) of processor cores capable of parallel processing than a CPU.
- the arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 25 has an ALU 991 (ALU: Arithmetic logic unit, arithmetic circuit), an ALU controller 992, an instruction decoder 993, an interrupt controller 994, a timing controller 995, a register 996, a register controller 997, a bus interface 998, a cache 999, and a cache interface 989 on a substrate 990.
- the substrate 990 may be a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, or the like. It may also have a rewritable ROM and a ROM interface.
- the cache 999 and cache interface 989 may also be provided on separate chips.
- the cache 999 is connected to the main memory provided on a separate chip via a cache interface 989.
- the cache interface 989 has the function of supplying part of the data held in the main memory to the cache 999.
- the cache interface 989 also has the function of outputting part of the data held in the cache 999 to the ALU 991 or register 996, etc. via the bus interface 998.
- a memory array 920 can be provided stacked on the arithmetic unit 960.
- the memory array 920 can be used as a cache.
- the cache interface 989 may have the function of supplying data held in the memory array 920 to the cache 999.
- a drive circuit 910 be included as part of the cache interface 989.
- the arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 25 is merely one example of a simplified configuration, and actual arithmetic devices 960 have a wide variety of configurations depending on their applications.
- a configuration including the arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 25 as one core, and to include multiple such cores, each of which operates in parallel, in a so-called multi-core configuration.
- the arithmetic device 960 can handle in its internal arithmetic circuits, data buses, etc.
- the number of bits that the arithmetic device 960 can handle in its internal arithmetic circuits, data buses, etc. can be, for example, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, 64 bits, etc.
- Instructions input to the arithmetic unit 960 via the bus interface 998 are input to the instruction decoder 993, decoded, and then input to the ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995.
- the ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995 perform various controls based on the decoded instructions. Specifically, the ALU controller 992 generates signals to control the operation of the ALU 991. Furthermore, while the arithmetic unit 960 is executing a program, the interrupt controller 994 determines and processes interrupt requests from external input/output devices, peripheral circuits, etc. based on their priority, mask status, etc. The register controller 997 generates the address of the register 996 and performs read and write operations on the register 996 depending on the state of the arithmetic unit 960.
- the timing controller 995 also generates signals that control the timing of the operations of the ALU 991, ALU controller 992, instruction decoder 993, interrupt controller 994, and register controller 997.
- the timing controller 995 includes an internal clock generation unit that generates an internal clock signal based on a reference clock signal, and supplies the internal clock signal to the various circuits mentioned above.
- the register controller 997 selects the holding operation in the register 996 in accordance with instructions from the ALU 991. That is, it selects whether the memory cells in the register 996 will hold data using flip-flops or capacitive elements. If holding data using flip-flops is selected, power supply voltage is supplied to the memory cells in the register 996. If holding data in capacitive elements is selected, the data is rewritten to the capacitive elements, and the supply of power supply voltage to the memory cells in the register 996 can be stopped.
- FIGS 26A and 26B show perspective views of a semiconductor device 970A.
- the semiconductor device 970A has a layer 930 on which a memory array is provided above the arithmetic unit 960.
- the layer 930 is provided with memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3.
- the arithmetic unit 960 and each memory array have overlapping areas.
- Figure 26B shows the arithmetic unit 960 and layer 930 separated.
- connection distance between them can be shortened. This increases the communication speed between them. In addition, the short connection distance reduces power consumption.
- a method for stacking the layer 930 having the memory array and the arithmetic unit 960 As a method for stacking the layer 930 having the memory array and the arithmetic unit 960, a method of stacking the layer 930 having the memory array directly on the arithmetic unit 960 (also known as monolithic stacking) may be used, or a method may be used in which the arithmetic unit 960 and the layer 930 are formed on different substrates, and the two substrates are bonded together and connected using through-vias or conductive film bonding technology (such as Cu-Cu bonding).
- the former method does not require consideration of misalignment during bonding, and therefore not only can the chip size be reduced, but manufacturing costs can also be reduced.
- the arithmetic unit 960 does not have a cache 999, and the memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3 provided in the layer 930 can each be used as a cache.
- memory array 920L1 can be used as an L1 cache (also called a level 1 cache)
- memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache)
- memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache).
- L1 cache also called a level 1 cache
- memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache)
- memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache).
- L1 cache also called a level 1 cache
- memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache)
- memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache).
- each memory array provided in layer 930 can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory.
- Main memory has a larger capacity than the cache and is accessed less frequently.
- drive circuits 910L1, 910L2, and 910L3 are provided.
- Drive circuit 910L1 is connected to memory array 920L1 via connection electrode 940L1.
- drive circuit 910L2 is connected to memory array 920L2 via connection electrode 940L2, and drive circuit 910L3 is connected to memory array 920L3 via connection electrode 940L3.
- the drive circuit 910L1 may function as part of the cache interface 989, or the drive circuit 910L1 may be configured to be connected to the cache interface 989.
- the drive circuit 910L2 and the drive circuit 910L3 may also function as part of the cache interface 989, or may be configured to be connected to it.
- the control circuit 912 of each drive circuit 910 determines whether the memory array 920 functions as a cache or as main memory. Based on a signal supplied from the arithmetic device 960, the control circuit 912 can cause some of the multiple memory cells 950 in the semiconductor device 900 to function as RAM.
- the semiconductor device 900 can cause some of the multiple memory cells 950 to function as cache, and the other part to function as main memory. In other words, the semiconductor device 900 can function as both a cache and a main memory.
- the semiconductor device 900 according to one aspect of the present invention can function as, for example, a universal memory.
- a layer 930 having one memory array 920 may be provided over the computing device 960.
- Figure 27A shows a perspective view of the semiconductor device 970B.
- one memory array 920 can be divided into multiple areas, each of which can be used for different functions.
- Figure 27A shows an example in which area L1 is used as an L1 cache, area L2 as an L2 cache, and area L3 as an L3 cache.
- the capacity of each of areas L1 to L3 can be changed depending on the situation. For example, if it is desired to increase the capacity of the L1 cache, this can be achieved by increasing the area of area L1. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the efficiency of calculation processing and increase processing speed.
- Figure 27B shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 970C.
- Semiconductor device 970C has a layer 930L1 having memory array 920L1 stacked on top of which is a layer 930L2 having memory array 920L2, and a layer 930L3 having memory array 920L3 stacked on top of that.
- Memory array 920L1 which is physically closest to the arithmetic device 960, can be used as a higher-level cache, and memory array 920L3, which is the farthest, can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory. With this configuration, the capacity of each memory array can be increased, thereby further improving processing power.
- the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers (also referred to as data centers (DCs)).
- the electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers using the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention are effective in achieving high performance, such as low power consumption.
- FIG. 28A shows a perspective view of a substrate (mounting substrate 704) on which electronic component 700 is mounted.
- Electronic component 700 shown in FIG. 28A has a semiconductor device 710 inside a mold 711.
- FIG. 28A omits some parts to show the interior of electronic component 700.
- Electronic component 700 has lands 712 on the outside of mold 711. Lands 712 are electrically connected to electrode pads 713, and electrode pads 713 are electrically connected to semiconductor device 710 via wires 714.
- Electronic component 700 is mounted on, for example, a printed circuit board 702. A plurality of such electronic components are combined and electrically connected on printed circuit board 702 to complete mounting substrate 704.
- Semiconductor device 710 also has a drive circuit layer 715 and a memory layer 716.
- the memory layer 716 is configured with multiple memory cell arrays stacked on top of each other.
- the stacked configuration of drive circuit layer 715 and memory layer 716 can be a monolithic stacked configuration.
- a monolithic stacked configuration allows connections between the layers without using through-electrode technology such as TSV (Through Silicon Via) or bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding.
- TSV Through Silicon Via
- bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding.
- connection wiring can be reduced compared to technologies that use through electrodes such as TSVs, making it possible to increase the number of connection pins.
- Increasing the number of connection pins enables parallel operation, making it possible to improve the memory bandwidth (also known as memory bandwidth).
- the multiple memory cell arrays included in the memory layer 716 are formed using OS transistors and that the multiple memory cell arrays are monolithically stacked.
- OS transistors By configuring the multiple memory cell arrays as a monolithic stack, it is possible to improve either or both of the memory bandwidth and the memory access latency.
- the bandwidth is the amount of data transferred per unit time
- the access latency is the time from access to the start of data exchange.
- Si transistors when Si transistors are used for the memory layer 716, it is more difficult to achieve a monolithic stack configuration than OS transistors. Therefore, it can be said that OS transistors have a superior structure to Si transistors in a monolithic stack configuration.
- Semiconductor device 710 may also be referred to as a die.
- a die refers to a chip piece obtained during the semiconductor chip manufacturing process by forming a circuit pattern on, for example, a disk-shaped substrate (also called a wafer) and dicing it into cubes.
- Semiconductor materials that can be used for the die include, for example, silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), or gallium nitride (GaN).
- Si silicon
- SiC silicon carbide
- GaN gallium nitride
- a die obtained from a silicon substrate also called a silicon wafer
- a silicon die obtained from a silicon substrate (also called a silicon wafer) may be called a silicon die.
- Figure 28B shows a perspective view of electronic component 730.
- Electronic component 730 is an example of a SiP (System in Package) or MCM (Multi-Chip Module).
- Electronic component 730 has an interposer 731 provided on a package substrate 732 (printed circuit board), and a semiconductor device 735 and multiple semiconductor devices 710 provided on interposer 731.
- Electronic component 730 shows an example in which semiconductor device 710 is used as a high bandwidth memory (HBM).
- Semiconductor device 735 can also be used in integrated circuits such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), NPU (Neural Processing Unit), or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
- CPU Central Processing Unit
- GPU Graphics Processing Unit
- NPU Neurological Processing Unit
- FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
- the package substrate 732 can be, for example, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, or a glass epoxy substrate.
- the interposer 731 can be, for example, a silicon interposer or a resin interposer.
- the interposer 731 has multiple wirings and functions to electrically connect multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches.
- the multiple wirings are provided in a single layer or multiple layers.
- the interposer 731 also functions to electrically connect the integrated circuits provided on the interposer 731 to electrodes provided on the package substrate 732.
- the interposer is sometimes called a "rewiring substrate” or "intermediate substrate.”
- through electrodes are provided in the interposer 731, and the integrated circuits and package substrate 732 are electrically connected using these through electrodes.
- TSVs can also be used as through electrodes.
- the interposer on which the HBM is mounted must be able to form fine, high-density wiring. Therefore, it is preferable to use a silicon interposer for the interposer on which the HBM is mounted.
- SiPs and MCMs that use silicon interposers that use silicon interposers, a decrease in reliability due to differences in the coefficient of expansion between the integrated circuit and the interposer is less likely. Furthermore, because the surface of a silicon interposer is highly flat, poor connections between the integrated circuit mounted on the silicon interposer and the silicon interposer are less likely to occur. It is particularly preferable to use silicon interposers in 2.5D packages (2.5-dimensional packaging), in which multiple integrated circuits are arranged horizontally on an interposer.
- a monolithic stacked configuration using OS transistors is preferable.
- a composite structure may also be used that combines a memory cell array stacked using TSVs with a monolithic stacked memory cell array.
- a heat sink may be provided overlapping the electronic component 730.
- a heat sink it is preferable to align the height of the integrated circuit provided on the interposer 731.
- the electronic component 730 shown in this embodiment it is preferable to align the height of the semiconductor device 710 and the semiconductor device 735.
- Electrodes 733 may be provided on the bottom of package substrate 732 in order to mount electronic component 730 on another substrate.
- Figure 28B shows an example in which electrodes 733 are formed from solder balls. By providing solder balls in a matrix on the bottom of package substrate 732, BGA (Ball Grid Array) mounting can be achieved. Electrodes 733 may also be formed from conductive pins. By providing conductive pins in a matrix on the bottom of package substrate 732, PGA (Pin Grid Array) mounting can be achieved.
- Electronic component 730 can be mounted on other substrates using various mounting methods, not limited to BGA and PGA.
- mounting methods include SPGA (Staggered Pin Grid Array), LGA (Land Grid Array), QFP (Quad Flat Package), QFJ (Quad Flat J-leaded package), and QFN (Quad Flat Non-leaded package).
- [Large computer] 29A shows a perspective view of a mainframe computer 5600.
- the mainframe computer 5600 has a rack 5610 housing a plurality of rack-mounted computers 5620.
- the mainframe computer 5600 may also be called a supercomputer.
- Figure 29B shows a perspective view of an example of a computer 5620.
- Computer 5620 is mounted on a motherboard 5630.
- Motherboard 5630 has multiple slots 5631 and multiple connection terminals.
- a PC card 5621 is inserted into slot 5631.
- PC card 5621 has connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, each of which is connected to motherboard 5630.
- FIG 29C shows an example of a PC card 5621.
- PC card 5621 is a processing board equipped with, for example, a CPU, GPU, and storage device.
- PC card 5621 has board 5622 and, mounted on board 5622, connection terminals 5623, 5624, 5625, electronic components 5626, 5627, 5628, and 5629. Note that Figure 29C also shows components other than electronic components 5626, 5627, and 5628.
- connection terminal 5629 has a shape that allows it to be inserted into the slot 5631 of the motherboard 5630, and functions as an interface for connecting the PC card 5621 and the motherboard 5630.
- the connection terminal 5629 may conform to, for example, PCIe.
- Connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 can be, for example, interfaces for supplying power to PC card 5621, inputting signals, etc. They can also be, for example, interfaces for outputting signals calculated by PC card 5621.
- Examples of standards for connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 include USB (Universal Serial Bus), SATA (Serial ATA), and SCSI (Small Computer System Interface).
- Examples of standards for each include HDMI (registered trademark).
- Electronic component 5626 has terminals (not shown) for inputting and outputting signals, and by inserting these terminals into sockets (not shown) provided on board 5622, electronic component 5626 and board 5622 can be electrically connected.
- Electronic component 5627 and electronic component 5628 have multiple terminals, and can be mounted to wiring on board 5622 by, for example, reflow soldering the terminals.
- Examples of electronic component 5627 include FPGAs, GPUs, and CPUs.
- Electronic component 5627 can be, for example, electronic component 730.
- Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, a memory device.
- Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, electronic component 700.
- the mainframe computer 5600 can also function as a parallel computer. By using the mainframe computer 5600 as a parallel computer, it is possible to perform large-scale calculations required for, for example, artificial intelligence learning and inference.
- the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be suitably used in space equipment.
- a semiconductor device includes an OS transistor.
- the change in electrical characteristics of an OS transistor due to radiation exposure is small. That is, the OS transistor has high radiation resistance and can be suitably used in environments where radiation may be incident.
- an OS transistor can be suitably used in outer space.
- an OS transistor can be used as a transistor for a semiconductor device provided in a space shuttle, an artificial satellite, or a space probe.
- Examples of radiation include X-rays and neutron rays.
- outer space refers to an altitude of 100 km or higher, but the outer space described in this specification may include one or more of the thermosphere, mesosphere, and stratosphere.
- Figure 30A shows an artificial satellite 6800 as an example of space equipment.
- the artificial satellite 6800 has a body 6801, a solar panel 6802, an antenna 6803, a secondary battery 6805, and a control device 6807. Note that Figure 30A also shows a planet 6804 in space.
- the secondary battery 6805 may be provided with a battery management system (also referred to as BMS) or a battery control circuit.
- a battery management system also referred to as BMS
- a battery control circuit Using an OS transistor in the battery management system or battery control circuit described above is preferable because it consumes low power and has high reliability even in space.
- outer space is an environment with radiation levels more than 100 times higher than on Earth.
- radiation include electromagnetic waves (electromagnetic radiation) such as X-rays and gamma rays, as well as particle radiation such as alpha rays, beta rays, neutron rays, proton rays, heavy ion rays, and meson rays.
- the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate is generated.
- the amount of power generated will be small. Therefore, there is a possibility that the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate will not be generated.
- a secondary battery 6805 be provided on the satellite 6800.
- the solar panel is sometimes called a solar cell module.
- Satellite 6800 can generate a signal. This signal is transmitted via antenna 6803, and can be received, for example, by a receiver located on the ground or by another satellite. By receiving the signal transmitted by satellite 6800, the position of the receiver that received the signal can be determined. As described above, satellite 6800 can constitute a satellite positioning system.
- the control device 6807 also has a function of controlling the satellite 6800.
- the control device 6807 is configured using, for example, one or more of a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device.
- a semiconductor device including an OS transistor which is one embodiment of the present invention, is preferably used for the control device 6807.
- the electrical characteristics of an OS transistor change less when exposed to radiation than those of a Si transistor. In other words, an OS transistor has high reliability even in an environment where radiation may be incident, and can be preferably used.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can be configured to include a sensor.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting sunlight reflected off an object on the ground.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting thermal infrared rays emitted from the earth's surface.
- the artificial satellite 6800 can function as, for example, an Earth observation satellite.
- a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be suitably used in space equipment such as a spaceship, a space capsule, or a space probe.
- OS transistors have the advantages of being able to achieve a wider memory bandwidth and having higher radiation resistance compared to Si transistors.
- the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be suitably used in a storage system applied to, for example, a data center.
- the data center is required to perform long-term management of data, such as ensuring data immutability.
- the building must be large enough to accommodate the installation of storage devices and servers for storing a huge amount of data, a stable power source for storing the data, or cooling equipment required for storing the data.
- the power required to store data can be reduced and the semiconductor device that stores data can be made smaller. This allows for the storage system to be made smaller, the power supply for storing data to be made smaller, and cooling equipment to be made smaller. This allows for space savings in the data center.
- the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention has low power consumption, and therefore heat generation from the circuit can be reduced. Therefore, adverse effects of the heat generation on the circuit itself, peripheral circuits, and modules can be reduced. Furthermore, by using the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention, a data center that operates stably even in a high-temperature environment can be realized. Therefore, the reliability of the data center can be improved.
- Figure 30B shows a storage system applicable to a data center.
- the storage system 6000 shown in Figure 30B has multiple servers 6001sb as hosts 6001 (illustrated as Host Computers). It also has multiple storage devices 6003md as storage 6003 (illustrated as Storage).
- the host 6001 and storage 6003 are shown connected via a storage area network 6004 (illustrated as SAN: Storage Area Network) and a storage control circuit 6002 (illustrated as Storage Controller).
- SAN Storage Area Network
- the host 6001 corresponds to a computer that accesses data stored in the storage 6003.
- the hosts 6001 may be connected to each other via a network.
- Storage 6003 uses flash memory to reduce data access speed, i.e., the time required to store and output data, but this time is significantly longer than the time required for DRAM, which can be used as cache memory within the storage.
- data access speed i.e., the time required to store and output data
- this time is significantly longer than the time required for DRAM, which can be used as cache memory within the storage.
- storage systems typically provide cache memory within the storage to reduce the time required to store and output data.
- the aforementioned cache memory is used within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003. Data exchanged between the host 6001 and storage 6003 is stored in the cache memory within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003, and then output to the host 6001 or storage 6003.
- OS transistors as transistors for storing data in the cache memory and maintaining a potential corresponding to the data
- the frequency of refreshes can be reduced, lowering power consumption.
- stacking the memory cell array miniaturization is possible.
- a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention to one or more selected from electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers is expected to have an effect of reducing power consumption. Therefore, while energy demand is expected to increase with the improvement in performance or high integration of semiconductor devices, the use of a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can also reduce emissions of greenhouse gases, typified by carbon dioxide (CO 2 ). Furthermore, the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention is effective as a measure against global warming due to its low power consumption.
- CO 2 carbon dioxide
- This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
Landscapes
- Semiconductor Memories (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本発明の一態様は、半導体装置に関する。本発明の一態様は、トランジスタに関する。本発明の一態様は、記憶装置に関する。 One aspect of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device. One aspect of the present invention relates to a transistor. One aspect of the present invention relates to a memory device.
なお、本発明の一態様は、上記の技術分野に限定されない。本明細書等で開示する本発明の一態様の技術分野としては、半導体装置、表示装置、発光装置、蓄電装置、記憶装置、電子機器、照明装置、入力装置、入出力装置、それらの駆動方法、又はそれらの製造方法、を一例として挙げることができる。半導体装置は、半導体特性を利用することで機能しうる装置全般を指す。 Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field. Examples of technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification and the like include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, memory devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices, input/output devices, driving methods thereof, and manufacturing methods thereof. A semiconductor device refers to any device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.
近年、半導体装置の開発が進められ、CPU、メモリ、またはこれら以外のLSIが主に半導体装置に用いられている。CPUは、半導体ウエハを加工し、チップ化された半導体集積回路(少なくともトランジスタ及びメモリ)を有し、接続端子である電極が形成された半導体素子の集合体である。 In recent years, semiconductor device development has progressed, and CPUs, memory, and other large-scale integrated circuits (LSIs) are primarily used in semiconductor devices. A CPU is a collection of semiconductor elements processed from a semiconductor wafer, containing chipped semiconductor integrated circuits (at least transistors and memory), and on which electrodes serving as connection terminals are formed.
CPU、メモリ、またはこれら以外のLSIの半導体回路(ICチップ)は、回路基板、例えばプリント配線基板に実装され、様々な電子機器の部品の一つとして用いられる。 CPUs, memories, and other LSI semiconductor circuits (IC chips) are mounted on circuit boards, such as printed wiring boards, and used as components in a variety of electronic devices.
また、絶縁表面を有する基板上に形成された半導体薄膜を用いてトランジスタを構成する技術が注目されている。該トランジスタは集積回路、及び画像表示装置(単に表示装置とも表記する)のような電子デバイスに広く応用されている。トランジスタに適用可能な半導体薄膜としてシリコン系半導体材料が広く知られているが、その他の材料として酸化物半導体が注目されている。 In addition, technology that constructs transistors using semiconductor thin films formed on substrates with insulating surfaces is attracting attention. Such transistors are widely used in electronic devices such as integrated circuits and image display devices (also simply referred to as display devices). Silicon-based semiconductor materials are widely known as semiconductor thin films that can be used in transistors, but oxide semiconductors are also attracting attention as other materials.
また、酸化物半導体を用いたトランジスタは、非導通状態におけるリーク電流が極めて小さいことが知られている。例えば、特許文献1には、リーク電流が小さいという特性を応用した低消費電力のCPUなどが開示されている。また、例えば、特許文献2には、長期にわたり記憶内容を保持することができる記憶装置などが、開示されている。 In addition, transistors using oxide semiconductors are known to have extremely low leakage current when they are off. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a low-power CPU that utilizes the property of low leakage current. Furthermore, for example, Patent Document 2 discloses a memory device that can retain stored content for a long period of time.
また、近年では電子機器の小型化、軽量化に伴い、集積回路のさらなる高密度化への要求が高まっている。また、集積回路を含む半導体装置の生産性の向上が求められている。例えば、特許文献3では、酸化物半導体膜を用いる第1のトランジスタと、酸化物半導体膜を用いる第2のトランジスタと、を積層させることで、メモリセルを複数重畳して設けることにより、集積回路の高密度化を図る技術が開示されている。また、特許文献4には、酸化物半導体の側面がゲート絶縁体を介してゲート電極に覆われている縦型のトランジスタが開示されている。 Furthermore, in recent years, with the trend toward smaller and lighter electronic devices, there has been an increasing demand for even higher density integrated circuits. There is also a need for improved productivity of semiconductor devices including integrated circuits. For example, Patent Document 3 discloses a technique for increasing the density of integrated circuits by stacking a first transistor using an oxide semiconductor film and a second transistor using an oxide semiconductor film, thereby providing multiple memory cells in a superimposed manner. Furthermore, Patent Document 4 discloses a vertical transistor in which the side surface of an oxide semiconductor is covered with a gate electrode via a gate insulator.
また、特許文献5には、ビットライン上に垂直チャネル部分を有するチャネルパターンと、チャネルパターン上にビットラインを横切るように設けられるワードラインと、を有する半導体メモリ装置が開示されている。 Furthermore, Patent Document 5 discloses a semiconductor memory device having a channel pattern with a vertical channel portion on a bit line, and a word line arranged on the channel pattern so as to cross the bit line.
本発明の一態様は、微細化が容易な半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、高集積化が可能な半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、配線の負荷が低減された半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、信頼性の高い半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、良好な電気特性を示す半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、動作速度が高い半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。 An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a semiconductor device that can be easily miniaturized. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device that enables high integration. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device in which the wiring load is reduced. Another object is to provide a highly reliable semiconductor device. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device that exhibits favorable electrical characteristics. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device with high operating speed.
本発明の一態様は、新規な構成を有する半導体装置、記憶装置、または電子機器を提供することを課題の一とする。本発明の一態様は、先行技術の問題点の少なくとも一を、少なくとも軽減することを課題の一とする。 An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a semiconductor device, memory device, or electronic device having a novel structure. An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to alleviate at least one of the problems of the prior art.
なお、これらの課題の記載は、他の課題の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、これらの課題の全てを解決する必要はないものとする。なお、これら以外の課題は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から抽出することが可能である。 Note that the description of these problems does not preclude the existence of other problems. It is not necessary for one embodiment of the present invention to solve all of these problems. It is possible to extract problems other than these from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc.
本発明の一態様は、第1の導電層と、一対の第2の導電層と、一対の第3の導電層と、一対の半導体層と、開口部を有する第1の絶縁層と、一対の第2の絶縁層と、を有し、一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、第1の金属酸化物を含み、一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、第1の領域及び第2の領域を有し、第1の領域の少なくとも一部は、チャネル形成領域として機能し、第2の領域は、第1の領域より抵抗率が高く、第1の導電層は、第1の方向に延在され、一対の第3の導電層、一対の半導体層、一対の第2の絶縁層、及び開口部は、第1の方向と交差する第2の方向に延在され、一対の第3の導電層、一対の半導体層、及び一対の第2の絶縁層は、それぞれ開口部内に対称に設けられ、第1の領域と第2の領域は、交互に第2の方向に配列され、第1の絶縁層は、第1の導電層上に設けられ、開口部は、第1の導電層の上面に達し、一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、開口部の側壁と接する垂直部分、及び第1の導電層の上面と接する水平部分を有し、一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、第1の領域において、第1の導電層の上面に接し、一対の第2の導電層はそれぞれ、第1の絶縁層より上方に位置する部分を有し、且つ、垂直部分と接し、一対の第2の絶縁層はそれぞれ、垂直部分及び水平部分を覆い、一対の第3の導電層はそれぞれ、第2の絶縁層を介して垂直部分及び水平部分を覆う、半導体装置である。 One aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device comprising a first conductive layer, a pair of second conductive layers, a pair of third conductive layers, a pair of semiconductor layers, a first insulating layer having an opening, and a pair of second insulating layers, each of the pair of semiconductor layers including a first metal oxide, each of the pair of semiconductor layers having a first region and a second region, at least a portion of the first region functioning as a channel formation region, the second region having a higher resistivity than the first region, the first conductive layer extending in a first direction, the pair of third conductive layers, the pair of semiconductor layers, the pair of second insulating layers, and the opening extending in a second direction intersecting the first direction, and the pair of third conductive layers, the pair of semiconductor layers, and the pair of second insulating layers The semiconductor device has a first insulating layer disposed symmetrically within the opening, the first and second regions alternately arranged in the second direction, a first insulating layer disposed on the first conductive layer, the opening reaching the top surface of the first conductive layer, a pair of semiconductor layers each having a vertical portion in contact with the sidewall of the opening and a horizontal portion in contact with the top surface of the first conductive layer, each of the pair of semiconductor layers in contact with the top surface of the first conductive layer in the first region, a pair of second conductive layers each having a portion located above the first insulating layer and in contact with the vertical portion, each of the pair of second insulating layers covering the vertical portion and the horizontal portion, and a pair of third conductive layers covering the vertical portion and the horizontal portion via the second insulating layer.
上記において、第2の領域は、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方を含む、ことが好ましい。 In the above, it is preferable that the second region contains either aluminum or hafnium, or both.
また、上記において、第2の領域は、第1の領域より、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方の濃度が高い、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the second region has a higher concentration of either or both of aluminum and hafnium than the first region.
また、上記において、第1の導電層は、第1の導電膜と、当該第1の導電膜上の第2の導電膜と、を有し、一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、第2の導電膜と接し、第2の導電膜は、第2の金属酸化物を含み、第1の導電膜は、金属を含む、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the first conductive layer has a first conductive film and a second conductive film on the first conductive film, that each of the pair of semiconductor layers is in contact with the second conductive film, that the second conductive film contains a second metal oxide, and that the first conductive film contains a metal.
また、上記において、第1の金属酸化物、及び第2の金属酸化物は、In、Sn、Zn、Ga、及びTiのうち、同じ元素を一以上含む、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the first metal oxide and the second metal oxide contain one or more of the same elements selected from In, Sn, Zn, Ga, and Ti.
また、上記において、第2の導電膜は、凹部を有し、一対の半導体層は、凹部内に位置する部分を有し、且つ、凹部内における第2の導電膜の側面及び上面と接する、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the second conductive film has a recess, and the pair of semiconductor layers have portions located within the recess and contact the side and top surfaces of the second conductive film within the recess.
また、上記において、一対の第3の絶縁層を有し、一対の第3の絶縁層はそれぞれ、第2の絶縁層及び第3の導電層を介して垂直部分及び水平部分を覆い、第3の絶縁層は、水素を捕獲または固着する機能を有する、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the device has a pair of third insulating layers, each covering the vertical portion and the horizontal portion via the second insulating layer and the third conductive layer, and that the third insulating layers have the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen.
また、上記において、第2の導電層上に、容量素子を有し、容量素子は、第2の導電層と接する第4の導電層と、第5の導電層と、これらの間に第4の絶縁層と、を有する、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that a capacitive element is provided on the second conductive layer, and that the capacitive element has a fourth conductive layer in contact with the second conductive layer, a fifth conductive layer, and a fourth insulating layer therebetween.
また、上記において、第4の導電層は、凹部を有し、第4の絶縁層は、凹部に沿って設けられる部分を有し、第5の導電層は、第4の絶縁層を介して凹部内に位置する部分を有し、且つ、凹部内における第4の絶縁層の側面及び上面と接する、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the fourth conductive layer has a recess, the fourth insulating layer has a portion that is provided along the recess, and the fifth conductive layer has a portion that is located within the recess via the fourth insulating layer and that contacts the side and top surfaces of the fourth insulating layer within the recess.
また、上記において、第4の導電層は、柱状の形状を有し、第4の絶縁層は、第4の導電層を覆い、第5の導電層は、第4の絶縁層を介して第4の導電層の上面および側面を覆って設けられる、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the fourth conductive layer has a columnar shape, the fourth insulating layer covers the fourth conductive layer, and the fifth conductive layer is provided so as to cover the top and side surfaces of the fourth conductive layer via the fourth insulating layer.
また、上記において、第1の導電層よりも下に、トランジスタを有し、トランジスタは、チャネルが形成される半導体にシリコンを含み、トランジスタのソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方は、第1の導電層と接続する、ことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that a transistor is provided below the first conductive layer, the transistor contains silicon in the semiconductor in which the channel is formed, and one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the transistor is connected to the first conductive layer.
本発明の一態様によれば、微細化が容易な半導体装置を提供できる。または、高集積化が可能な半導体装置を提供できる。または、配線の負荷が低減された半導体装置を提供できる。または、信頼性の高い半導体装置を提供できる。または、良好な電気特性を示す半導体装置を提供できる。または、動作速度が高い半導体装置を提供できる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, a semiconductor device that can be easily miniaturized can be provided. Alternatively, a semiconductor device that enables high integration can be provided. Alternatively, a semiconductor device with reduced wiring load can be provided. Alternatively, a highly reliable semiconductor device can be provided. Alternatively, a semiconductor device that exhibits favorable electrical characteristics can be provided. Alternatively, a semiconductor device with high operating speed can be provided.
本発明の一態様によれば、新規な構成を有する半導体装置、記憶装置、または電子機器を提供できる。本発明の一態様によれば、先行技術の問題点の少なくとも一を、少なくとも軽減できる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a semiconductor device, memory device, or electronic device having a novel configuration. According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to at least alleviate at least one of the problems of the prior art.
なお、これらの効果の記載は、他の効果の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、必ずしも、これらの効果の全てを有する必要はない。なお、これら以外の効果は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から抽出することが可能である。 Note that the description of these effects does not preclude the existence of other effects. One embodiment of the present invention does not necessarily have to have all of these effects. Note that other effects can be extracted from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc.
図1A及び図1Bは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図2A及び図2Bは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図3A及び図3Bは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図4A及び図4Bは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図5は、半導体装置の構成例である。
図6は、半導体装置の構成例である。
図7A及び図7Bは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図8A及び図8Bは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図9A乃至図9Dは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図10A乃至図10Dは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図11A乃至図11Dは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図12A乃至図12Cは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図13A及び図13Bは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図14A及び図14Bは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図15A及び図15Bは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図16A及び図16Bは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図17A乃至図17Cは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図18A乃至図18Cは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図19A乃至図19Cは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図20A及び図20Bは、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図21は、半導体装置の作製方法例を説明する図である。
図22は、半導体装置の構成例を説明するブロック図である。
図23A乃至図23Hは、メモリセルの回路構成例を説明する図である。
図24A及び図24Bは、半導体装置の構成例を説明する斜視図である。
図25は、CPUを説明するブロック図である。
図26A及び図26Bは、半導体装置の斜視図である。
図27A及び図27Bは、半導体装置の斜視図である。
図28A及び図28Bは、電子部品の構成例である。
図29A乃至図29Cは、大型計算機の構成例である。
図30Aは、宇宙用機器の構成例である。図30Bは、ストレージシステムの構成例である。
1A and 1B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
2A and 2B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
3A and 3B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
4A and 4B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
FIG. 5 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
FIG. 6 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
7A and 7B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
8A and 8B show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
9A to 9D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
10A to 10D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
11A to 11D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
12A to 12C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
14A and 14B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
15A and 15B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
16A and 16B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
17A to 17C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
18A to 18C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
19A to 19C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
20A and 20B are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
21A to 21C are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
23A to 23H are diagrams illustrating examples of the circuit configuration of a memory cell.
24A and 24B are perspective views illustrating a configuration example of a semiconductor device.
FIG. 25 is a block diagram illustrating the CPU.
26A and 26B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
27A and 27B are perspective views of a semiconductor device.
28A and 28B show examples of the configuration of electronic components.
29A to 29C show examples of the configuration of a mainframe computer.
Fig. 30A is a configuration example of space equipment, and Fig. 30B is a configuration example of a storage system.
以下、実施の形態について図面を参照しながら説明する。ただし、実施の形態は多くの異なる態様で実施することが可能であり、趣旨及びその範囲から逸脱することなくその形態及び詳細を様々に変更し得ることは当業者であれば容易に理解される。従って、本発明は、以下の実施の形態の記載内容に限定して解釈されるものではない。 The following describes embodiments with reference to the drawings. However, those skilled in the art will readily understand that the embodiments can be implemented in many different ways, and that various changes in form and details can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be interpreted as being limited to the description of the following embodiments.
なお、以下に説明する発明の構成において、同一部分又は同様な機能を有する部分には同一の符号を異なる図面間で共通して用い、その繰り返しの説明は省略する。また、同様の機能を指す場合には、ハッチングパターンを同じくし、特に符号を付さない場合がある。 In the configuration of the invention described below, the same parts or parts with similar functions will be denoted by the same reference numerals in different drawings, and repeated explanations will be omitted. Furthermore, when referring to similar functions, the same hatching pattern may be used and no particular reference numeral may be assigned.
なお、本明細書で説明する各図において、各構成要素の大きさ、層の厚さ、または領域は、明瞭化のために誇張されている場合がある。よって、必ずしもそのスケールに限定されない。 Note that in the figures described in this specification, the size of each component, layer thickness, or area may be exaggerated for clarity. Therefore, they are not necessarily limited to that scale.
なお、本明細書等における「第1」、「第2」等の序数詞は、構成要素の混同を避けるために付すものであり、数的に限定するものではない。 In addition, ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" used in this specification are used to avoid confusion between components and do not imply any numerical limitation.
トランジスタは半導体素子の一種であり、電流または電圧を増幅する機能、及び、導通または非導通を制御するスイッチング動作などを実現することができる。本明細書におけるトランジスタは、IGFET(Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistor)及び薄膜トランジスタ(TFT:Thin Film Transistor)を含む。 A transistor is a type of semiconductor element that can perform functions such as amplifying current or voltage, and switching to control conduction or non-conduction. In this specification, the term "transistor" includes IGFETs (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors) and thin film transistors (TFTs).
また、「ソース」と「ドレイン」の機能は、異なる極性のトランジスタを採用する場合、または回路動作において電流の方向が変化する場合などには入れ替わることがある。このため、本明細書においては、「ソース」と「ドレイン」の用語は、入れ替えて用いることができるものとする。 Furthermore, the functions of "source" and "drain" may be interchangeable when transistors of different polarities are used, or when the direction of current changes during circuit operation. For this reason, in this specification, the terms "source" and "drain" may be used interchangeably.
本明細書における「接続」は、一例としては、「電気的接続」を含む。なお、回路素子の接続関係を物として規定するために「電気的接続」と表現する場合がある。また、「電気的接続」は、「直接接続」と「間接接続」とを含む。「AとBとが直接的に接続されている」とは、AとBとが回路素子(例えば、トランジスタ、スイッチなど。なお、配線は回路素子ではない。)を介さずに接続されていることを言う。一方、「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」とは、AとBとが一つ以上の回路素子を介して接続されていることを言う。なお、A及びBは、素子、回路、配線、電極、端子、半導体層、導電層などの対象物を示している。 In this specification, "connection" includes, as an example, "electrical connection." Note that the term "electrical connection" is sometimes used to define the connection relationship between circuit elements as an object. Furthermore, "electrical connection" includes "direct connection" and "indirect connection." "A and B are directly connected" means that A and B are connected without the intervention of a circuit element (e.g., a transistor, a switch, etc.; note that wiring is not a circuit element). On the other hand, "A and B are indirectly connected" means that A and B are connected via one or more circuit elements. Note that A and B represent objects such as elements, circuits, wiring, electrodes, terminals, semiconductor layers, and conductive layers.
例えば、AとBとを含む回路が動作していると仮定した場合において、回路の動作期間中にAとBとの間に電気信号の授受又は電位の相互作用が発生するタイミングがある場合は、物として「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」、と規定することが出来る。なお、回路の動作期間中にAとBとの間に電気信号の授受又は電位の相互作用が発生しないタイミングがあっても、回路の動作期間中にAとBとの間に電気信号の授受又は電位の相互作用が発生するタイミングがあれば、「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」と規定することが出来る。 For example, assuming that a circuit including A and B is operating, if there is a time during the operation of the circuit when an electrical signal is exchanged or an electrical potential interaction occurs between A and B, then it can be defined that "A and B are indirectly connected" as objects. Furthermore, even if there is a time during the operation of the circuit when no electrical signal exchange or electrical potential interaction occurs between A and B, if there is a time during the operation of the circuit when an electrical signal exchange or electrical potential interaction occurs between A and B, then it can still be defined that "A and B are indirectly connected."
「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」場合の例としては、AとBとが一つ以上のトランジスタのソース及びドレインを介して接続されている場合がある。一方で、「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」とは言えない場合の例としては、AからBまでの経路に絶縁物が介在する場合がある。具体的には、AとBの間に容量素子が接続されている場合、AとBの間にトランジスタのゲート絶縁膜などが介在している場合などがある。よって、「トランジスタのゲート(A)と、トランジスタのソースまたはドレイン(B)とは、間接的に接続されている」とは言えない。 An example of a case where "A and B are indirectly connected" is when A and B are connected via the source and drain of one or more transistors. On the other hand, an example of a case where it cannot be said that "A and B are indirectly connected" is when an insulator is present in the path from A to B. Specifically, this would be the case when a capacitive element is connected between A and B, or when a transistor gate insulating film or the like is present between A and B. Therefore, it cannot be said that "the transistor gate (A) and the transistor source or drain (B) are indirectly connected."
「AとBとが間接的に接続されている」と言えない場合の別の例としては、AからBまでの経路に、複数のトランジスタがソース及びドレインを介して接続されており、かつ、トランジスタと他のトランジスタの間のノードに、電源、GNDなどから一定の電位Vが供給されている場合がある。 Another example of a case where it cannot be said that "A and B are indirectly connected" is when multiple transistors are connected via their sources and drains to the path from A to B, and a constant potential V is supplied to a node between one transistor and another from a power supply, GND, etc.
なお、本明細書等において「上面形状が概略一致」とは、積層した層と層との間で少なくとも輪郭の一部が重なることをいう。例えば、上層と下層とが、同一のマスクパターン、または一部が同一のマスクパターンにより加工された場合を含む。ただし、厳密には輪郭が重なり合わず、上層が下層の内側に位置すること、または上層が下層の外側に位置することもあり、この場合も「上面形状が概略一致」という場合がある。 In this specification, "top surface shapes that roughly match" means that at least a portion of the contours of stacked layers overlap. For example, this includes cases where the upper and lower layers are processed using the same mask pattern, or where only a portion of the mask pattern is the same. However, strictly speaking, the contours may not overlap, and the upper layer may be located inside the lower layer, or outside the lower layer; in these cases, the term "top surface shapes that roughly match" may also be used.
なお、本明細書等において、ある構成要素の上面形状とは、その平面視における当該構成要素の輪郭形状のことを言う。また平面視とは、当該構成要素の被形成面、または当該構成要素が形成される支持体(例えば基板)の表面の法線方向から見ることを言う。 In this specification, the top surface shape of a certain component refers to the contour shape of that component when viewed from a plan view. Furthermore, a plan view refers to a view from the normal direction of the surface on which the component is formed, or the surface of the support (e.g., substrate) on which the component is formed.
なお、以下では「上」、「下」などの向きを示す表現は、基本的には図面の向きと合わせて用いるものとする。しかしながら、説明を容易にするためなどの目的で、明細書中の「上」または「下」が意味する向きが、図面とは一致しない場合がある。一例としては、積層体等の積層順(または形成順)などを説明する場合に、図面において当該積層体が設けられる側の面(被形成面、支持面、接着面、平坦面など)が当該積層体よりも上側に位置していても、被形成面側を下、積層体側を上、などと表現する場合がある。 In the following, expressions indicating directions such as "up" and "down" will generally be used in accordance with the directions in the drawings. However, for purposes such as ease of explanation, the directions indicated by "up" or "down" in the specification may not match those in the drawings. For example, when explaining the stacking order (or formation order) of a laminate, etc., even if the surface on which the laminate is provided (formed surface, support surface, adhesive surface, flat surface, etc.) is located above the laminate in the drawings, the formed surface side may be expressed as "down" and the laminate side as "up."
なお、本明細書等において、トランジスタのチャネル長方向とは、ソース領域とドレイン領域間を最短距離で結ぶ直線に平行な方向のうちの1つをいう。すなわち、チャネル長方向は、トランジスタがオン状態のときに半導体層を流れる電流の方向のうちの1つに相当する。また、チャネル幅方向とは、当該チャネル長方向に直交する方向をいう。なお、トランジスタの構造または形状によっては、チャネル長方向及びチャネル幅方向は1つに定まらない場合がある。 In this specification, the channel length direction of a transistor refers to one of the directions parallel to the line connecting the source region and the drain region over the shortest distance. In other words, the channel length direction corresponds to one of the directions of current flowing through the semiconductor layer when the transistor is in the on state. The channel width direction refers to the direction perpendicular to the channel length direction. Note that, depending on the structure or shape of the transistor, the channel length direction and channel width direction may not be defined as a single direction.
また、本明細書等において、「膜」という用語と、「層」という用語とは、互いに入れ替えることが可能である。例えば、「絶縁層」という用語は、「絶縁膜」という用語に相互に交換することが可能な場合がある。 Furthermore, in this specification, the terms "film" and "layer" are interchangeable. For example, the term "insulating layer" may be interchangeable with the term "insulating film."
また、本明細書等において、特に断りがない場合、オフ電流とは、トランジスタがオフ状態(非導通状態、遮断状態、ともいう)にあるときのドレイン電流をいう。オフ状態とは、特に断りがない場合、nチャネル型トランジスタでは、ゲートとソースの間の電圧Vgsがしきい値電圧Vthよりも低い(pチャネル型トランジスタでは、Vthよりも高い)状態をいう。 Furthermore, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, off-state current refers to the drain current when a transistor is in an off state (also called a non-conducting state or cut-off state). Unless otherwise specified, the off state refers to a state in which the voltage Vgs between the gate and source of an n-channel transistor is lower than the threshold voltage Vth (higher than Vth for a p-channel transistor).
(実施の形態1)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置の構成例について説明する。以下で例示する半導体装置は、記憶装置に適用することができる。
(Embodiment 1)
In this embodiment, a configuration example of a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device exemplified below can be applied to a memory device.
本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、複数のメモリセルを有する。メモリセルは一つのトランジスタと、一つの記憶素子と、を有する。記憶素子としては、容量素子、抵抗変化型素子、強誘電体素子、チャージトラップ型素子、フローティングゲート型素子など、記憶情報を保持可能な様々な素子を適用できる。以下では、記憶素子として容量素子を用いた場合の例について説明する。 A semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention has a plurality of memory cells. Each memory cell has one transistor and one memory element. Various elements capable of retaining stored information can be used as the memory element, such as a capacitor, a variable resistance element, a ferroelectric element, a charge trap element, or a floating gate element. Below, an example in which a capacitor is used as the memory element is described.
メモリセルが有するトランジスタは、ソース電極とドレイン電極とが異なる高さに位置し、半導体層を高さ方向に電流が流れる。すなわち、チャネル長方向が高さ方向(縦方向)の成分を有するということができるため、本発明の一態様は、VFET(Vertical Field Effect Transistor)、縦型トランジスタ、縦型チャネルトランジスタ、縦チャネル型トランジスタなどと呼ぶことができる。 In the transistors of memory cells, the source and drain electrodes are located at different heights, and current flows in the height direction through the semiconductor layer. In other words, the channel length direction can be said to have a component in the height direction (vertical direction). Therefore, one aspect of the present invention can be called a VFET (Vertical Field Effect Transistor), vertical transistor, vertical channel transistor, vertical channel transistor, etc.
より具体的には、ソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方である下部電極(第1の導電層)上に、スペーサとして機能し、開口部を有する第1の絶縁層が設けられ、第1の絶縁層よりも上方に位置する部分を有するように、ソース電極及びドレイン電極の他方である上部電極(第2の導電層)が設けられる。第1の絶縁層の開口部は、下部電極の上面に対して概略垂直な側壁を有し、当該側壁の一部が下部電極と重なるように設けられる。半導体層は、当該側壁に沿った垂直部分(縦部分ともいう)と、上部電極と接する部分と、下部電極と接する部分と、を有する。半導体層の下部電極と接する部分は、下部電極の上面に対して平行な部分(水平部分、横部分ともいう)を有していてもよい。また、半導体層の垂直部分と水平部分とを覆ってゲート絶縁層(第2の絶縁層)が設けられ、ゲート絶縁層を介して上記垂直部分と水平部分とを覆ってゲート電極(第3の導電層)が設けられる。また、ゲート絶縁層とゲート電極を介して、上記垂直部分と水平部分とを覆って、第3の絶縁層が設けられる。 More specifically, a first insulating layer having an opening and functioning as a spacer is provided on a lower electrode (first conductive layer), which is one of the source and drain electrodes. The upper electrode (second conductive layer), which is the other of the source and drain electrodes, is provided so as to have a portion located above the first insulating layer. The opening in the first insulating layer has a sidewall that is approximately perpendicular to the upper surface of the lower electrode, and is provided so that a portion of the sidewall overlaps with the lower electrode. The semiconductor layer has a vertical portion (also referred to as a vertical portion) along the sidewall, a portion that contacts the upper electrode, and a portion that contacts the lower electrode. The portion of the semiconductor layer that contacts the lower electrode may have a portion (also referred to as a horizontal portion or lateral portion) that is parallel to the upper surface of the lower electrode. A gate insulating layer (second insulating layer) is provided covering the vertical and horizontal portions of the semiconductor layer, and a gate electrode (third conductive layer) is provided covering the vertical and horizontal portions via the gate insulating layer. In addition, a third insulating layer is provided covering the vertical and horizontal portions via the gate insulating layer and gate electrode.
隣接する2つのメモリセルが有する2つのトランジスタは、開口部の中に対称に設けられることが好ましい。すなわち、開口部の一対の側面に沿って、一対の半導体層、一対のゲート絶縁層、一対のゲート電極、一対の第3の絶縁層、及び一対の上部電極などが配置される構成とすることができる。これにより、さらにトランジスタを高密度に配置することが可能となる。 It is preferable that the two transistors in two adjacent memory cells are arranged symmetrically within the opening. In other words, a pair of semiconductor layers, a pair of gate insulating layers, a pair of gate electrodes, a pair of third insulating layers, and a pair of upper electrodes can be arranged along a pair of side surfaces of the opening. This allows for even higher density arrangement of transistors.
半導体層には、半導体特性を示す金属酸化物(酸化物半導体)を用いることが好ましい。半導体層において開口部に沿って、チャネル形成領域として機能する第1の領域と、素子分離領域として機能する第2の領域が交互に配置される。第2の領域は、金属酸化物に金属元素(アルミニウム、ハフニウムなど)が添加されたものであり、第1の領域より抵抗率が高い。 The semiconductor layer preferably uses a metal oxide (oxide semiconductor) that exhibits semiconducting properties. Along the opening in the semiconductor layer, first regions that function as channel formation regions and second regions that function as element isolation regions are alternately arranged. The second regions are metal oxides to which metal elements (aluminum, hafnium, etc.) have been added, and have a higher resistivity than the first regions.
例えば、半導体層を島状にパターン形成して素子分離を行う場合、開口部の底部などでエッチング処理が充分にできない場合がある。これにより、隣接する第1の領域どうしが導通してしまう恐れがある。これに対して、半導体層を開口部を覆って形成し、第1の領域と第2の領域を交互に形成することで十分に素子分離を行うことができる。これにより、3次元構造を有するトランジスタを歩留まりよく作製することができる。 For example, when isolating elements by patterning a semiconductor layer into islands, the etching process may not be sufficient at the bottom of the openings, etc. This can lead to the risk of electrical conduction between adjacent first regions. In response to this, sufficient element isolation can be achieved by forming the semiconductor layer to cover the openings and alternately forming the first and second regions. This allows transistors with a three-dimensional structure to be manufactured with a high yield.
さらに、第2の領域は、第1の領域より結晶性が低く、酸素欠損が多い場合がある。これにより、第2の領域は、第1の領域に含まれる水素及び過剰酸素を捕獲または固着することができる。よって、チャネル形成領域として機能する第1の領域の水素及び過剰酸素を低減することができる。第1の領域の水素濃度を低減することで、トランジスタの初期特性のマイナスシフトを抑制し、ノーマリオフ特性にすることができる。また、+GBT(Gate Bias−Temperature)ストレス試験における、マイナスドリフト劣化を抑制することができる。また、第1の領域の過剰酸素の濃度を低減することで、トランジスタの初期特性の過剰なプラスシフトを抑制することができる。また、+GBTストレス試験における、過剰なプラスドリフト劣化を抑制することができる。 Furthermore, the second region may have lower crystallinity and more oxygen vacancies than the first region. This allows the second region to capture or fix the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in the first region. This reduces the hydrogen and excess oxygen in the first region, which functions as a channel formation region. By reducing the hydrogen concentration in the first region, it is possible to suppress a negative shift in the transistor's initial characteristics and achieve normally-off characteristics. It is also possible to suppress negative drift degradation in a +GBT (Gate Bias-Temperature) stress test. It is also possible to suppress excessive positive shift in the transistor's initial characteristics by reducing the concentration of excess oxygen in the first region. It is also possible to suppress excessive positive drift degradation in a +GBT stress test.
以下では、より具体的な例について、図面を参照して説明する。 More specific examples will be explained below with reference to the drawings.
[構成例]
図1Aに、半導体装置10の上面概略図を示す。また図2A及び図2Bに半導体装置10の斜視図を示す。また図3A、図3B、図4A、図4Bにはそれぞれ、図1A中に示す切断線A1−A2、B1−B2、C1−C2、D1−D2における断面概略図を示している。また各図には、X、Y、Zの向き(以下、X方向、Y方向、Z方向と呼ぶ場合がある。)を示す矢印をそれぞれ示している。X方向、Y方向、及びZ方向は、互いに交差している。例えば、X方向、Y方向、及びZ方向は、互いに直交していることが好ましい。
[Configuration example]
FIG. 1A shows a schematic top view of the semiconductor device 10. FIGS. 2A and 2B show perspective views of the semiconductor device 10. FIGS. 3A, 3B, 4A, and 4B show schematic cross-sectional views taken along the cutting lines A1-A2, B1-B2, C1-C2, and D1-D2 shown in FIG. 1A, respectively. Each figure also shows arrows indicating the X, Y, and Z directions (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction). The X direction, Y direction, and Z direction intersect with each other. For example, the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction are preferably perpendicular to each other.
半導体装置10は、複数のメモリセル15がX方向及びY方向に配列(マトリクス状に配列、行列状に配列ということもできる。)した構成を有する。半導体装置10には、ビット線として機能する導電層24がX方向に延在し、ワード線として機能する導電層23がY方向に延在する。図3Aに示すように、メモリセル15は、トランジスタ20と、その上の容量素子30と、を有する。 The semiconductor device 10 has a configuration in which multiple memory cells 15 are arranged in the X and Y directions (this can also be referred to as a matrix arrangement or a row-and-row arrangement). In the semiconductor device 10, conductive layers 24 that function as bit lines extend in the X direction, and conductive layers 23 that function as word lines extend in the Y direction. As shown in Figure 3A, the memory cell 15 has a transistor 20 and a capacitive element 30 thereon.
図1Bには、半導体装置10に対応する回路図を示している。図1Bには、複数のビット線BLと、各ビット線と直交する複数のワード線WLと、配線CLと、を示している。図1Bでは、配線CLがビット線BLと平行である例を示したが、ワード線WLと平行にすることもできるし、格子状に配置することもできる。または、配線CLは平板状の導電膜であってもよい。 FIG. 1B shows a circuit diagram corresponding to semiconductor device 10. FIG. 1B shows multiple bit lines BL, multiple word lines WL that intersect each bit line at right angles, and wiring CL. While FIG. 1B shows an example in which the wiring CL is parallel to the bit lines BL, it is also possible for the wiring CL to be parallel to the word lines WL, or to be arranged in a grid pattern. Alternatively, the wiring CL may be a flat conductive film.
メモリセル15は、一つのトランジスタ20と、一つの容量素子30から構成されている。トランジスタ20は、ゲートがワード線WLと、ソース及びドレインの一方がビット線BLと、他方が容量素子30の一方の電極と、それぞれ接続される。容量素子30は、他方の電極が配線CLと接続される。 Memory cell 15 consists of one transistor 20 and one capacitor 30. The gate of transistor 20 is connected to word line WL, one of the source and drain is connected to bit line BL, and the other is connected to one electrode of capacitor 30. The other electrode of capacitor 30 is connected to wiring CL.
図1A及び図1B等に示すように、X方向に沿って配置される複数のメモリセル15は、トランジスタ20の向きが互い違いになるように配置されている。すなわち、X方向に沿って隣接する2つのトランジスタ20は、Y−Z面に対して左右対称に配置されている。 As shown in Figures 1A and 1B, multiple memory cells 15 arranged along the X direction are arranged so that the orientations of the transistors 20 are staggered. In other words, two transistors 20 adjacent along the X direction are arranged symmetrically with respect to the Y-Z plane.
ビット線BLは、データの書き込み及び読み出しを行うための配線として機能する。ワード線WLは、スイッチとして機能するトランジスタ20のオンまたはオフ(導通状態または非導通状態)を制御するための配線として機能する。配線CLは、容量素子30に接続される定電位線としての機能を有する。 The bit line BL functions as wiring for writing and reading data. The word line WL functions as wiring for controlling the on/off (conducting or non-conducting) of the transistor 20, which functions as a switch. The wiring CL functions as a constant potential line connected to the capacitance element 30.
なお、各導電層24の間に、定電位が与えられた導電層を配置する構成にすることもできる。このような導電層を配置することで、隣接する2つのビット線間における信号の伝達を遮蔽することができる。 It is also possible to configure the device so that a conductive layer to which a constant potential is applied is placed between each conductive layer 24. By placing such a conductive layer, it is possible to block the transmission of signals between two adjacent bit lines.
図3A等に示すように、トランジスタ20及び容量素子30は、基板(図示しない)上に設けられる絶縁層11上に設けられる。絶縁層11は、下地絶縁層として機能する。 As shown in Figure 3A and other figures, the transistor 20 and the capacitor 30 are provided on an insulating layer 11 provided on a substrate (not shown). The insulating layer 11 functions as a base insulating layer.
図7Aには、図3Aにおけるトランジスタ20及びその近傍の拡大図を示している。トランジスタ20は、半導体層21と、ゲート絶縁層として機能する絶縁層22と、ゲート電極として機能する導電層23と、ソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方として機能する導電層24と、その他方として機能する導電層25と、を有する。ここでは、導電層24が、導電膜24aと、その上に位置する導電膜24bと、を有する例を示している。 Figure 7A shows an enlarged view of the transistor 20 and its vicinity in Figure 3A. The transistor 20 has a semiconductor layer 21, an insulating layer 22 that functions as a gate insulating layer, a conductive layer 23 that functions as a gate electrode, a conductive layer 24 that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode, and a conductive layer 25 that functions as the other. Here, an example is shown in which the conductive layer 24 has a conductive film 24a and a conductive film 24b located thereon.
絶縁層11上に絶縁層41が設けられ、絶縁層41上に導電層24、及び絶縁層42が設けられる。導電層24は、X方向に延在して設けられており、絶縁層42に埋め込まれている。導電層24及び絶縁層42、それぞれ上面の高さ(絶縁層11の上面からの高さ)が概略一致することが好ましい。 An insulating layer 41 is provided on insulating layer 11, and a conductive layer 24 and an insulating layer 42 are provided on insulating layer 41. The conductive layer 24 extends in the X direction and is embedded in the insulating layer 42. It is preferable that the heights of the upper surfaces of the conductive layer 24 and insulating layer 42 (heights from the upper surface of insulating layer 11) are roughly the same.
絶縁層41は、保護絶縁層として機能し、絶縁層11側から水素などの不純物が半導体層21に拡散することを防ぐ機能を有する。例えば窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、酸化ガリウム膜などの、酸化シリコン膜よりも水素が拡散しにくい(水素に対してバリア性を有する)膜を用いることができる。特に、窒化シリコン膜、または窒化酸化シリコン膜を用いることが好ましい。なお、絶縁層41は不要であれば設けなくてもよい。 The insulating layer 41 functions as a protective insulating layer, preventing impurities such as hydrogen from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 21 from the insulating layer 11 side. For example, a film that is less susceptible to hydrogen diffusion than silicon oxide film (has barrier properties against hydrogen), such as a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, or gallium oxide film, can be used. It is particularly preferable to use a silicon nitride film or silicon nitride oxide film. Note that the insulating layer 41 need not be provided if it is not required.
なお、本明細書などにおいて、酸化窒化物とは、その組成として、窒素よりも酸素の含有量が多い材料を指し、窒化酸化物とは、その組成として、酸素よりも窒素の含有量が多い材料を指す。例えば、酸化窒化シリコンと記載した場合は、その組成として窒素よりも酸素の含有量が多い材料を指し、窒化酸化シリコンと記載した場合は、その組成として、酸素よりも窒素の含有量が多い材料を示す。 In this specification and elsewhere, oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen, and nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen. For example, silicon oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen, and silicon nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen.
導電層24は、導電膜24aと、その上に位置する導電膜24bとを有する。導電膜24aには、導電膜24bよりも低抵抗な導電性材料を用いることが好ましい。特に、金属材料を含むことが好ましい。導電膜24bには、導電性金属酸化物(酸化物導電体)を用いることが好ましい。 The conductive layer 24 has a conductive film 24a and a conductive film 24b located thereon. The conductive film 24a is preferably made of a conductive material with lower resistance than the conductive film 24b. It is particularly preferable for the conductive film 24a to contain a metal material. The conductive film 24b is preferably made of a conductive metal oxide (oxide conductor).
金属酸化物を含む半導体層21と接する導電膜24bに、導電性金属酸化物を用いることにより、これらの接触抵抗を低減でき、配線の負荷を低減することができるため好ましい。特に、導電膜24bが、半導体層21に含まれる金属元素と同じ金属元素を含む構成とすると、より接触抵抗を低減できるため好ましい。具体的には、半導体層21と導電膜24bの両方が、In、Sn、Zn、Ga、及びTiから選ばれた、同じ一以上の元素を含むことが好ましい。また、導電膜24aには、導電膜24bよりも低抵抗な金属材料を用いることにより、接触抵抗と配線抵抗の両方を低減することが可能となるため、より配線の負荷を低減することが可能となる。 Using a conductive metal oxide for the conductive film 24b that contacts the semiconductor layer 21 containing a metal oxide reduces the contact resistance between them, thereby reducing the load on the wiring, which is preferable. In particular, it is preferable for the conductive film 24b to contain the same metal element as the metal element contained in the semiconductor layer 21, as this further reduces the contact resistance. Specifically, it is preferable that both the semiconductor layer 21 and the conductive film 24b contain the same one or more elements selected from In, Sn, Zn, Ga, and Ti. Furthermore, using a metal material with a lower resistance than the conductive film 24b for the conductive film 24a reduces both the contact resistance and the wiring resistance, thereby further reducing the load on the wiring.
導電層24及び絶縁層42上に絶縁層43が設けられている。絶縁層43は、Y方向に延在された開口部47を有する。開口部47の形状は、溝状、トレンチ状、スリット状などということができる。開口部47は、導電膜24bの上面及び絶縁層42の上面に達する。絶縁層43の開口部47における側面(開口部47の側壁ということもできる。)は、被形成面(導電層24または絶縁層42の上面)に対して概略垂直であることが好ましい。また、開口部47の深さは、絶縁層43の隣接する開口部47の間の幅よりも大きいことが好ましい。 An insulating layer 43 is provided on the conductive layer 24 and the insulating layer 42. The insulating layer 43 has an opening 47 extending in the Y direction. The shape of the opening 47 can be described as a groove, trench, slit, or the like. The opening 47 reaches the upper surface of the conductive film 24b and the upper surface of the insulating layer 42. It is preferable that the side surface of the opening 47 in the insulating layer 43 (which can also be called the sidewall of the opening 47) is approximately perpendicular to the surface on which it is formed (the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42). It is also preferable that the depth of the opening 47 is greater than the width between adjacent openings 47 in the insulating layer 43.
また、上記において、絶縁層43が開口部47を有する例について示したが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、絶縁層43を、Y方向に延在した帯状の上面形状を有する構造体とすることもできる。この場合、絶縁層43は、X方向に直交する一対の側面を有し、当該側面の一部は導電層24と重なる。また、絶縁層43の当該側面は、被形成面に対して概略垂直であることが好ましい。また、絶縁層43は、高さがX方向の幅よりも大きいことが好ましい。 Furthermore, although the above describes an example in which the insulating layer 43 has an opening 47, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the insulating layer 43 may be a structure having a strip-shaped upper surface extending in the Y direction. In this case, the insulating layer 43 has a pair of side surfaces perpendicular to the X direction, with portions of these side surfaces overlapping the conductive layer 24. Furthermore, it is preferable that these side surfaces of the insulating layer 43 are approximately perpendicular to the surface on which they are formed. Furthermore, it is preferable that the height of the insulating layer 43 is greater than its width in the X direction.
本明細書等において、2つの面が垂直とは、その内角が80度以上100度以下である状態をいう。また2つの面が概略垂直とは、その内角が60度以上120度以下である状態をいう。また、本明細書等において、2つの面が平行とは、その内角が−10度以上10度以下(平行を含む)である状態をいう。また2つの面が概略平行とは、その内角が−30度以上30度以下(平行を含む)である状態をいう。 In this specification, "two surfaces are perpendicular" means that the interior angle between them is between 80 degrees and 100 degrees. "Two surfaces are approximately perpendicular" means that the interior angle between them is between 60 degrees and 120 degrees. "Two surfaces are parallel" means that the interior angle between them is between -10 degrees and 10 degrees (including parallel). "Two surfaces are approximately parallel" means that the interior angle between them is between -30 degrees and 30 degrees (including parallel).
ここで、開口部47の底面の端部は、図7Aに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状(丸みを帯びた形状ということもできる。)であることが好ましい。このような構造にすることで、半導体層21、絶縁層22、及び導電層23の凹部の端部も同様に湾曲形状にすることができる。これにより、導電層23の凹部の端部の電界集中を緩和することができる。よって、トランジスタ20で絶縁破壊が発生することを抑制することができる。 Here, it is preferable that the bottom edge of the opening 47 has a curved shape (which can also be called a rounded shape) with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in FIG. 7A. By using such a structure, the edges of the recesses in the semiconductor layer 21, insulating layer 22, and conductive layer 23 can also be similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the edges of the recesses in the conductive layer 23. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of dielectric breakdown in the transistor 20.
半導体層21は、Y方向に延在して設けられている。半導体層21は、開口部47の側壁に接する垂直部分と、導電層24の上面に接する水平部分と、を有する。なお、垂直部分は厳密に垂直とは限られず、開口部47の側壁がZ方向に対して傾斜している場合には、半導体層21の当該垂直部分も、その側壁に沿って傾斜して設けられる。同様に、導電層24の上面がX−Y平面(例えば基板面)に対して傾斜している場合には、半導体層21の当該水平部分もその上面に沿って傾斜して設けられる。 The semiconductor layer 21 extends in the Y direction. The semiconductor layer 21 has a vertical portion that contacts the sidewall of the opening 47 and a horizontal portion that contacts the top surface of the conductive layer 24. Note that the vertical portion is not limited to being strictly vertical; if the sidewall of the opening 47 is inclined with respect to the Z direction, the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21 is also inclined along the sidewall. Similarly, if the top surface of the conductive layer 24 is inclined with respect to the X-Y plane (e.g., the substrate surface), the horizontal portion of the semiconductor layer 21 is also inclined along the top surface.
より具体的には、半導体層21の垂直部分は、開口部47の側壁に沿って設けられ、且つ、表面(半導体層21の絶縁層43側の表面または絶縁層22側の表面のいずれか一方または双方)が、導電層24、または絶縁層42の上面に対して垂直、または概略垂直である部分をいう。また、半導体層21の水平部分は、導電層24または絶縁層42の上面に沿って設けられ、且つ、表面(半導体層21の導電層24側の表面、または絶縁層22側の表面)が、導電層24、または絶縁層42の上面に対して平行、または概略平行である部分をいう。 More specifically, the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21 refers to a portion that is provided along the sidewall of the opening 47, and whose surface (either or both of the surface of the semiconductor layer 21 facing the insulating layer 43 or the surface of the insulating layer 22) is perpendicular or approximately perpendicular to the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42. Furthermore, the horizontal portion of the semiconductor layer 21 refers to a portion that is provided along the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42, and whose surface (the surface of the semiconductor layer 21 facing the conductive layer 24 or the surface of the insulating layer 22) is parallel or approximately parallel to the upper surface of the conductive layer 24 or the insulating layer 42.
また半導体層21は、開口部47の中に設けられる2つのトランジスタ20に渡って設けられている。すなわち、半導体層21は、開口部47の対向する2つの側壁にそれぞれ沿った一対の垂直部分と、これらと接続され、導電層24の上面に接する一つの水平部分と、を有する。 The semiconductor layer 21 is also provided across the two transistors 20 provided in the opening 47. That is, the semiconductor layer 21 has a pair of vertical portions along the two opposing side walls of the opening 47, and one horizontal portion connected to these and in contact with the top surface of the conductive layer 24.
トランジスタ20は、ソース電極とドレイン電極とが異なる高さに位置しているため、半導体を流れる電流は高さ方向に流れることになる。すなわち、チャネル長方向が高さ方向(縦方向)の成分を有するということができるため、本発明の一態様のトランジスタは、VFET、縦型トランジスタ、縦型チャネルトランジスタ、などとも呼ぶことができる。トランジスタ20は、ソース電極、半導体、及びドレイン電極のうち2以上を重ねて設けることが可能となるため、半導体を平面上に配置した、いわゆるプレーナ型のトランジスタ(横型トランジスタ、LFET(Lateral FET)などとも呼ぶことができる)と比較して、大幅に占有面積を縮小することができる。 In transistor 20, the source electrode and drain electrode are located at different heights, so the current flowing through the semiconductor flows in the height direction. In other words, the channel length direction can be said to have a component in the height direction (vertical direction), and therefore a transistor according to one embodiment of the present invention can also be called a VFET, vertical transistor, vertical channel transistor, etc. Because transistor 20 allows two or more of the source electrode, semiconductor, and drain electrode to be stacked, it can occupy a significantly smaller area than a so-called planar transistor (which can also be called a lateral transistor, LFET (Lateral FET), etc.) in which the semiconductor is arranged on a flat surface.
また、トランジスタ20のチャネル長は、スペーサとして機能する絶縁層43の厚さ(開口部47の深さということもできる。)によって精密に制御することが可能となるため、プレーナ型のトランジスタと比較して、チャネル長のばらつきを極めて小さくできる。さらには、絶縁層43を薄くすることで、極めてチャネル長の短いトランジスタも作製することができる。例えばチャネル長が2μm以下、1μm以下、500nm以下、300nm以下、200nm以下、100nm以下、50nm以下、30nm以下、または20nm以下であって、5nm以上、7nm以上、または10nm以上のトランジスタを作製することができる。そのため、量産用の露光装置では実現できなかった、極めて小さいチャネル長のトランジスタを実現することができる。また、最先端のLSI技術で用いられる極めて高額な露光装置を用いることなく、チャネル長が10nm未満のトランジスタを実現することもできる。 Furthermore, the channel length of the transistor 20 can be precisely controlled by the thickness of the insulating layer 43 (which can also be referred to as the depth of the opening 47), which functions as a spacer. This allows for extremely small variations in channel length compared to planar transistors. Furthermore, by thinning the insulating layer 43, transistors with extremely short channel lengths can be fabricated. For example, transistors with channel lengths of 2 μm or less, 1 μm or less, 500 nm or less, 300 nm or less, 200 nm or less, 100 nm or less, 50 nm or less, 30 nm or less, or 20 nm or less, and 5 nm or more, 7 nm or more, or 10 nm or more, can be fabricated. This allows for the realization of transistors with extremely short channel lengths that could not be achieved using mass-production exposure equipment. Furthermore, transistors with channel lengths of less than 10 nm can be fabricated without using the extremely expensive exposure equipment used in cutting-edge LSI technology.
半導体層21は、少なくとも一部に半導体性を示す領域を有する。半導体層21は、図1A、図2A及び図2Bに示すように、複数の領域21aと、複数の領域21bと、を有する。ここで、図2Bは、領域21a及び領域21bを見やすくするために、図2Aから、領域21a及び領域21bの上の構成を取り除いたものである。領域21aは半導体性を示す領域であり、領域21bは絶縁性を示す領域である。開口部47内に設けられた半導体層21において、複数の領域21aと、複数の領域21bは、交互にY方向に配列されている。つまり、開口部47に配列された複数のトランジスタ20において、領域21aを含むトランジスタ20がそれぞれ、領域21bによって素子分離されている。このため、領域21bをアイソレーション領域と呼ぶこともできる。 The semiconductor layer 21 has at least a portion that exhibits semiconductivity. As shown in Figures 1A, 2A, and 2B, the semiconductor layer 21 has multiple regions 21a and multiple regions 21b. Figure 2B shows the structure above regions 21a and 21b removed from Figure 2A to make regions 21a and 21b easier to see. Region 21a is a region that exhibits semiconductivity, and region 21b is a region that exhibits insulation. In the semiconductor layer 21 provided within the opening 47, multiple regions 21a and multiple regions 21b are arranged alternately in the Y direction. In other words, among the multiple transistors 20 arranged in the opening 47, the transistors 20 that include region 21a are each isolated by region 21b. For this reason, region 21b can also be called an isolation region.
領域21aは、少なくとも一部がチャネル形成領域として機能する。図7Aに示すように、領域21aの垂直部分の一部がチャネル形成領域として機能する。また、領域21aの垂直部分の上端部は、導電層25の下端部に接しており、ソース領域またはドレイン領域の一方として機能する。また、領域21aの水平部分の下面は、導電膜24bの上面と接しており、ソース領域またはドレイン領域の他方として機能する。 At least a portion of region 21a functions as a channel formation region. As shown in FIG. 7A, part of the vertical portion of region 21a functions as a channel formation region. The upper end of the vertical portion of region 21a contacts the lower end of conductive layer 25 and functions as either a source region or a drain region. The lower surface of the horizontal portion of region 21a contacts the upper surface of conductive film 24b and functions as the other of the source region or the drain region.
領域21bは、領域21aより抵抗率が高い領域である。例えば、領域21bの抵抗率は、領域21aの10倍以上であることが好ましい。領域21bは、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方を含む。また、領域21bは、領域21aより、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方の濃度が高い。領域21b中には、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ハフニウム、及びハフニウムアルミネートのいずれか一または複数が形成される。また、領域21bは、領域21aより結晶性が低く、アモルファス構造の領域を有することが好ましい。 Region 21b has a higher resistivity than region 21a. For example, the resistivity of region 21b is preferably at least 10 times that of region 21a. Region 21b contains either aluminum or hafnium, or both. Region 21b has a higher concentration of either aluminum or hafnium, or both, than region 21a. One or more of aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, and hafnium aluminate are formed in region 21b. Region 21b is also less crystalline than region 21a, and preferably has an amorphous structure.
図8Aに示すように、領域21bも、領域21aと同様に、垂直部分と水平部分を有する。領域21bの垂直部分の上端部は、絶縁層44の下端部に接する。また、領域21bの水平部分の下面は、絶縁層42の上面と接する。 As shown in FIG. 8A, region 21b, like region 21a, has vertical and horizontal portions. The upper end of the vertical portion of region 21b contacts the lower end of insulating layer 44. The lower surface of the horizontal portion of region 21b contacts the upper surface of insulating layer 42.
例えば、半導体層を島状にパターン形成して素子分離を行う場合、開口部47の底部などでエッチング処理が充分にできない場合がある。これにより、隣接する領域21aどうしが導通してしまう恐れがある。これに対して、開口部47を覆って半導体層21を形成し、領域21aと領域21bを交互に形成することで十分に素子分離を行うことができる。よって、半導体装置の歩留まりを向上させることができる。 For example, when isolating elements by patterning the semiconductor layer into islands, the etching process may not be sufficient at the bottom of the opening 47, etc. This can lead to the risk of adjacent regions 21a becoming conductive. In response to this, forming the semiconductor layer 21 to cover the opening 47 and alternately forming regions 21a and 21b can achieve sufficient element isolation. This can improve the yield of semiconductor devices.
絶縁層22は、半導体層21の垂直部分及び水平部分を覆って設けられている。また導電層23は絶縁層22上に位置し、絶縁層22を介して半導体層21の垂直部分及び水平部分を覆って設けられている。また導電層23上に絶縁層31が設けられる。絶縁層31は絶縁層22及び導電層23を介して半導体層21の垂直部分及び水平部分を覆って設けられている。絶縁層22、導電層23、及び絶縁層31は、開口部47の中で、Y方向に延在して設けられている。 Insulating layer 22 is provided to cover the vertical and horizontal portions of semiconductor layer 21. Conductive layer 23 is located on insulating layer 22 and is provided to cover the vertical and horizontal portions of semiconductor layer 21 via insulating layer 22. Insulating layer 31 is provided on conductive layer 23. Insulating layer 31 is provided to cover the vertical and horizontal portions of semiconductor layer 21 via insulating layer 22 and conductive layer 23. Insulating layer 22, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 31 are provided to extend in the Y direction within opening 47.
絶縁層31には、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。これにより、トランジスタ20またはメモリセル15の作製工程中にかかる熱などにより、半導体層21に拡散しうる水素を、絶縁層31により捕獲または固着することが可能となり、半導体層21中に含まれる水素の濃度を低減することができる。これにより、電気特性が良好で、信頼性の高いトランジスタ20または半導体装置10を実現できる。絶縁層31に適用可能な、水素を捕獲または固着する絶縁膜として、酸化ハフニウム膜、ハフニウムシリケート膜、酸化アルミニウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。 The insulating layer 31 is preferably made of an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen. This allows the insulating layer 31 to capture or fix hydrogen that may diffuse into the semiconductor layer 21 due to heat or other factors applied during the manufacturing process of the transistor 20 or memory cell 15, thereby reducing the concentration of hydrogen contained in the semiconductor layer 21. This makes it possible to achieve a transistor 20 or semiconductor device 10 with good electrical characteristics and high reliability. It is preferable to use a hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, aluminum oxide film, or the like as an insulating film that can be used for the insulating layer 31 and that can capture or fix hydrogen.
絶縁層31、導電層23、及び絶縁層22には、半導体層21に達するスリットが設けられ、当該スリットを境に分断されている。また当該スリットの内部において、絶縁層31の側面、導電層23の側面、絶縁層22の側面、及び半導体層21の上面に沿って、これらに接する絶縁層32が設けられている。さらに、絶縁層32上に、当該スリットを埋めるように絶縁層33が設けられている。絶縁層32及び絶縁層33は、開口部47の中で、Y方向に延在して設けられている。 Slits are provided in insulating layer 31, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 22 that reach semiconductor layer 21, dividing them at the slits. Furthermore, within the slits, insulating layer 32 is provided along and in contact with the side surfaces of insulating layer 31, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 22, as well as the top surface of semiconductor layer 21. Furthermore, insulating layer 33 is provided on insulating layer 32 so as to fill the slits. Insulating layer 32 and insulating layer 33 are provided within opening 47, extending in the Y direction.
絶縁層32には、絶縁層41と同様に、水素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層33などに含まれる水素が半導体層21側に拡散することを防ぐことができる。絶縁層32には、窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、酸化ガリウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。特に、窒化シリコン膜、または窒化酸化シリコン膜を用いることが好ましい。 As with insulating layer 41, insulating layer 32 is preferably made of an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen. This prevents hydrogen contained in insulating layer 33 and the like from diffusing toward semiconductor layer 21. For insulating layer 32, it is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, gallium oxide film, or the like. It is particularly preferable to use a silicon nitride film or silicon nitride oxide film.
絶縁層33には、誘電率の低い絶縁材料を用いることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層33を挟んで設けられる一対の導電層23間の寄生容量を低減することができる。絶縁層33としては、例えば酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコンなどの無機絶縁材料を用いることができる。 It is preferable to use an insulating material with a low dielectric constant for the insulating layer 33. This reduces the parasitic capacitance between the pair of conductive layers 23 sandwiching the insulating layer 33. For example, inorganic insulating materials such as silicon oxide and silicon oxynitride can be used for the insulating layer 33.
導電層23、絶縁層31、絶縁層32及び絶縁層33のそれぞれの上面に接して、絶縁層34が設けられている。また、絶縁層34は、絶縁層22の側面(絶縁層33側の側面)に接して設けることができる。絶縁層34は、開口部47の中で、Y方向に延在して設けられている。 Insulating layer 34 is provided in contact with the upper surfaces of conductive layer 23, insulating layer 31, insulating layer 32, and insulating layer 33. Insulating layer 34 can also be provided in contact with the side surface of insulating layer 22 (the side surface on the insulating layer 33 side). Insulating layer 34 is provided within opening 47, extending in the Y direction.
絶縁層34としては、絶縁層32及び絶縁層41と同様に、水素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層34よりも上方から半導体層21側に水素が拡散することを防ぐことができる。絶縁層34には、窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、酸化ガリウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。特に、窒化シリコン膜、または窒化酸化シリコン膜を用いることが好ましい。 As with insulating layers 32 and 41, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen as insulating layer 34. This makes it possible to prevent hydrogen from diffusing from above insulating layer 34 toward semiconductor layer 21. It is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, gallium oxide film, or the like for insulating layer 34. In particular, it is preferable to use a silicon nitride film or silicon nitride oxide film.
また、絶縁層34に、絶縁層31と同様に、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。これにより、トランジスタ20またはメモリセル15の作製工程中にかかる熱などにより、半導体層21に拡散しうる水素を、絶縁層34により捕獲または固着することが可能となり、半導体層21中に含まれる水素の濃度を低減することができる。これにより、電気特性が良好で、信頼性の高いトランジスタ20または半導体装置10を実現できる。絶縁層34に適用可能な、水素を捕獲または固着する絶縁膜として、酸化ハフニウム膜、ハフニウムシリケート膜、酸化アルミニウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。 Furthermore, it is preferable to use an insulating film for the insulating layer 34 that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen, similar to the insulating layer 31. This makes it possible for the insulating layer 34 to capture or fix hydrogen that may diffuse into the semiconductor layer 21 due to heat or other factors applied during the manufacturing process of the transistor 20 or memory cell 15, thereby reducing the concentration of hydrogen contained in the semiconductor layer 21. This makes it possible to realize a transistor 20 or semiconductor device 10 with good electrical characteristics and high reliability. It is preferable to use a hafnium oxide film, a hafnium silicate film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like as an insulating film that can capture or fix hydrogen and that can be used for the insulating layer 34.
絶縁層43、絶縁層22、及び絶縁層34を覆って絶縁層44が設けられる。絶縁層44は、層間絶縁膜として機能する。絶縁層44としては、例えば酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコンなどの無機絶縁材料を用いることができる。 An insulating layer 44 is provided to cover insulating layers 43, 22, and 34. The insulating layer 44 functions as an interlayer insulating film. For the insulating layer 44, an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride can be used.
また、絶縁層34、絶縁層22、及び半導体層21上に導電層25が設けられている。ここで、半導体層21の垂直部分の上面が、絶縁層22の上面よりも下方に位置し、絶縁層43と、絶縁層22と、半導体層21とに囲まれた隙間に導電層25の一部が設けられる構成とすることができる。このとき、半導体層21の上面は、導電層23の上面よりも下方に位置することが好ましい。半導体層21の上面が導電層23の上面よりも上方に位置すると、ゲート電界が印加されない、いわゆるオフセット領域が形成されうる。そのため、半導体層21の上面を導電層23の上面より下方に位置するように加工することで、半導体層21にオフセット領域が形成されることを防ぎ、トランジスタ20が流すことのできる電流を大きくできる。そのため、動作速度の高い半導体装置10を実現できる。 Furthermore, a conductive layer 25 is provided on the insulating layer 34, the insulating layer 22, and the semiconductor layer 21. Here, the upper surface of the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21 can be located below the upper surface of the insulating layer 22, and a portion of the conductive layer 25 can be provided in the gap surrounded by the insulating layer 43, the insulating layer 22, and the semiconductor layer 21. In this case, the upper surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is preferably located below the upper surface of the conductive layer 23. If the upper surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is located above the upper surface of the conductive layer 23, a so-called offset region, where no gate electric field is applied, may be formed. Therefore, by processing the upper surface of the semiconductor layer 21 so that it is located below the upper surface of the conductive layer 23, the formation of an offset region in the semiconductor layer 21 can be prevented, and the current that the transistor 20 can pass can be increased. This makes it possible to realize a semiconductor device 10 with high operating speed.
なお、図7A等では、開口部47の側壁と、絶縁層44の側面が面一である場合を示したが、平面視において、絶縁層44の側面が開口部47の側壁よりも外側に位置することができる。その場合、導電層25の一部は、絶縁層43の上面に接する部分を有する構成となる。 Note that while Figure 7A and other figures show a case where the sidewall of the opening 47 and the side surface of the insulating layer 44 are flush with each other, in a plan view, the side surface of the insulating layer 44 can be positioned outside the sidewall of the opening 47. In this case, a portion of the conductive layer 25 will be in contact with the upper surface of the insulating layer 43.
また、図8Aに示すように、導電層25が設けられていない領域では、絶縁層43と、絶縁層22と、半導体層21とに囲まれた隙間に絶縁層44の一部が設けられる。なお、図7Aに示す断面では、半導体層21の領域21aが、導電層25に接し、図8Bに示す断面では、半導体層21の領域21bが、絶縁層44に接している。このように、領域21aの少なくとも一部は導電層25に接し、領域21bの少なくとも一部は絶縁層44に接する。ただし、領域21aの他の一部が絶縁層44に接する場合もある。また、領域21bの他の一部が導電層25に接する場合もある。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8A, in areas where conductive layer 25 is not provided, a portion of insulating layer 44 is provided in the gap surrounded by insulating layer 43, insulating layer 22, and semiconductor layer 21. Note that in the cross section shown in FIG. 7A, region 21a of semiconductor layer 21 contacts conductive layer 25, and in the cross section shown in FIG. 8B, region 21b of semiconductor layer 21 contacts insulating layer 44. In this manner, at least a portion of region 21a contacts conductive layer 25, and at least a portion of region 21b contacts insulating layer 44. However, there are cases where another portion of region 21a contacts insulating layer 44. There are also cases where another portion of region 21b contacts conductive layer 25.
ここで、開口部47の中で、Y方向の断面視において、2つのトランジスタ20が左右対称に設けられている。より具体的には、開口部47の中でY−Z面に対して、半導体層21、一対の導電層25、一対の導電層23、一対の絶縁層22、一対の絶縁層31などが、対称となるように設けられている。このように、開口部47の対向する2つの側壁のそれぞれに沿ってトランジスタ20を設けることで、トランジスタ20の集積度を高めることができるため好ましい。 Here, two transistors 20 are provided symmetrically in the opening 47 when viewed cross-sectionally in the Y direction. More specifically, the semiconductor layer 21, a pair of conductive layers 25, a pair of conductive layers 23, a pair of insulating layers 22, a pair of insulating layers 31, etc. are provided symmetrically in the opening 47 with respect to the Y-Z plane. In this way, providing the transistors 20 along each of the two opposing sidewalls of the opening 47 is preferable because it increases the integration density of the transistors 20.
導電層25及び絶縁層44を覆って、絶縁層45が設けられている。絶縁層45としては、絶縁層34、絶縁層32及び絶縁層41と同様に、水素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層45よりも上方から半導体層21側に水素が拡散することを防ぐことができる。絶縁層45には、窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、酸化ガリウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。特に、窒化シリコン膜、または窒化酸化シリコン膜を用いることが好ましい。 An insulating layer 45 is provided covering the conductive layer 25 and the insulating layer 44. Similar to the insulating layers 34, 32, and 41, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen for the insulating layer 45. This makes it possible to prevent hydrogen from diffusing from above the insulating layer 45 toward the semiconductor layer 21. It is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, aluminum oxide film, magnesium oxide film, hafnium oxide film, gallium oxide film, or the like for the insulating layer 45. It is particularly preferable to use a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride oxide film.
絶縁層45上に、絶縁層46が設けられている。絶縁層46は層間絶縁層として機能する。絶縁層46としては、絶縁層44と同様に、例えば酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコンなどの無機絶縁材料を用いることができる。 Insulating layer 46 is provided on insulating layer 45. Insulating layer 46 functions as an interlayer insulating layer. As with insulating layer 44, insulating layer 46 can be made of an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride.
図3Aに示すように、絶縁層45及び絶縁層46は、導電層25に達する開口を有する。容量素子30は、絶縁層45及び絶縁層46に設けられた当該開口に設けられている。ここで、絶縁層45及び絶縁層46の開口は、縦穴状であり、開口部47とは異なり、X方向またはY方向には延在しないことが好ましい。 As shown in FIG. 3A, insulating layers 45 and 46 have openings that reach conductive layer 25. Capacitive element 30 is provided in the openings provided in insulating layers 45 and 46. Here, the openings in insulating layers 45 and 46 are vertical holes, and, unlike opening 47, preferably do not extend in the X or Y directions.
容量素子30は、下部電極として機能する導電層51と、上部電極として機能する導電層53と、これらの間に配置され、誘電体として機能する絶縁層52と、を有する。導電層51は、絶縁層45及び絶縁層46の開口における側面に沿って設けられる垂直部分と、導電層25の上面に接する水平部分と、を有する。言い換えると、導電層51は、底のある円筒状(コップ状ともいう)の形状を有し、凹部を有する。絶縁層52は、導電層51の凹部に沿って設けられる部分と、導電層51の上面と接する部分と、絶縁層46の上面と接する部分と、を有する。導電層53は、絶縁層52を介して導電層51の凹部を埋めるように設けられている。また導電層53は、絶縁層52を介して絶縁層46上に設けられる部分を有する。導電層51は、一つのメモリセル毎に個別に設けられるのに対し、導電層53は複数のメモリセルに共通に設けられている。ここでは、導電層53の上部が上記配線CLを兼ねる構成である。 The capacitor element 30 has a conductive layer 51 that functions as a lower electrode, a conductive layer 53 that functions as an upper electrode, and an insulating layer 52 disposed therebetween and that functions as a dielectric. The conductive layer 51 has a vertical portion that is provided along the side surfaces of the openings in the insulating layers 45 and 46, and a horizontal portion that contacts the upper surface of the conductive layer 25. In other words, the conductive layer 51 has a cylindrical (also called cup-shaped) shape with a bottom and a recess. The insulating layer 52 has a portion that is provided along the recess of the conductive layer 51, a portion that contacts the upper surface of the conductive layer 51, and a portion that contacts the upper surface of the insulating layer 46. The conductive layer 53 is provided so as to fill the recess of the conductive layer 51 via the insulating layer 52. The conductive layer 53 also has a portion that is provided on the insulating layer 46 via the insulating layer 52. The conductive layer 51 is provided individually for each memory cell, while the conductive layer 53 is provided in common to multiple memory cells. Here, the upper part of the conductive layer 53 also serves as the wiring CL.
ここで、図7Aに示すように、絶縁層45及び絶縁層46の開口の底面の端部は任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状であることが好ましい。湾曲した形状は、絶縁層45だけに形成される場合、または絶縁層45及び絶縁層46に渡って形成される場合がある。このような構造にすることで、絶縁層52の凹部の端部及び導電層53の凸部の端部も同様に湾曲形状にすることができる。これにより、導電層53の凸部の端部の電界集中を緩和することができる。よって、容量素子30で絶縁破壊が発生することを抑制することができる。 Here, as shown in FIG. 7A, it is preferable that the edges of the bottom surfaces of the openings in insulating layer 45 and insulating layer 46 have a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature. The curved shape may be formed only in insulating layer 45, or may be formed across insulating layer 45 and insulating layer 46. By using such a structure, the edges of the recesses in insulating layer 52 and the edges of the protrusions in conductive layer 53 can also be similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the edges of the protrusions in conductive layer 53. This makes it possible to suppress dielectric breakdown in capacitive element 30.
また、図7Aに示すように、導電層51の上端部が絶縁層46の上面より低い構造にすることができる。また、導電層51の上端部をテーパ形状にすることができる。ここで、導電層51の上端部、及び絶縁層46の上端部は、図7Aに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状であることが好ましい。このような構造にすることで、絶縁層52も同様に湾曲形状にすることができる。これにより、導電層51の上端部の電界集中を緩和することができる。よって、容量素子30で絶縁破壊が発生することを抑制することができる。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7A, the upper end of the conductive layer 51 can be configured to be lower than the upper surface of the insulating layer 46. The upper end of the conductive layer 51 can also be tapered. Here, the upper end of the conductive layer 51 and the upper end of the insulating layer 46 preferably have a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in FIG. 7A. By using such a structure, the insulating layer 52 can also be similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the upper end of the conductive layer 51. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dielectric breakdown from occurring in the capacitance element 30.
図1Aでは、導電層51の平面視における輪郭が円形である例を示しているが、これに限られない。例えば導電層51の平面視における輪郭の形状は、円形に限られず、楕円形、角の丸い四角形などとすることができる。また、正三角形、正方形、正五角形をはじめとした正多角形、または正多角形以外の多角形としてもよい。また、星形多角形などの、少なくとも一つの内角が180度を超える多角形である、凹多角形とすると、容量素子30の容量を大きくできる。そのほか、角の丸い多角形、直線と曲線とを組み合わせた閉曲線などとすることができる。 In Figure 1A, an example is shown in which the outline of the conductive layer 51 in a planar view is circular, but this is not limited to this. For example, the shape of the outline of the conductive layer 51 in a planar view is not limited to a circle, and can be an ellipse, a rectangle with rounded corners, or the like. It may also be a regular polygon such as an equilateral triangle, square, or regular pentagon, or a polygon other than a regular polygon. Furthermore, if the outline is a concave polygon, such as a star-shaped polygon, with at least one interior angle exceeding 180 degrees, the capacitance of the capacitive element 30 can be increased. Other shapes include a polygon with rounded corners, or a closed curve that combines straight lines and curves.
また、図1Aに示すように、導電層51の水平方向の断面形状は円環形状とみなすこともできる。ただし、導電層51の水平方向の断面形状は円環形状に限られず、環状であればよい。例えば、環状の、楕円形、正多角形、正多角形以外の多角形、凹多角形、角の丸い多角形などにすることができる。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1A, the horizontal cross-sectional shape of the conductive layer 51 can also be considered to be annular. However, the horizontal cross-sectional shape of the conductive layer 51 is not limited to annular, and can be any shape as long as it is annular. For example, it can be an annular, elliptical, regular polygonal, polygonal other than a regular polygonal, concave polygonal, polygonal with rounded corners, etc.
図3A等で例示した容量素子30は、いわゆるシリンダー型、またはトレンチ型の容量素子である。容量素子30の構成はこれに限られず、例えばピラー型の容量素子を適用してもよい。図5には、ピラー型の容量素子30aを適用した場合の例を示している。 The capacitive element 30 illustrated in Figure 3A and elsewhere is a so-called cylinder-type or trench-type capacitive element. The configuration of the capacitive element 30 is not limited to this, and a pillar-type capacitive element, for example, may also be used. Figure 5 shows an example in which a pillar-type capacitive element 30a is used.
図5において、導電層25上に柱状の導電層51が設けられ、導電層51の上面および側面を覆って絶縁層52が設けられている。さらに絶縁層52を介して導電層51の上面および側面を覆うように、導電層53が設けられている。導電層51の平面視における輪郭形状は、代表的には円形とすることができるが、上述した様々な形状とすることができる。 In Figure 5, a columnar conductive layer 51 is provided on conductive layer 25, and an insulating layer 52 is provided covering the top and side surfaces of conductive layer 51. A conductive layer 53 is further provided to cover the top and side surfaces of conductive layer 51 via insulating layer 52. The outline shape of conductive layer 51 in a plan view is typically circular, but can also be any of the various shapes described above.
ここで、半導体装置10は、メモリセル15が設けられる層と積層して、機能回路が設けられる層を積層して設けることが好ましい。機能回路は、例えばメモリセル15を駆動するための駆動回路のほか、演算回路、電源回路などを設けることができる。駆動回路としては、例えば行デコーダ、列デコーダ、行ドライバ、列ドライバ、入力回路、出力回路、センスアンプなどのうち一以上を含む。これにより、半導体装置10を含む半導体チップのフットプリントを縮小することができるほか、機能回路とメモリセル15とを並べて配置した場合に比べて、配線長を短くすることができるため、高速な動作と低い消費電力を実現することができる。 Here, it is preferable that the semiconductor device 10 be provided with a layer in which the memory cells 15 are provided, stacked on top of a layer in which the functional circuits are provided. The functional circuits may include, for example, a drive circuit for driving the memory cells 15, as well as an arithmetic circuit and a power supply circuit. The drive circuit may include, for example, one or more of a row decoder, column decoder, row driver, column driver, input circuit, output circuit, sense amplifier, etc. This not only reduces the footprint of the semiconductor chip including the semiconductor device 10, but also shortens the wiring length compared to when the functional circuits and memory cells 15 are arranged side by side, thereby achieving high-speed operation and low power consumption.
図6には、絶縁層11よりも下方に、機能回路を構成するトランジスタ90を配置した場合の例を示している。ここでは、トランジスタ90のソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方が、ビット線として機能する導電層24と接続される例を示している。 Figure 6 shows an example in which a transistor 90 that constitutes a functional circuit is placed below the insulating layer 11. In this example, one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the transistor 90 is connected to a conductive layer 24 that functions as a bit line.
トランジスタ90は、単結晶半導体基板である基板91の一部にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタである。基板91は、代表的には単結晶シリコンを用いることができる。また、基板91としては、ゲルマニウムなどの単体元素よりなる半導体、または炭化シリコン、シリコンゲルマニウム、ヒ化ガリウム、リン化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化ガリウム、窒化ガリウムからなる化合物半導体などを用いることができる。または、基板91に前述の半導体基板内部に絶縁体領域を有する半導体基板、例えば、SOI(Silicon On Insulator)基板を用いてもよい。 Transistor 90 is a transistor in which a channel is formed in a portion of substrate 91, which is a single-crystal semiconductor substrate. Substrate 91 is typically made of single-crystal silicon. Substrate 91 can also be made of a semiconductor made of a single element such as germanium, or a compound semiconductor made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide, gallium oxide, or gallium nitride. Alternatively, substrate 91 can be a semiconductor substrate having an insulator region within the aforementioned semiconductor substrate, such as an SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrate.
トランジスタ90は、基板91に設けられ、ゲートとして機能する導電層94と、ゲート絶縁層として機能する絶縁層93と、基板91の一部からなる半導体領域92と、ソース領域またはドレイン領域として機能する低抵抗領域95a及び低抵抗領域95bと、を有する。トランジスタ90は、pチャネル型またはnチャネル型のいずれでもよい。基板91には、隣接する2つのトランジスタ90の間に、素子分離層98が設けられている。 Transistor 90 is provided on substrate 91 and has a conductive layer 94 that functions as a gate, an insulating layer 93 that functions as a gate insulating layer, a semiconductor region 92 that is part of substrate 91, and low-resistance regions 95a and 95b that function as source and drain regions. Transistor 90 may be either a p-channel or n-channel type. An element isolation layer 98 is provided on substrate 91 between two adjacent transistors 90.
トランジスタ90は、チャネルが形成される半導体領域92が凸形状(フィン形状)を有する。また、図6には示されていないが、X方向において、半導体領域92の側面及び上面を、絶縁層93を介して導電層94が覆うように設けられている。このようなトランジスタ90は、FIN型トランジスタとも呼ばれる。 In the transistor 90, the semiconductor region 92 in which the channel is formed has a convex shape (fin shape). Also, although not shown in FIG. 6, in the X direction, the side and top surfaces of the semiconductor region 92 are covered with a conductive layer 94 via an insulating layer 93. Such a transistor 90 is also called a FIN-type transistor.
トランジスタ90を覆って絶縁層85が設けられ、絶縁層85上に絶縁層86が設けられ、絶縁層86上に絶縁層87が設けられる。また絶縁層87に埋め込まれるように導電層81が設けられる。また導電層81及び絶縁層87を覆って絶縁層11が設けられている。絶縁層85及び絶縁層86に設けられた開口の内部にプラグ82が設けられ、当該プラグ82により導電層81と低抵抗領域95bとが接続されている。また絶縁層41及び絶縁層11に設けられた開口の内部にプラグ83が設けられ、当該プラグ83により導電層24(具体的には導電膜24a)と、導電層81とが接続されている。 An insulating layer 85 is provided covering the transistor 90, an insulating layer 86 is provided on the insulating layer 85, and an insulating layer 87 is provided on the insulating layer 86. A conductive layer 81 is provided so as to be embedded in the insulating layer 87. An insulating layer 11 is provided covering the conductive layer 81 and the insulating layer 87. A plug 82 is provided inside an opening provided in the insulating layer 85 and the insulating layer 86, and the plug 82 connects the conductive layer 81 to the low-resistance region 95b. A plug 83 is provided inside an opening provided in the insulating layer 41 and the insulating layer 11, and the plug 83 connects the conductive layer 24 (specifically, the conductive film 24a) to the conductive layer 81.
なお、ここでは配線層として、導電層81を設ける例を示したが、トランジスタ90が設けられる層とメモリセル15が設けられる層との間には、層間絶縁層と配線層とが交互に積層された構成(多層配線層ともいう)を有する構成とすることができる。 Note that although an example in which a conductive layer 81 is provided as a wiring layer has been shown here, a structure in which interlayer insulating layers and wiring layers are alternately stacked (also called a multilayer wiring layer) can also be used between the layer in which the transistor 90 is provided and the layer in which the memory cell 15 is provided.
以上が、半導体装置の構成例についての説明である。 The above is an explanation of an example configuration of a semiconductor device.
[構成要素について]
〈基板〉
トランジスタを形成する基板としては、例えば、絶縁体基板、半導体基板、または導電体基板を用いればよい。絶縁体基板としては、例えば、ガラス基板、石英基板、サファイア基板、安定化ジルコニア基板(イットリア安定化ジルコニア基板など)、樹脂基板などがある。また、半導体基板としては、例えば、シリコン、ゲルマニウムを材料とした半導体基板、または炭化シリコン、シリコンゲルマニウム、ヒ化ガリウム、リン化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化ガリウム、窒化ガリウムからなる化合物半導体基板などがある。さらには、前述の半導体基板内部に絶縁体領域を有する半導体基板、例えば、SOI(Silicon On Insulator)基板などがある。導電体基板としては、黒鉛基板、金属基板、合金基板、導電性樹脂基板などがある。または、金属の窒化物を有する基板、金属の酸化物を有する基板などを用いることもできる。さらには、絶縁体基板に導電層または半導体層が設けられた基板、半導体基板に導電層または絶縁層が設けられた基板、導電体基板に半導体層または絶縁層が設けられた基板などがある。または、これらの基板に素子が設けられたものを用いてもよい。基板に設けられる素子としては、容量素子、抵抗素子、スイッチ素子(トランジスタを含む)、発光素子、記憶素子などがある。
[About the components]
<substrate>
Substrates on which transistors are formed may be, for example, insulating substrates, semiconductor substrates, or conductive substrates. Examples of insulating substrates include glass substrates, quartz substrates, sapphire substrates, stabilized zirconia substrates (e.g., yttria-stabilized zirconia substrates), and resin substrates. Examples of semiconductor substrates include semiconductor substrates made of silicon or germanium, or compound semiconductor substrates made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide, gallium oxide, and gallium nitride. Examples of semiconductor substrates having an insulating region within the aforementioned semiconductor substrate include silicon-on-insulator (SOI) substrates. Examples of conductive substrates include graphite substrates, metal substrates, alloy substrates, and conductive resin substrates. Substrates containing metal nitrides and substrates containing metal oxides can also be used. Examples of substrates include an insulating substrate having a conductive layer or semiconductor layer provided thereon, a semiconductor substrate having a conductive layer or insulating layer provided thereon, and a conductive substrate having a semiconductor layer or insulating layer provided thereon. Alternatively, a substrate provided with elements may be used, such as a capacitor, a resistor, a switch (including a transistor), a light-emitting element, a memory element, or the like.
〈半導体層〉
半導体層21は、金属酸化物(酸化物半導体)を有することが好ましい。
Semiconductor layer
The semiconductor layer 21 preferably contains a metal oxide (oxide semiconductor).
半導体層21に用いることができる金属酸化物として、例えば、In酸化物、Ga酸化物、及びZn酸化物が挙げられる。金属酸化物は、少なくともInまたはZnを含むことが好ましい。また、金属酸化物は、Inと、元素Mと、Znと、の中から選ばれる二または三を有することが好ましい。なお、元素Mは、酸素との結合エネルギーが高い金属元素又は半金属元素であり、例えば、酸素との結合エネルギーがインジウムよりも高い金属元素又は半金属元素である。元素Mとして、具体的には、Al、Ga、Sn、Y、Ti、V、Cr、Mn、Fe、Co、Ni、Zr、Mo、Hf、Ta、W、La、Ce、Nd、Mg、Ca、Sr、Ba、B、Si、Ge、及びSbなどが挙げられる。金属酸化物が有する元素Mは、上記元素のいずれか一種または複数種であることが好ましく、特に、Al、Ga、Y、及びSnから選ばれた一種または複数種であることが好ましく、Gaがより好ましい。なお、Inと、Mと、Znと、を有する金属酸化物を、以降ではIn−M−Zn酸化物と呼ぶ場合がある。なお、本明細書等において、金属元素と半金属元素をまとめて「金属元素」と呼ぶことがあり、本明細書等に記載の「金属元素」には半金属元素が含まれることがある。 Examples of metal oxides that can be used for the semiconductor layer 21 include In oxide, Ga oxide, and Zn oxide. The metal oxide preferably contains at least In or Zn. The metal oxide preferably contains two or three elements selected from In, element M, and Zn. Element M is a metal or semimetal element with a high bond energy with oxygen, such as a metal or semimetal element with a higher bond energy with oxygen than indium. Specific examples of element M include Al, Ga, Sn, Y, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Zr, Mo, Hf, Ta, W, La, Ce, Nd, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, B, Si, Ge, and Sb. The element M contained in the metal oxide is preferably one or more of the above elements, and is preferably one or more selected from Al, Ga, Y, and Sn, with Ga being more preferred. Hereinafter, a metal oxide having In, M, and Zn may be referred to as an In-M-Zn oxide. In this specification, metal elements and metalloid elements may be collectively referred to as "metal elements," and the term "metal elements" used in this specification may include metalloid elements.
金属酸化物がIn−M−Zn酸化物の場合、当該In−M−Zn酸化物におけるInの原子数比はMの原子数比以上であることが好ましい。例えば、このようなIn−M−Zn酸化物の金属元素の原子数比として、In:M:Zn=1:1:1、In:M:Zn=1:1:1.2、In:M:Zn=2:1:3、In:M:Zn=3:1:2、In:M:Zn=4:2:3、In:M:Zn=4:2:4.1、In:M:Zn=5:1:3、In:M:Zn=5:1:6、In:M:Zn=5:1:7、In:M:Zn=5:1:8、In:M:Zn=6:1:6、In:M:Zn=5:2:5、またはこれらの近傍の組成等が挙げられる。なお、近傍の組成とは、所望の原子数比の±30%の範囲を含む。金属酸化物中のインジウムの原子数比を大きくすることで、トランジスタのオン電流、または電界効果移動度などを高めることができる。 When the metal oxide is an In-M-Zn oxide, it is preferable that the atomic ratio of In in the In-M-Zn oxide be equal to or greater than the atomic ratio of M. For example, the atomic ratios of the metal elements in such an In-M-Zn oxide may be In:M:Zn = 1:1:1, In:M:Zn = 1:1:1.2, In:M:Zn = 2:1:3, In:M:Zn = 3:1:2, In:M:Zn = 4:2:3, In:M:Zn = 4:2:4.1, In:M:Zn = 5:1:3, In:M:Zn = 5:1:6, In:M:Zn = 5:1:7, In:M:Zn = 5:1:8, In:M:Zn = 6:1:6, In:M:Zn = 5:2:5, or compositions close to these. Note that a composition close to these may include a range of ±30% of the desired atomic ratio. Increasing the atomic ratio of indium in the metal oxide can increase the on-state current or field-effect mobility of the transistor.
また、In−M−Zn酸化物におけるInの原子数比はMの原子数比未満であってもよい。例えば、このようなIn−M−Zn酸化物の金属元素の原子数比として、In:M:Zn=1:3:2、In:M:Zn=1:3:3、In:M:Zn=1:3:4、またはこれらの近傍の組成等が挙げられる。金属酸化物中のMの原子数比を大きくすることで、酸素欠損の生成を抑制することができる。 Furthermore, the atomic ratio of In in In-M-Zn oxide may be less than the atomic ratio of M. For example, the atomic ratio of the metal elements in such In-M-Zn oxide may be In:M:Zn = 1:3:2, In:M:Zn = 1:3:3, In:M:Zn = 1:3:4, or compositions close to these. By increasing the atomic ratio of M in the metal oxide, the generation of oxygen vacancies can be suppressed.
半導体層21は、例えば、In酸化物、In−Zn酸化物、In−Ga酸化物、In−Sn酸化物、In−Ti酸化物、In−Ga−Al酸化物、In−Ga−Sn酸化物、In−Ga−Zn酸化物、In−Sn−Zn酸化物、In−Al−Zn酸化物、In−Ti−Zn酸化物、In−Ga−Sn−Zn酸化物、In−Ga−Al−Zn酸化物などを用いることができる。また、Ga−Zn酸化物を用いてもよい。酸化インジウムのようにZnを有さない材料とすることで、LSIの製造プロセスとの親和性が高まるため好ましい。一方で、Znを含む材料とすることで、結晶性を高くしやすいため好ましい。 The semiconductor layer 21 can be made of, for example, In oxide, In-Zn oxide, In-Ga oxide, In-Sn oxide, In-Ti oxide, In-Ga-Al oxide, In-Ga-Sn oxide, In-Ga-Zn oxide, In-Sn-Zn oxide, In-Al-Zn oxide, In-Ti-Zn oxide, In-Ga-Sn-Zn oxide, or In-Ga-Al-Zn oxide. Ga-Zn oxide may also be used. A material that does not contain Zn, such as indium oxide, is preferred because it increases compatibility with LSI manufacturing processes. On the other hand, a material that contains Zn is preferred because it facilitates high crystallinity.
なお、金属酸化物は、インジウムに代えて、又は、インジウムに加えて、周期表における周期番号が大きい金属元素の一種または複数種を有してもよい。金属元素の軌道の重なりが大きいほど、金属酸化物におけるキャリア伝導は大きくなる傾向がある。よって、周期番号が大きい金属元素を含むことで、トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高めることができる場合がある。周期番号が大きい金属元素として、第5周期に属する金属元素、及び第6周期に属する金属元素などが挙げられる。当該金属元素として、具体的には、Y、Zr、Ag、Cd、Sn、Sb、Ba、Pb、Bi、La、Ce、Pr、Nd、Pm、Sm、及びEuなどが挙げられる。なお、La、Ce、Pr、Nd、Pm、Sm、及びEuは、軽希土類元素と呼ばれる。 Note that, instead of or in addition to indium, the metal oxide may contain one or more metal elements with higher period numbers in the periodic table. The greater the overlap of the orbitals of the metal elements, the greater the carrier conduction in the metal oxide tends to be. Therefore, including a metal element with a higher period number may improve the field-effect mobility of a transistor. Examples of metal elements with higher period numbers include metal elements belonging to the fifth period and the sixth period. Specific examples of such metal elements include Y, Zr, Ag, Cd, Sn, Sb, Ba, Pb, Bi, La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, and Eu. Note that La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, and Eu are called light rare earth elements.
また、金属酸化物は、非金属元素の一種または複数種を有してもよい。金属酸化物が非金属元素を有することで、トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高めることができる場合がある。非金属元素として、例えば、炭素、窒素、リン、硫黄、セレン、フッ素、塩素、臭素、及び水素などが挙げられる。 Furthermore, the metal oxide may contain one or more non-metallic elements. The presence of non-metallic elements in the metal oxide may increase the field-effect mobility of the transistor. Examples of non-metallic elements include carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and hydrogen.
金属酸化物の形成は、スパッタリング法、または原子層堆積(ALD)法を好適に用いることができる。特に、金属酸化物は、被覆性に優れたALD法で成膜することが好ましい。なお、金属酸化物をスパッタリング法で形成する場合、成膜後の金属酸化物の組成はターゲットの組成と異なる場合がある。特に亜鉛は、成膜後の金属酸化物における含有率が、ターゲットと比較して50%程度にまで減少する場合がある。 Metal oxides can be formed preferably using sputtering or atomic layer deposition (ALD). It is particularly preferable to form metal oxide films using the ALD method, which has excellent coating properties. When forming metal oxides using the sputtering method, the composition of the metal oxide film after formation may differ from the composition of the target. In particular, the zinc content in the metal oxide film after formation may be reduced to around 50% of that of the target.
本明細書等において、金属酸化物のある金属元素の含有率とは、金属酸化物に含まれる金属元素の原子数の総数に対する、その元素の原子数の割合をいう。例えば金属酸化物が金属元素X、金属元素Y、金属元素Zを含み、当該金属酸化物に含まれる金属元素X、金属元素Y、金属元素Zのそれぞれの原子数をAX、AY、AZとしたとき、金属元素Xの含有率は、AX/(AX+AY+AZ)で示すことができる。また、金属酸化物中の金属元素X、金属元素Y、金属元素Zのそれぞれの原子数の比(原子数比)が、BX:BY:BZで示されるとき、金属元素Xの含有率は、BX/(BX+BY+BZ)で示すことができる。 In this specification, the content of a certain metal element in a metal oxide refers to the ratio of the number of atoms of that element to the total number of atoms of the metal element contained in the metal oxide. For example, when a metal oxide contains metal element X, metal element Y, and metal element Z, and the numbers of atoms of metal element X, metal element Y, and metal element Z contained in the metal oxide are Ax , Ay , and Az , respectively, the content of metal element X can be expressed as Ax /( Ax + Ay + Az ). Furthermore, when the ratio of the numbers of atoms of metal element X, metal element Y, and metal element Z in the metal oxide (atomic number ratio) is expressed as Bx :By : Bz , the content of metal element X can be expressed as Bx /( Bx + By + Bz ).
例えば、Inを含む金属酸化物の場合、Inの含有率を高くすることにより、オン電流の大きいトランジスタを実現することができる。 For example, in the case of metal oxides containing In, increasing the In content can produce transistors with large on-state currents.
半導体層21にGaを含まない、またはGaの含有率の低い金属酸化物を用いることにより、正バイアス印加に対する信頼性が高いトランジスタとすることができる。つまり、PBTS(Positive Bias Temperature Stress)試験でのしきい値電圧の変動量が小さいトランジスタとすることができる。また、Gaを含む金属酸化物を用いる場合は、Inの含有率よりも、Gaの含有率を低くすることが好ましい。これにより、高移動度で且つ信頼性の高いトランジスタを実現することができる。 By using a metal oxide that does not contain Ga or has a low Ga content in the semiconductor layer 21, it is possible to create a transistor that is highly reliable when a positive bias is applied. In other words, it is possible to create a transistor with a small amount of threshold voltage variation in a PBTS (Positive Bias Temperature Stress) test. Furthermore, when using a metal oxide that contains Ga, it is preferable to make the Ga content lower than the In content. This makes it possible to realize a transistor that is both highly reliable and highly mobile.
一方、Gaの含有率を高くすることにより、光に対する信頼性の高いトランジスタとすることができる。つまり、NBTIS(Negative Bias Temperature Illumination Stress)試験でのしきい値電圧の変動量が小さいトランジスタとすることができる。具体的には、Gaの原子数比がInの原子数比以上である金属酸化物はバンドギャップがより大きくなり、トランジスタのNBTIS試験でのしきい値電圧の変動量を小さくすることができる。 On the other hand, by increasing the Ga content, it is possible to create a transistor with high reliability against light. In other words, it is possible to create a transistor with small threshold voltage fluctuations in NBTIS (Negative Bias Temperature Illumination Stress) testing. Specifically, metal oxides in which the atomic ratio of Ga is equal to or greater than the atomic ratio of In have a larger band gap, which makes it possible to reduce the threshold voltage fluctuations in NBTIS testing of transistors.
また、亜鉛の含有率を高くすることにより、結晶性の高い金属酸化物となり、金属酸化物中の不純物の拡散を抑制できる。したがって、トランジスタの電気特性の変動が抑制され、信頼性を高めることができる。 Furthermore, by increasing the zinc content, the metal oxide becomes highly crystalline, which can suppress the diffusion of impurities in the metal oxide. This therefore suppresses fluctuations in the transistor's electrical characteristics and improves reliability.
半導体層21は、2以上の金属酸化物層を有する積層構造としてもよい。半導体層21が有する2以上の金属酸化物層は、組成が互いに同じ、または概略同じであってもよい。組成が同じ金属酸化物層の積層構造とすることで、例えば、同じスパッタリングターゲットを用いて形成できるため、製造コストを削減できる。なお、異なる組成の酸化物半導体層を2以上積層した積層構造としてもよい。また、ALD法を用いることで、組成が厚さ方向に連続的に異なる金属酸化物層を形成することもできる。これにより、決まった組成の膜を用いる場合と比較して設計の選択の幅が広がるだけでなく、組成の異なる2層の間に生じる界面準位などの生成を防ぐことができるため、電気特性及び信頼性を高めることができる。また、スパッタリング法とALD法の双方を用いて積層構造を有する金属酸化物層を形成してもよい。 The semiconductor layer 21 may have a stacked structure having two or more metal oxide layers. The two or more metal oxide layers of the semiconductor layer 21 may have the same or substantially the same composition. By using a stacked structure of metal oxide layers with the same composition, for example, the same sputtering target can be used to form the layers, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. A stacked structure may also be used in which two or more oxide semiconductor layers with different compositions are stacked. Furthermore, by using the ALD method, it is possible to form metal oxide layers whose compositions vary continuously in the thickness direction. This not only broadens the range of design options compared to using films with fixed compositions, but also prevents the generation of interface states between two layers with different compositions, thereby improving electrical properties and reliability. Furthermore, a metal oxide layer with a stacked structure may be formed using both the sputtering method and the ALD method.
半導体層21を2層構造とする場合、二層目、すなわちゲート電極に近い側に一層目よりも高移動度の材料(導電性の高い材料)を用いることが好ましい。これによりノーマリオフであり、且つオン電流の大きいトランジスタとすることができる。そのため低い消費電力と高い性能を両立することができる。または、一層目、すなわちソース電極及びドレイン電極と接する側に、二層目よりも高移動度の材料を用いてもよい。これにより半導体層21とソース電極またはドレイン電極との接触抵抗を小さくできるため、寄生抵抗が低減され、オン電流の大きいトランジスタとすることができる。 When the semiconductor layer 21 has a two-layer structure, it is preferable to use a material with higher mobility (higher conductivity) for the second layer, i.e., the side closer to the gate electrode, than for the first layer. This allows for a normally-off transistor with a large on-current. This makes it possible to achieve both low power consumption and high performance. Alternatively, a material with higher mobility than the second layer may be used for the first layer, i.e., the side in contact with the source electrode and drain electrode. This reduces the contact resistance between the semiconductor layer 21 and the source electrode or drain electrode, thereby reducing parasitic resistance and enabling a transistor with a large on-current.
また、半導体層21を3層構造とする場合、二層目に一層目及び三層目よりも高移動度の材料を用いることが好ましい。これにより、オン電流が高く、且つ信頼性の高いトランジスタを実現できる。 Furthermore, when the semiconductor layer 21 has a three-layer structure, it is preferable to use a material for the second layer that has a higher mobility than the first and third layers. This makes it possible to realize a transistor with a high on-state current and high reliability.
上述した移動度の高さ、導電性の高さの違いは、例えばインジウムの含有率の高さに置き換えることができる。そのほか、インジウムの他に導電性の向上に寄与する元素を含むか否か、またはその元素の含有量なども移動度および導電性に影響する。高移動度の材料の一例としては、例えばIn:Ga:Zn=4:3:2[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Zn=1:1[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Zn=2:1[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Zn=4:1[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Sn:Zn=40:X:10[原子数比](Xは0.1以上5以下、代表的にはX=1)及びその近傍の材料などが挙げられる。一方、上述した材料と比較して移動度または導電性の低い材料としては、In:Ga:Zn=1:3:2[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Ga:Zn=1:3:4[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Ga:Zn=2:2:1[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料、In:Ga:Zn=1:1:2[原子数比]及びその近傍の材料などが挙げられる。 The differences in high mobility and high conductivity mentioned above can be expressed, for example, by the high indium content. Furthermore, whether or not an element other than indium that contributes to improved conductivity is included, as well as the content of that element, also affects mobility and conductivity. Examples of high-mobility materials include In:Ga:Zn = 4:3:2 [atomic ratio] and materials in the vicinity, In:Zn = 1:1 [atomic ratio] and materials in the vicinity, In:Zn = 2:1 [atomic ratio] and materials in the vicinity, In:Zn = 4:1 [atomic ratio] and materials in the vicinity, In:Sn:Zn = 40:X:10 [atomic ratio] (X is 0.1 or greater and 5 or less, typically X = 1) and materials in the vicinity. On the other hand, materials with lower mobility or conductivity than the above-mentioned materials include materials with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:3:2 and similar materials, materials with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:3:4 and similar materials, materials with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 2:2:1 and similar materials, materials with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:1:1 and similar materials, and materials with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn = 1:1:2 and similar materials.
半導体層21は、結晶性を有する金属酸化物層を用いることが好ましい。例えば、CAAC(c−axis aligned crystal)構造、多結晶構造、微結晶(nc:nano−crystal)構造等を有する金属酸化物層を用いることができる。結晶性を有する金属酸化物層を半導体層21に用いることにより、半導体層21中の欠陥準位密度を低減でき、信頼性の高い半導体装置を実現できる。 It is preferable to use a crystalline metal oxide layer for the semiconductor layer 21. For example, a metal oxide layer having a CAAC (c-axis aligned crystal) structure, a polycrystalline structure, or a nanocrystalline (nc) structure can be used. By using a crystalline metal oxide layer for the semiconductor layer 21, the defect level density in the semiconductor layer 21 can be reduced, resulting in a highly reliable semiconductor device.
半導体層21に用いる金属酸化物層の結晶性が高いほど、半導体層21中の欠陥準位密度を低減できる。一方、結晶性の低い金属酸化物層を用いることで、大きな電流を流すことができるトランジスタを実現することができる。 The higher the crystallinity of the metal oxide layer used in the semiconductor layer 21, the more the defect level density in the semiconductor layer 21 can be reduced. On the other hand, by using a metal oxide layer with low crystallinity, it is possible to realize a transistor that can pass a large current.
半導体層21の領域21aは、上記のような構成を有することが好ましい。一方で、半導体層21の領域21bは、上述の金属酸化物に、金属元素(アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方)を添加した金属酸化物になる。In−Ga−Zn酸化物などの金属酸化物に、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方を添加して絶縁性を向上させることで、領域21bを素子分離領域として機能させることができる。領域21bの抵抗率は、領域21aの抵抗率の10倍以上であることが好ましい。 Region 21a of semiconductor layer 21 preferably has the above-described configuration. Meanwhile, region 21b of semiconductor layer 21 is a metal oxide obtained by adding a metal element (either aluminum or hafnium, or both) to the above-described metal oxide. By adding either aluminum or hafnium, or both, to a metal oxide such as In-Ga-Zn oxide, the insulating properties can be improved, allowing region 21b to function as an element isolation region. The resistivity of region 21b is preferably at least 10 times that of region 21a.
領域21bは、領域21aより、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方の濃度が高い。領域21b及び領域21aの金属酸化物の組成の分析には、二次イオン質量分析法(SIMS:Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry)、エネルギー分散型X線分光法(EDX:Energy Dispersive X−ray Spectroscopy)、X線光電子分光法(XPS:X−ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy)、オージェ電子分光法(AES:Auger Electron Spectroscopy)、誘導結合プラズマ質量分析法(ICP−MS:Inductively Coupled Plasma−Mass Spectrometry)、または誘導結合高周波プラズマ発光分光法(ICP−AES:Inductively Coupled Plasma−Atomic Emission Spectrometry)などを用いることができる。または、これらの手法を複数組み合わせて分析を行なってもよい。 Region 21b has a higher concentration of either aluminum or hafnium, or both, than region 21a. The composition of the metal oxides in regions 21b and 21a was analyzed using secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS), energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDX), X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS), and Auger electron spectroscopy (AES). Methods that can be used include Auger Electron Spectroscopy, Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometry (ICP-MS), and Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometry (ICP-AES). Alternatively, a combination of these methods may be used for analysis.
領域21bに添加されたアルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方は、酸素と結合し、領域21bの中で、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ハフニウム、またはハフニウムアルミネートとして存在する場合がある。なお、上記において、領域21bに添加する元素として、アルミニウム及びハフニウムを記載したが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。領域21bに添加する元素は、少なくとも領域21bの抵抗率を高くする元素であればよい。例えば、領域21bにシリコン、またはガリウムを添加する構成にすることもできる。この場合、領域21bは、領域21aより、シリコンまたはガリウムの濃度が高くなる。 Either or both of the aluminum and hafnium added to region 21b may combine with oxygen and exist in region 21b as aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, or hafnium aluminate. While aluminum and hafnium are described above as elements to be added to region 21b, the present invention is not limited to this. The element to be added to region 21b may be any element that at least increases the resistivity of region 21b. For example, silicon or gallium may be added to region 21b. In this case, the concentration of silicon or gallium in region 21b will be higher than in region 21a.
領域21bは、上記金属元素の添加によって結晶性が低下する場合がある。この場合、領域21bの結晶性が、領域21aより低くなる。例えば、領域21aがCAAC構造を有しているのに対して、領域21bがアモルファス構造を有する場合がある。領域21b及び領域21aの金属酸化物の結晶性は、例えば、X線回折(XRD:X−Ray Diffraction)、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM:Transmission Electron Microscopy)、または電子回折(ED:Electron Diffraction)により解析できる。 The crystallinity of region 21b may decrease due to the addition of the above-mentioned metal elements. In this case, the crystallinity of region 21b may be lower than that of region 21a. For example, region 21a may have a CAAC structure, while region 21b may have an amorphous structure. The crystallinity of the metal oxides in regions 21b and 21a can be analyzed using, for example, X-ray diffraction (XRD), transmission electron microscopy (TEM), or electron diffraction (ED).
領域21bは、結晶性が低く、領域21aより酸素欠損を多く含むため、領域21aに含まれる水素及び過剰酸素を、捕獲または固着する(ゲッタリングするということもできる)機能を有する。例えば、加熱処理を行うことで、領域21aに含まれる水素及び過剰酸素を、領域21bに捕獲または固着することができる。この場合、SIMSで酸素または水素のプロファイルを測定すると、領域21bにおいて、領域21aより酸素または水素の濃度が高くなる。なお、本明細書等で過剰酸素とは、化学量論的組成を満たす量よりも多い酸素を指す。 Region 21b has low crystallinity and contains more oxygen vacancies than region 21a, and therefore has the function of capturing or fixing (this can also be called gettering) the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21a. For example, by performing a heat treatment, the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21a can be captured or fixed in region 21b. In this case, when the oxygen or hydrogen profile is measured using SIMS, the oxygen or hydrogen concentration is higher in region 21b than in region 21a. Note that in this specification, excess oxygen refers to oxygen in an amount greater than that which satisfies the stoichiometric composition.
領域21bで領域21aに含まれる水素をゲッタリングすることで、チャネル形成領域として機能する領域21aの水素濃度を低減することができるため、トランジスタ20の初期特性のマイナスシフトを抑制し、ノーマリオフ特性にすることができる。また、+GBTストレス試験における、マイナスドリフト劣化を抑制することができる。 By gettering hydrogen contained in region 21a in region 21b, the hydrogen concentration in region 21a, which functions as a channel formation region, can be reduced, thereby suppressing a negative shift in the initial characteristics of transistor 20 and achieving normally-off characteristics. Furthermore, negative drift degradation during +GBT stress testing can be suppressed.
また、領域21bで領域21aに含まれる過剰酸素をゲッタリングすることで、チャネル形成領域として機能する領域21aの過剰酸素を低減し、過剰酸素に起因する電子トラップの形成を抑制することができる。これにより、当該電子トラップに起因するトランジスタ20の初期特性の過剰なプラスシフトを抑制することができる。また、+GBTストレス試験における、過剰なプラスドリフト劣化を抑制することができる。以上のように、領域21aに含まれる水素及び過剰酸素を、領域21bにゲッタリングすることで、トランジスタ20の電気特性及び信頼性の向上を図ることができる。 Furthermore, by gettering the excess oxygen contained in region 21a in region 21b, the excess oxygen in region 21a, which functions as a channel formation region, can be reduced, and the formation of electron traps caused by the excess oxygen can be suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress an excessive positive shift in the initial characteristics of transistor 20 caused by the electron traps. It also makes it possible to suppress excessive positive drift degradation in a +GBT stress test. As described above, by gettering the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21a to region 21b, the electrical characteristics and reliability of transistor 20 can be improved.
酸化物半導体を用いたトランジスタ(以下、OSトランジスタと記す)は、非晶質シリコンを用いたトランジスタと比較して電界効果移動度が極めて高い。また、OSトランジスタは、オフ状態におけるソース−ドレイン間のリーク電流(以下、オフ電流ともいう)が著しく小さく、当該トランジスタと直列に接続された容量に蓄積した電荷を長期間に亘って保持することが可能である。また、OSトランジスタを適用することで、半導体装置の消費電力を低減することができる。 Transistors using an oxide semiconductor (hereinafter referred to as OS transistors) have extremely high field-effect mobility compared to transistors using amorphous silicon. Furthermore, OS transistors have extremely low source-drain leakage current in an off state (hereinafter also referred to as off-state current), and can retain charge accumulated in a capacitor connected in series with the transistor for a long period of time. Furthermore, the use of OS transistors can reduce the power consumption of semiconductor devices.
本発明の一態様である半導体装置は、例えばプロセッサ、記憶装置、または各種ICに適用することができる。本発明の一態様のトランジスタは、大きな電流を流すことが可能で、且つ、オフ電流が著しく低いという特性を有するため、回路の高速動作と、低消費電力化を同時に実現することが可能となる。 A semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to, for example, a processor, a memory device, or various ICs. A transistor according to one embodiment of the present invention is capable of passing a large current and has an extremely low off-state current, thereby enabling high-speed circuit operation and low power consumption at the same time.
本発明の一態様である半導体装置は、例えば、表示装置にも適用することができる。表示装置の画素回路に含まれる発光デバイスの発光輝度を高くする場合、発光デバイスに流す電流量を大きくする必要がある。そのためには、画素回路に含まれている駆動トランジスタのソース−ドレイン間電圧を高くする必要がある。OSトランジスタは、シリコンを用いたトランジスタ(以下、Siトランジスタと記す)と比較して、ソース−ドレイン間において耐圧が高いため、OSトランジスタのソース−ドレイン間には高い電圧を印加することができる。したがって、画素回路に含まれる駆動トランジスタをOSトランジスタとすることで、発光デバイスに流れる電流量を大きくし、発光デバイスの発光輝度を高くすることができる。 A semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can also be applied to a display device, for example. To increase the light-emitting luminance of a light-emitting device included in a pixel circuit of a display device, it is necessary to increase the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device. To achieve this, it is necessary to increase the source-drain voltage of a driving transistor included in the pixel circuit. Because an OS transistor has a higher source-drain breakdown voltage than a transistor using silicon (hereinafter referred to as a Si transistor), a high voltage can be applied between the source and drain of the OS transistor. Therefore, by using an OS transistor as the driving transistor included in the pixel circuit, it is possible to increase the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device and increase the light-emitting luminance of the light-emitting device.
トランジスタが飽和領域で動作する場合において、OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタよりも、ゲート−ソース間電圧の変化に対して、ソース−ドレイン間電流の変化を小さくすることができる。このため、画素回路に含まれる駆動トランジスタにOSトランジスタを適用することで、発光デバイスに流れる電流量を細かく制御することができる。このため、画素回路における階調数を多くすることができる。また、発光デバイスの電気特性(例えば抵抗)の変動、または電気特性のばらつきが生じたとしても、安定した電流を流すことができる。 When the transistor operates in the saturation region, an OS transistor can reduce the change in source-drain current in response to a change in gate-source voltage compared to a Si transistor. Therefore, by using an OS transistor as the driving transistor included in a pixel circuit, the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device can be precisely controlled. This allows for a greater number of gray levels in the pixel circuit. Furthermore, a stable current can be supplied even if the electrical characteristics (e.g., resistance) of the light-emitting device fluctuate or vary.
上記のとおり、画素回路に含まれる駆動トランジスタにOSトランジスタを用いることで、「黒浮きの抑制」、「発光輝度の上昇」、「多階調化」、「発光デバイスの製造ばらつきの影響の抑制」などを図ることができる。 As mentioned above, by using an OS transistor for the drive transistor included in the pixel circuit, it is possible to achieve things like "suppression of black floating," "increase in light emission brightness," "multiple gray levels," and "suppression of the effects of manufacturing variations in light-emitting devices."
OSトランジスタは、放射線照射による電気特性の変動が小さい、つまり放射線に対する耐性が高いため、放射線が入射しうる環境においても好適に用いることができる。OSトランジスタは、放射線に対する信頼性が高いともいえる。例えば、X線のフラットパネルディテクタの画素回路に、OSトランジスタを好適に用いることができる。また、OSトランジスタは、宇宙空間で使用する半導体装置に好適に用いることができる。放射線として、電磁放射線(例えば、X線、及びガンマ線)、及び粒子放射線(例えば、アルファ線、ベータ線、陽子線、及び中性子線)が挙げられる。 OS transistors exhibit little change in electrical characteristics due to radiation exposure, meaning they have high radiation resistance, making them suitable for use in environments where radiation may be present. It can also be said that OS transistors have high reliability against radiation. For example, OS transistors can be used favorably in pixel circuits of X-ray flat panel detectors. Furthermore, OS transistors can be used favorably in semiconductor devices used in outer space. Examples of radiation include electromagnetic radiation (e.g., X-rays and gamma rays) and particle radiation (e.g., alpha rays, beta rays, proton rays, and neutron rays).
なお、半導体層21に用いることができる半導体材料は、酸化物半導体に限定されない。例えば、単体元素よりなる半導体、または化合物半導体を用いることができる。単体元素よりなる半導体としては、シリコン(単結晶シリコン、多結晶シリコン、微結晶シリコン、非晶質シリコンを含む)またはゲルマニウムなどが挙げられる。化合物半導体として、例えば、ヒ化ガリウム、シリコンゲルマニウムが挙げられる。化合物半導体として、有機半導体、窒化物半導体、または酸化物半導体等が挙げられる。なお、これらの半導体材料に、ドーパントとして不純物が含まれてもよい。 Note that the semiconductor material that can be used for the semiconductor layer 21 is not limited to oxide semiconductors. For example, semiconductors made of single elements or compound semiconductors can be used. Examples of semiconductors made of single elements include silicon (including single crystal silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline silicon, and amorphous silicon) and germanium. Examples of compound semiconductors include gallium arsenide and silicon germanium. Examples of compound semiconductors include organic semiconductors, nitride semiconductors, and oxide semiconductors. Note that these semiconductor materials may contain impurities as dopants.
または、半導体層21は、半導体として機能する層状物質を有してもよい。層状物質とは、層状の結晶構造を有する材料群の総称である。層状の結晶構造は、共有結合またはイオン結合によって形成される層が、ファンデルワールス結合のような、共有結合またはイオン結合よりも弱い結合を介して積層している構造である。層状物質は、単位層内における電気伝導性が高く、つまり、2次元電気伝導性が高い。半導体として機能し、かつ、2次元電気伝導性の高い材料をチャネル形成領域に用いることで、オン電流の大きいトランジスタを提供することができる。 Alternatively, the semiconductor layer 21 may have a layered material that functions as a semiconductor. A layered material is a general term for a group of materials that have a layered crystal structure. A layered crystal structure is a structure in which layers formed by covalent or ionic bonds are stacked via bonds weaker than covalent or ionic bonds, such as van der Waals bonds. Layered materials have high electrical conductivity within each layer, that is, high two-dimensional electrical conductivity. By using a material that functions as a semiconductor and has high two-dimensional electrical conductivity in the channel formation region, it is possible to provide a transistor with a large on-current.
上記層状物質として、例えば、グラフェン、シリセン、カルコゲン化物などが挙げられる。カルコゲン化物は、カルコゲン(第16族に属する元素)を含む化合物である。また、カルコゲン化物として、遷移金属カルコゲナイド、13族カルコゲナイドなどが挙げられる。トランジスタの半導体層として適用可能な遷移金属カルコゲナイドとして、具体的には、硫化モリブデン(代表的にはMoS2)、セレン化モリブデン(代表的にはMoSe2)、モリブデンテルル(代表的にはMoTe2)、硫化タングステン(代表的にはWS2)、セレン化タングステン(代表的にはWSe2)、タングステンテルル(代表的にはWTe2)、硫化ハフニウム(代表的にはHfS2)、セレン化ハフニウム(代表的にはHfSe2)、硫化ジルコニウム(代表的にはZrS2)、セレン化ジルコニウム(代表的にはZrSe2)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the layered material include graphene, silicene, and chalcogenides. Chalcogenides are compounds containing chalcogen (an element belonging to Group 16). Examples of chalcogenides include transition metal chalcogenides and Group 13 chalcogenides. Specific examples of transition metal chalcogenides that can be used as the semiconductor layer of a transistor include molybdenum sulfide (typically MoS 2 ), molybdenum selenide (typically MoSe 2 ), molybdenum tellurium (typically MoTe 2 ), tungsten sulfide (typically WS 2 ), tungsten selenide (typically WSe 2 ), tungsten tellurium (typically WTe 2 ) , hafnium sulfide (typically HfS 2 ), hafnium selenide (typically HfSe 2 ), zirconium sulfide (typically ZrS 2 ), and zirconium selenide (typically ZrSe 2 ).
半導体層21に用いる半導体材料の結晶性は特に限定されず、非晶質半導体、単結晶半導体、または単結晶以外の結晶性を有する半導体(多結晶半導体、微結晶半導体、または一部に結晶領域を有する半導体)のいずれを用いてもよい。結晶性を有する半導体を用いると、トランジスタ特性の劣化を抑制できるため好ましい。 The crystallinity of the semiconductor material used for the semiconductor layer 21 is not particularly limited, and any of an amorphous semiconductor, a single-crystal semiconductor, or a semiconductor with crystallinity other than single crystal (a polycrystalline semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or a semiconductor with a crystalline region in part) may be used. The use of a crystalline semiconductor is preferable because it can suppress degradation of the transistor characteristics.
〈ゲート絶縁層〉
絶縁層22はトランジスタのゲート絶縁層として機能する。半導体層21に酸化物半導体を用いた場合、絶縁層22の少なくとも半導体層21と接する膜には、酸化物絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。例えば、酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化窒化アルミニウム、酸化ハフニウム、酸化窒化ハフニウム、酸化ガリウム、酸化窒化ガリウム、酸化イットリウム、酸化窒化イットリウム、及びGa−Zn酸化物の一または複数を用いることができる。このほか、絶縁層22として、窒化シリコン、窒化酸化シリコン、窒化アルミニウム、窒化酸化アルミニウムなどの窒化物絶縁膜を用いることもできる。また、絶縁層22は積層構造を有していてもよく、例えば酸化物絶縁膜と窒化物絶縁膜とをそれぞれ1以上有する積層構造としてもよい。
<Gate insulating layer>
The insulating layer 22 functions as a gate insulating layer of the transistor. When an oxide semiconductor is used for the semiconductor layer 21, it is preferable to use an oxide insulating film for at least a film of the insulating layer 22 that is in contact with the semiconductor layer 21. For example, one or more of silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, aluminum oxide, aluminum oxynitride, hafnium oxide, hafnium oxynitride, gallium oxide, gallium oxynitride, yttrium oxide, yttrium oxynitride, and Ga—Zn oxide can be used. Alternatively, a nitride insulating film such as silicon nitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum nitride, or aluminum nitride oxide can also be used for the insulating layer 22. Furthermore, the insulating layer 22 may have a stacked structure, for example, a stacked structure including one or more oxide insulating films and one or more nitride insulating films.
また、絶縁層22は、high−k材料からなる絶縁材料を積層して用いることが好ましく、比誘電率が高い(high−k)材料と、当該high−k材料より絶縁耐力が大きい材料との積層構造を用いることが好ましい。例えば、絶縁層22として、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ジルコニウムの順番で積層された絶縁膜(ZAZともいう)を用いることができる。また、例えば、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化アルミニウムの順番で積層された絶縁膜(ZAZAともいう)を用いることができる。また、例えば、ハフニウムジルコニウム酸化物、酸化アルミニウム、ハフニウムジルコニウム酸化物、酸化アルミニウムの順番で積層された絶縁膜を用いることができる。酸化アルミニウムのような、比較的絶縁耐力が大きい絶縁体を積層して用いることで、絶縁耐力が向上し、容量素子の静電破壊を抑制できる。 Furthermore, the insulating layer 22 is preferably made of a laminated insulating material made of a high-k material, and preferably has a laminated structure of a material with a high dielectric constant (high-k) and a material with a higher dielectric strength than the high-k material. For example, the insulating layer 22 can be made of an insulating film (also called ZAZ) in which zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, and zirconium oxide are laminated in this order. Alternatively, the insulating film (also called ZAZA) can be made of an insulating film (also called hafnium zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, hafnium zirconium oxide, and aluminum oxide) in this order. Alternatively, the insulating film can be made of an insulating film (also called hafnium zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, hafnium zirconium oxide, and aluminum oxide) in this order. By using a laminated insulator with a relatively high dielectric strength, such as aluminum oxide, the dielectric strength is improved, and electrostatic breakdown of the capacitance element can be suppressed.
また、絶縁層22として、強誘電性を示す材料を用いてもよい。強誘電性を示す材料としては、酸化ハフニウム、酸化ジルコニウム、HfZrOX(Xは0よりも大きい実数とする)などの金属酸化物が挙げられる。また、HfZrOX(Xは0よりも大きい実数とする)にY(イットリウム)を添加した金属酸化物を用いることもできる。HfZrOX(Xは0よりも大きい実数とする)にY(イットリウム)を添加することで、強誘電性を高めることができる。 Alternatively, a material exhibiting ferroelectricity may be used for the insulating layer 22. Examples of materials exhibiting ferroelectricity include metal oxides such as hafnium oxide, zirconium oxide, and HfZrO x (X is a real number greater than 0). Alternatively, a metal oxide obtained by adding Y (yttrium) to HfZrO x (X is a real number greater than 0) may be used. Adding Y (yttrium) to HfZrO x (X is a real number greater than 0) can enhance the ferroelectricity.
絶縁層22を2層構造とする場合、半導体層21と接する膜に、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用い、ゲート電極として機能する導電層23側に位置する膜として水素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。これにより、導電層23側から半導体層21に水素が拡散することを抑制でき、信頼性の高いトランジスタを実現できる。 When the insulating layer 22 has a two-layer structure, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen as the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, and to use an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen as the film located on the conductive layer 23 side that functions as the gate electrode. This makes it possible to prevent hydrogen from diffusing from the conductive layer 23 side to the semiconductor layer 21, resulting in a highly reliable transistor.
水素を捕獲または固着する絶縁膜として、酸化ハフニウム膜、ハフニウムシリケート膜、酸化アルミニウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。また水素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜としては、窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、酸化ガリウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。 As an insulating film that captures or fixes hydrogen, it is preferable to use a hafnium oxide film, a hafnium silicate film, an aluminum oxide film, etc. Furthermore, as an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen, it is preferable to use a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, a gallium oxide film, etc.
または、半導体層21と接する膜に、加熱により酸素を放出する絶縁膜を用い、導電層23側に位置する膜に水素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用いる構成としてもよい。または、半導体層21と接する膜に、加熱により酸素を放出する絶縁膜を用い、導電層23側に位置する膜に水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用いる構成としてもよい。 Alternatively, an insulating film that releases oxygen when heated may be used for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, and an insulating film that has barrier properties against hydrogen may be used for the film located on the conductive layer 23 side. Alternatively, an insulating film that releases oxygen when heated may be used for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, and an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen may be used for the film located on the conductive layer 23 side.
絶縁層22を3層構造とする場合、半導体層21と接する膜に、比誘電率が他の膜よりも低い材料を有する絶縁膜を用い、導電層23側に位置する膜に、水素及び酸素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用い、これらの間に位置する膜に、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。比誘電率が低い材料としては、酸化シリコン、または酸化窒化シリコンを用いることができる。このような構成とすることで、半導体層21と接する膜から半導体層21に酸素を供給することができる。また導電層23側に位置する膜により、導電層23側への酸素の拡散を防ぎ、導電層23の酸化を抑制できる。 When the insulating layer 22 has a three-layer structure, it is preferable to use an insulating film made of a material with a lower dielectric constant than the other films for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, an insulating film with barrier properties against hydrogen and oxygen for the film on the conductive layer 23 side, and an insulating film with the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen for the film between them. Silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride can be used as a material with a low dielectric constant. With this configuration, oxygen can be supplied to the semiconductor layer 21 from the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21. Furthermore, the film on the conductive layer 23 side prevents oxygen from diffusing toward the conductive layer 23, suppressing oxidation of the conductive layer 23.
酸素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜としては、酸化アルミニウム膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、ハフニウムシリケート膜などを用いることが好ましい。酸素及び水素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜としては、酸化アルミニウム膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化ハフニウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。 As an insulating film having barrier properties against oxygen, it is preferable to use an aluminum oxide film, silicon nitride film, hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, etc. As an insulating film having barrier properties against oxygen and hydrogen, it is preferable to use an aluminum oxide film, silicon nitride film, hafnium oxide film, etc.
絶縁層22を4層構造とする場合、半導体層21と接する膜に、酸素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用い、その次に半導体層21に近い膜に、比誘電率が他の膜よりも低い材料を有する絶縁膜を用い、その次に半導体層21に近い膜に、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用い、最も導電層23側に位置する膜に、水素及び酸素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。すなわち、上述の3層構造に加えて、半導体層21に接する膜を追加した構成とすることができる。半導体層21に接する膜に酸素に対してバリア性を有する絶縁膜を用いることで、半導体層21から酸素が脱離することを抑制できる。このとき、半導体層21に接する膜としては、酸化アルミニウム膜を用いることが好適である。酸化アルミニウムは、酸素に対してバリア性を有するだけでなく、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有するため、半導体層21に水素が拡散することも防ぐ効果を奏する。 When the insulating layer 22 has a four-layer structure, it is preferable to use an insulating film with oxygen barrier properties for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, an insulating film made of a material with a lower dielectric constant than the other films for the film next closest to the semiconductor layer 21, an insulating film with the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen for the film next closest to the semiconductor layer 21, and an insulating film with hydrogen and oxygen barrier properties for the film closest to the conductive layer 23. That is, in addition to the three-layer structure described above, a configuration can be achieved in which a film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21 is added. By using an insulating film with oxygen barrier properties for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, oxygen desorption from the semiconductor layer 21 can be suppressed. In this case, it is preferable to use an aluminum oxide film for the film in contact with the semiconductor layer 21. Aluminum oxide not only has oxygen barrier properties, but also has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen, which effectively prevents hydrogen from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 21.
絶縁層22を積層構造とする場合、各絶縁膜はそれぞれ薄膜であることが好ましい。例えば、絶縁層22の層厚が1nm以上20nm以下、好ましくは3nm以上10nm以下とすることで、トランジスタのサブスレッショルドスイング値(S値ともいう)を小さくすることができる。また各絶縁膜の厚さは、0.1nm以上10nm以下が好ましく、0.1nm以上5nm以下がより好ましく、0.5nm以上5nm以下がより好ましく、1nm以上5nm未満がより好ましく、1nm以上3nm以下がさらに好ましい。 When the insulating layer 22 has a layered structure, each insulating film is preferably a thin film. For example, by making the thickness of the insulating layer 22 1 nm or more and 20 nm or less, preferably 3 nm or more and 10 nm or less, the subthreshold swing value (also known as the S value) of the transistor can be reduced. Furthermore, the thickness of each insulating film is preferably 0.1 nm or more and 10 nm or less, more preferably 0.1 nm or more and 5 nm or less, more preferably 0.5 nm or more and 5 nm or less, more preferably 1 nm or more and less than 5 nm, and even more preferably 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less.
具体的な例としては、半導体層21側から、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化シリコン膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、窒化シリコン膜の順で積層された4層構造を用い、これらの厚さを、半導体層21側から1nm、2nm、2nm、1nmとすることが好ましい。 As a specific example, a four-layer structure is used in which an aluminum oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, and a silicon nitride film are stacked in this order from the semiconductor layer 21 side, and the thicknesses of these films are preferably 1 nm, 2 nm, 2 nm, and 1 nm from the semiconductor layer 21 side.
なお、本明細書等において、バリア性とは、対応する物質が拡散し難い性質(対応する物質が透過し難い性質、対応する物質の透過性が低い性質、または、対応する物質の拡散を抑制する機能ともいう)とする。なお、対応する物質として記載される場合の水素は、例えば、水素原子、水素分子、並びに、水分子及びOH−などの水素と結合した物質などの少なくとも一を指す。また、対応する物質として記載される場合の不純物は、特段の明示が無い限り、チャネル形成領域または半導体層における不純物を指し、例えば、水素原子、水素分子、水分子、窒素原子、窒素分子、酸化窒素分子(N2O、NO、NO2など)、銅原子などの少なくとも一を指す。また、対応する物質として記載される場合の酸素は、例えば、酸素原子、酸素分子などの少なくとも一を指す。 In this specification and the like, the term "barrier property" refers to a property that makes it difficult for a corresponding substance to diffuse (also referred to as a property that makes it difficult for a corresponding substance to permeate, a property that the permeability of a corresponding substance is low, or a function that suppresses the diffusion of a corresponding substance). When hydrogen is described as a corresponding substance, it refers to at least one of, for example, a hydrogen atom, a hydrogen molecule, and a substance bonded to hydrogen, such as a water molecule or OH − . Furthermore, when impurities are described as a corresponding substance, unless otherwise specified, they refer to impurities in a channel formation region or a semiconductor layer, and refer to at least one of, for example, a hydrogen atom, a hydrogen molecule, a water molecule, a nitrogen atom, a nitrogen molecule, a nitrogen oxide molecule (such as N 2 O, NO, or NO 2 ), a copper atom, and the like. Furthermore, when oxygen is described as a corresponding substance, it refers to at least one of, for example, an oxygen atom, an oxygen molecule, and the like.
ここで、金属酸化物膜を用いたトランジスタは、不純物及び酸素の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁膜で囲むことによって、トランジスタの電気特性を安定にすることができる。不純物及び酸素の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁膜としては、例えば、ホウ素、炭素、窒素、酸素、フッ素、マグネシウム、アルミニウム、シリコン、リン、塩素、アルゴン、ガリウム、ゲルマニウム、イットリウム、ジルコニウム、ランタン、ネオジム、ハフニウム、及び、タンタルから選ばれた一以上を含む絶縁膜を、単層で、または積層で用いることができる。具体的には、不純物及び酸素の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁膜の材料として、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、酸化ガリウム、酸化ゲルマニウム、酸化イットリウム、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化ランタン、酸化ネオジム、酸化ハフニウム、酸化タンタルなどの金属酸化物、窒化アルミニウム、窒化酸化シリコン、窒化シリコンなどの窒化物を用いることができる。 Here, the electrical characteristics of a transistor using a metal oxide film can be stabilized by surrounding it with an insulating film that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities and oxygen. The insulating film that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities and oxygen can be, for example, an insulating film containing one or more elements selected from boron, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine, magnesium, aluminum, silicon, phosphorus, chlorine, argon, gallium, germanium, yttrium, zirconium, lanthanum, neodymium, hafnium, and tantalum, and can be used in a single layer or a stacked layer. Specifically, the insulating film that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities and oxygen can be made of metal oxides such as aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, gallium oxide, germanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zirconium oxide, lanthanum oxide, neodymium oxide, hafnium oxide, or tantalum oxide, or nitrides such as aluminum nitride, silicon nitride oxide, or silicon nitride.
具体的には、水及び水素といった不純物と、酸素と、の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁膜の材料としては、例えば、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、酸化ガリウム、酸化ゲルマニウム、酸化イットリウム、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化ランタン、酸化ネオジム、酸化ハフニウム、及び酸化タンタルといった金属酸化物が挙げられる。また、水及び水素といった不純物と、酸素と、の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁膜の材料としては、例えば、アルミニウム及びハフニウムを含む酸化物(ハフニウムアルミネート)が挙げられる。また、水及び水素といった不純物と、酸素と、の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁膜の材料としては、例えば、窒化アルミニウム、窒化アルミニウムチタン、窒化酸化シリコン、及び窒化シリコンといった窒化物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of insulating film materials that function to suppress the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen include metal oxides such as aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, gallium oxide, germanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zirconium oxide, lanthanum oxide, neodymium oxide, hafnium oxide, and tantalum oxide. Also, examples of insulating film materials that function to suppress the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen include oxides containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate). Also, examples of insulating film materials that function to suppress the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen include nitrides such as aluminum nitride, aluminum titanium nitride, silicon nitride oxide, and silicon nitride.
水素を捕獲するまたは固着する機能を有する絶縁膜の材料としては、ハフニウムを含む酸化物、マグネシウムを含む酸化物、アルミニウムを含む酸化物、アルミニウム及びハフニウムを含む酸化物(ハフニウムアルミネート)等の金属酸化物が挙げられる。また、これらの金属酸化物は、さらにジルコニウムを含んでいてもよく、例えば、ハフニウム及びジルコニウムを含む酸化物等が挙げられる。ここで、アモルファス構造を有する金属酸化物では、一部の酸素原子がダングリングボンドを有するため、水素を捕獲するまたは固着する能力が高い。したがって、これらの金属酸化物は、アモルファス構造を有することが好ましい。例えば、これらの酸化物にシリコンを含むことで、アモルファス構造を実現してもよい。例えば、ハフニウム及びシリコンを含む酸化物(ハフニウムシリケート)を用いることが好ましい。なお、金属酸化物は、一部に結晶領域、及び、結晶粒界の一方または双方を有する場合がある。 Insulating film materials capable of capturing or adhering hydrogen include metal oxides such as oxides containing hafnium, oxides containing magnesium, oxides containing aluminum, and oxides containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate). These metal oxides may also contain zirconium, such as oxides containing hafnium and zirconium. Metal oxides with an amorphous structure have dangling bonds in some oxygen atoms, which enhance their ability to capture or adhering hydrogen. Therefore, these metal oxides preferably have an amorphous structure. For example, an amorphous structure may be achieved by including silicon in these oxides. For example, it is preferable to use an oxide containing hafnium and silicon (hafnium silicate). Metal oxides may have crystalline regions and/or grain boundaries in some areas.
〈導電層〉
導電層24及び導電層25は半導体層21と接する。ここで、半導体層21として酸化物半導体を用いた場合、導電層24または導電層25の半導体層21と接する部分に例えばアルミニウムなどの酸化されやすい金属を用いると、導電層24または導電層25と半導体層21との間に絶縁性の酸化物(例えば酸化アルミニウム)が形成され、これらの導通を妨げる恐れがある。そのため、導電層24及び導電層25の少なくとも半導体層21と接する部分には、酸化されにくい導電性材料、酸化されても電気抵抗が低く保たれる導電性材料、または酸化物導電性材料を用いることが好ましい。
<Conductive layer>
The conductive layer 24 and the conductive layer 25 are in contact with the semiconductor layer 21. When an oxide semiconductor is used as the semiconductor layer 21, if an easily oxidized metal such as aluminum is used in the portion of the conductive layer 24 or the conductive layer 25 in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, an insulating oxide (e.g., aluminum oxide) may be formed between the conductive layer 24 or the conductive layer 25 and the semiconductor layer 21, preventing electrical conduction therebetween. Therefore, it is preferable to use a conductive material that is resistant to oxidation, a conductive material that maintains low electrical resistance even when oxidized, or a conductive oxide material for at least the portion of the conductive layer 24 and the conductive layer 25 in contact with the semiconductor layer 21.
半導体層21と接する導電膜24b及び導電層25としては、例えばチタン、窒化タンタル、窒化チタン、チタンとアルミニウムを含む窒化物、タンタルとアルミニウムを含む窒化物、ルテニウム、酸化ルテニウム、窒化ルテニウム、ストロンチウムとルテニウムを含む酸化物、ランタンとニッケルを含む酸化物などを用いることが好ましい。これらは、酸化されにくい導電性材料、または、酸化されても導電性を維持する材料であるため、好ましい。 For the conductive film 24b and conductive layer 25 in contact with the semiconductor layer 21, it is preferable to use, for example, titanium, tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium, and oxides containing lanthanum and nickel. These are preferable because they are conductive materials that are resistant to oxidation or materials that maintain their conductivity even when oxidized.
または、酸化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、In−Sn酸化物、In−Zn酸化物、In−W酸化物、In−W−Zn酸化物、In−Ti酸化物、In−Ti−Sn酸化物、In−Sn−Si酸化物、Ga−Zn酸化物などの導電性酸化物を用いることができる。特にインジウムを含む導電性酸化物は、導電性が高いため好ましい。または、上記半導体層21に適用できるIn−Ga−Zn酸化物などの酸化物材料も、キャリア濃度を高めることで導電層として用いることができる。 Alternatively, conductive oxides such as indium oxide, zinc oxide, In-Sn oxide, In-Zn oxide, In-W oxide, In-W-Zn oxide, In-Ti oxide, In-Ti-Sn oxide, In-Sn-Si oxide, and Ga-Zn oxide can be used. Conductive oxides containing indium are particularly preferred due to their high conductivity. Alternatively, oxide materials such as In-Ga-Zn oxide that can be used for the semiconductor layer 21 can also be used as a conductive layer by increasing the carrier concentration.
例えば、導電層24及び導電層25として、それぞれ上記導電性酸化物膜の単層構造、窒化チタン膜とタングステン膜と窒化チタンを順に積層した三層構造、タングステン上にルテニウム膜または酸化ルテニウム膜を積層した二層構造、上記導電性酸化物膜上にルテニウム膜または酸化ルテニウム膜を積層した二層構造、ルテニウム膜または酸化ルテニウム膜上に上記導電性酸化物膜を積層した二層構造などを用いることができる。 For example, conductive layer 24 and conductive layer 25 can each be a single-layer structure of the above-mentioned conductive oxide film, a three-layer structure in which a titanium nitride film, a tungsten film, and a titanium nitride film are laminated in this order, a two-layer structure in which a ruthenium film or a ruthenium oxide film is laminated on tungsten, a two-layer structure in which a ruthenium film or a ruthenium oxide film is laminated on the above-mentioned conductive oxide film, or a two-layer structure in which the above-mentioned conductive oxide film is laminated on a ruthenium film or a ruthenium oxide film.
導電層23はゲート電極として機能し、様々な導電性材料を用いることができる。導電層23としては、例えばアルミニウム、クロム、銅、銀、金、白金、タンタル、ニッケル、コバルト、チタン、モリブデン、タングステン、ハフニウム、バナジウム、ニオブ、マンガン、マグネシウム、ジルコニウム、ベリリウム、インジウム、ルテニウム、イリジウム、ストロンチウム、ランタンなどから選ばれた金属元素、当該金属元素を成分とする合金を用いることが好ましい。また、上記金属または合金の窒化物、もしくは上記金属または合金の酸化物を用いてもよい。例えば、窒化タンタル、窒化チタン、チタンとアルミニウムを含む窒化物、タンタルとアルミニウムを含む窒化物、酸化ルテニウム、窒化ルテニウム、ストロンチウムとルテニウムを含む酸化物、ランタンとニッケルを含む酸化物などを用いることが好ましい。また、リン等の不純物元素を含有させた多結晶シリコンに代表される、電気伝導度が高い半導体、ニッケルシリサイドなどのシリサイドを用いてもよい。 The conductive layer 23 functions as a gate electrode and can be made of a variety of conductive materials. For the conductive layer 23, it is preferable to use a metal element selected from the group consisting of aluminum, chromium, copper, silver, gold, platinum, tantalum, nickel, cobalt, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, indium, ruthenium, iridium, strontium, and lanthanum, or an alloy containing such a metal element. Nitrides of the above metals or alloys, or oxides of the above metals or alloys, may also be used. For example, tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium, and oxides containing lanthanum and nickel are preferable. Highly conductive semiconductors, such as polycrystalline silicon containing impurity elements such as phosphorus, and silicides such as nickel silicide may also be used.
また導電層23には、上記導電層24及び導電層25に用いることができる、窒化物、及び酸化物を適用してもよい。 In addition, the nitrides and oxides that can be used for the conductive layers 24 and 25 may also be applied to the conductive layer 23.
導電層23、導電膜24a及び導電層25は、配線としても機能するため、低抵抗な導電性材料を積層して用いることが好ましい。例えば、導電膜24a及び導電層25の上層には、上述した導電層23に用いることのできる低抵抗な導電性材料を用いることもできる。 Because conductive layer 23, conductive film 24a, and conductive layer 25 also function as wiring, it is preferable to use a laminate of low-resistance conductive materials. For example, the upper layer of conductive film 24a and conductive layer 25 can be made of a low-resistance conductive material that can be used for conductive layer 23 described above.
〈絶縁層〉
絶縁層43は層間絶縁膜として用いることができる。例えば、スパッタリング法、またはプラズマCVD法などの成膜方法で形成することが好ましい。特に、スパッタリング法を用い、成膜ガスに水素ガスを用いない成膜方法で成膜することで、水素の含有量の極めて少ない膜とすることができる。そのため、半導体層21に水素が供給されることを抑制し、トランジスタ20の電気特性の安定化を図ることができる。
<Insulating layer>
The insulating layer 43 can be used as an interlayer insulating film. For example, it is preferably formed by a film formation method such as a sputtering method or a plasma CVD method. In particular, by forming the insulating layer 43 by a sputtering method without using hydrogen gas as a film formation gas, a film with an extremely low hydrogen content can be obtained. Therefore, the supply of hydrogen to the semiconductor layer 21 can be suppressed, and the electrical characteristics of the transistor 20 can be stabilized.
絶縁層43は、半導体層21のチャネル形成領域と接するため、酸化物絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。特に、加熱により酸素を放出する酸化物絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。絶縁層43としては、上記ゲート絶縁層に用いることのできる酸化物絶縁膜を適用することができる。 Since the insulating layer 43 is in contact with the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 21, it is preferable to use an oxide insulating film. In particular, it is preferable to use an oxide insulating film that releases oxygen when heated. The oxide insulating film that can be used for the gate insulating layer described above can be used as the insulating layer 43.
また、絶縁層43は層間絶縁層として機能するため、他の絶縁層と比較して、高い成膜レートでの成膜が可能な成膜方法を用いることが好ましい。例えば、絶縁層43を、プラズマCVD法で成膜することができる。プラズマCVD法で絶縁層43の成膜を行う際に、TEOS(Tetra−Ethyl−Ortho−Silicate、化学式:Si(OC2H5)4)を用いることが好ましい。これにより、生産性を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, since the insulating layer 43 functions as an interlayer insulating layer, it is preferable to use a film formation method that allows film formation at a higher film formation rate than other insulating layers. For example, the insulating layer 43 can be formed by a plasma CVD method. When forming the insulating layer 43 by the plasma CVD method, it is preferable to use TEOS (Tetra-Ethyl-Ortho-Silicate, chemical formula: Si( OC2H5 ) 4 ). This can improve productivity.
絶縁層11、絶縁層42、絶縁層44、及び絶縁層46は、それぞれ層間絶縁層として機能する。絶縁層11、絶縁層42、絶縁層44、及び絶縁層46としては、上記絶縁層43に用いることのできる絶縁材料を用いることができる。 Insulating layer 11, insulating layer 42, insulating layer 44, and insulating layer 46 each function as an interlayer insulating layer. The insulating materials that can be used for insulating layer 43 above can be used for insulating layer 11, insulating layer 42, insulating layer 44, and insulating layer 46.
絶縁層52は、容量素子30の誘電体として機能する。絶縁層52としては、上記絶縁層22と同様の絶縁材料を適用することができる。また、絶縁層52に上記強誘電性を示す材料を用いることで、容量素子30を強誘電キャパシタとすることができ、不揮発性の記憶装置を実現することができる。なお、容量素子30として、電界誘起巨大抵抗変化(CER:Colossal Electro−Resistance)効果を利用した抵抗変化型の記憶素子を用いることもできる。 The insulating layer 52 functions as a dielectric for the capacitance element 30. The same insulating material as the insulating layer 22 can be used for the insulating layer 52. Furthermore, by using a material exhibiting ferroelectricity as described above for the insulating layer 52, the capacitance element 30 can be made into a ferroelectric capacitor, thereby realizing a non-volatile memory device. Note that a resistance change type memory element that utilizes the electric field induced giant resistance change (CER: Colossal Electro-Resistance) effect can also be used as the capacitance element 30.
以上が、構成要素についての説明である。 This concludes the explanation of the components.
[変形例]
以下では、上記構成例とは一部の構成が異なる例について説明する。なお、上記と重複する部分については同一の符号を付し、説明を省略する。
[Modification]
An example in which the configuration is partially different from the above configuration example will be described below. Note that the same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as those described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.
〔変形例1〕
図8Bに示す構成は、導電層24の形状が異なる点で、上記構成例と主に相違している。
[Variation 1]
The configuration shown in FIG. 8B differs from the above example configuration mainly in that the shape of the conductive layer 24 is different.
導電層24が有する導電膜24bには凹部が形成されている。より具体的には、導電膜24bの絶縁層43と重なる領域に比べて、重ならない領域の厚さが薄くなるように加工されている。また、半導体層21は、導電膜24bの当該凹部における上面だけでなく側面にも接している。このような構成とすることで、半導体層21と導電膜24bとの接触面積を大きくできるため、これらの間の接触抵抗をさらに低減することが可能となる。 A recess is formed in the conductive film 24b of the conductive layer 24. More specifically, the thickness of the non-overlapping area of the conductive film 24b is thinner than the area where the conductive film 24b overlaps with the insulating layer 43. Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 21 contacts not only the top surface of the recess in the conductive film 24b but also the side surfaces. This configuration increases the contact area between the semiconductor layer 21 and the conductive film 24b, further reducing the contact resistance between them.
ここで、導電膜24bの凹部の端部は、図8Bに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状(丸みを帯びた形状ということもできる。)であることが好ましい。このような構造にすることで、絶縁層22及び導電層23の凹部の端部も同様に湾曲形状にすることができる。これにより、導電層23の凹部の端部の電界集中を緩和することができる。よって、トランジスタ20で絶縁破壊が発生することを抑制することができる。 Here, it is preferable that the end of the recess in the conductive film 24b has a curved shape (which can also be called a rounded shape) with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 8B. By using such a structure, the ends of the recesses in the insulating layer 22 and conductive layer 23 can also be made similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the end of the recess in the conductive layer 23. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of dielectric breakdown in the transistor 20.
また、図7Bに示すように、導電層25を導電膜25aと、導電膜25a上の導電膜25bの積層構造にすることができる。この場合、図8Bに示す導電膜24bと同様に、導電膜25bに凹部を形成する構造にすることができる。ここで、導電層51は、導電膜25bの当該凹部における上面だけでなく側面にも接している。このような構成とすることで、導電層51と導電膜25bとの接触面積を大きくできるため、これらの間の接触抵抗をさらに低減することが可能となる。 Also, as shown in Figure 7B, conductive layer 25 can have a layered structure of conductive film 25a and conductive film 25b on conductive film 25a. In this case, a recess can be formed in conductive film 25b, similar to conductive film 24b shown in Figure 8B. Here, conductive layer 51 contacts not only the top surface of conductive film 25b in the recess, but also the side surfaces. With this configuration, the contact area between conductive layer 51 and conductive film 25b can be increased, further reducing the contact resistance between them.
また、導電膜25bの凹部の端部を、図7Bに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状にすることで、絶縁層52の凹部の端部及び導電層53の凸部の端部も同様に湾曲形状にすることができる。これにより、導電層53の凸部の端部の電界集中を緩和することができる。よって、容量素子30で絶縁破壊が発生することを抑制することができる。 Furthermore, by making the ends of the recesses in the conductive film 25b curved with an arbitrary curvature as shown in Figure 7B, the ends of the recesses in the insulating layer 52 and the ends of the protrusions in the conductive layer 53 can also be made similarly curved. This makes it possible to alleviate electric field concentration at the ends of the protrusions in the conductive layer 53. This makes it possible to prevent dielectric breakdown in the capacitive element 30.
〔変形例2〕
図9Aに示す構成は、絶縁層31が設けられない点で、上記構成例と主に相違している。
[Variation 2]
The configuration shown in FIG. 9A differs from the above-described configuration example mainly in that the insulating layer 31 is not provided.
図9Aでは、絶縁層32が、導電層23の絶縁層33側の表面に接して設けられている。また絶縁層32の一部は、導電層23及び絶縁層22を介して半導体層21の水平部分と覆う部分を有する。また、絶縁層33は、絶縁層32、導電層23、及び絶縁層22を介して、半導体層21の水平部分を覆う部分を有する。絶縁層31を設けないことにより、絶縁層31を形成する工程を省略でき、作製工程を簡略化できるため好ましい。 In Figure 9A, insulating layer 32 is provided in contact with the surface of conductive layer 23 on the insulating layer 33 side. A portion of insulating layer 32 covers the horizontal portion of semiconductor layer 21 via conductive layer 23 and insulating layer 22. In addition, insulating layer 33 has a portion that covers the horizontal portion of semiconductor layer 21 via insulating layer 32, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 22. By not providing insulating layer 31, the step of forming insulating layer 31 can be omitted, which is preferable because it simplifies the manufacturing process.
また、図9Bには、上記変形例1で例示した凹部を有する導電膜24bを、本構成に適用した場合の例を示している。 Furthermore, Figure 9B shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses illustrated in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration.
ここで、図9A、図9Bに示す構成では、絶縁層31の代わりに、絶縁層32または絶縁層33に、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。絶縁層32または絶縁層33に適用可能な、水素を捕獲または固着する絶縁膜として、酸化ハフニウム膜、ハフニウムシリケート膜、酸化アルミニウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。 In the configuration shown in Figures 9A and 9B, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen as insulating layer 32 or insulating layer 33 instead of insulating layer 31. It is preferable to use a hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, aluminum oxide film, etc. as an insulating film that can capture or fix hydrogen and that can be used as insulating layer 32 or insulating layer 33.
〔変形例3〕
図9Cに示す構成は、絶縁層33を有さない点、及び絶縁層32の形状が異なる点で、上記変形例2と主に相違している。
[Variation 3]
The configuration shown in FIG. 9C differs from the second modification mainly in that it does not have the insulating layer 33 and that the shape of the insulating layer 32 is different.
絶縁層32は、導電層23、絶縁層22、半導体層21、及び絶縁層34に囲まれた領域を埋めるように設けられている。このような構成とすることで、絶縁層31及び絶縁層33を形成する工程を削減できるため、作製工程を簡略化できる。 Insulating layer 32 is provided so as to fill the area surrounded by conductive layer 23, insulating layer 22, semiconductor layer 21, and insulating layer 34. This configuration eliminates the need for steps to form insulating layers 31 and 33, thereby simplifying the manufacturing process.
また、図9Dには、上記変形例1で例示した凹部を有する導電膜24bを、本構成に適用した場合の例を示している。 Furthermore, Figure 9D shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses illustrated in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration.
ここで、図9C、図9Dに示す構成では、絶縁層31の代わりに、絶縁層32に、水素を捕獲する又は固着する機能を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。絶縁層32に適用可能な、水素を捕獲または固着する絶縁膜として、酸化ハフニウム膜、ハフニウムシリケート膜、酸化アルミニウム膜などを用いることが好ましい。 In the configuration shown in Figures 9C and 9D, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen as insulating layer 32 instead of insulating layer 31. Examples of insulating films that can be used for insulating layer 32 and that have the function of capturing or fixing hydrogen include hafnium oxide film, hafnium silicate film, and aluminum oxide film.
〔変形例4〕
図10Aに示す構成は、絶縁層32と半導体層21との間に、絶縁層22が設けられている点で、上記構成例と主に相違している。
[Modification 4]
The configuration shown in FIG. 10A differs from the above-described configuration example mainly in that an insulating layer 22 is provided between an insulating layer 32 and a semiconductor layer 21 .
このような構成とすることで、絶縁層32の形成工程などにおいて、半導体層21の上面が露出せず、絶縁層22に被覆されているため、半導体層21へのダメージを抑制でき、信頼性を高めることができる。 With this configuration, the top surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is not exposed during the process of forming the insulating layer 32 and is covered by the insulating layer 22, thereby reducing damage to the semiconductor layer 21 and improving reliability.
また、図10Bには、上記変形例1で例示した凹部を有する導電膜24bを、本構成に適用した場合の例を示している。また図10C、図10Dには、上記変形例2と同様に絶縁層31を設けない場合の例を示している。なお、ここでは示さないが、上記変形例3と同様に、絶縁層31及び絶縁層33を設けない構成としてもよい。 Furthermore, Figure 10B shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses exemplified in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration. Furthermore, Figures 10C and 10D show an example in which the insulating layer 31 is not provided, as in Variation 2 above. Although not shown here, a configuration in which the insulating layer 31 and insulating layer 33 are not provided may also be used, as in Variation 3 above.
〔変形例5〕
図11Aに示す構成は、半導体層21のY方向の断面視において、一対の領域21aの間に領域21bが配置されている点で、上記構成例と主に相違している。
[Modification 5]
The configuration shown in FIG. 11A differs from the above-described configuration example mainly in that a region 21b is disposed between a pair of regions 21a in a cross-sectional view of the semiconductor layer 21 in the Y direction.
開口部47に設けられた2つのトランジスタ20の間において、領域21bで分断された一対の領域21aが形成されている。また絶縁層32は、領域21bの上面に接して設けられる。このとき、領域21aと領域21bの境界は、絶縁層22、導電層23、及び絶縁層31の側面と概略面一であることが好ましい。言い換えると、領域21bが、一対の絶縁層22の間の領域、一対の導電層23の間の領域、及び一対の絶縁層31の間の領域と重なるように設けられることが好ましい。 A pair of regions 21a separated by region 21b is formed between two transistors 20 provided in opening 47. Furthermore, insulating layer 32 is provided in contact with the upper surface of region 21b. In this case, it is preferable that the boundary between region 21a and region 21b is roughly flush with the side surfaces of insulating layer 22, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 31. In other words, it is preferable that region 21b is provided so as to overlap the region between the pair of insulating layers 22, the region between the pair of conductive layers 23, and the region between the pair of insulating layers 31.
また、図11Bには、上記変形例1で例示した凹部を有する導電膜24bを、本構成に適用した場合の例を示している。また図11C、図11Dには、上記変形例2と同様に絶縁層31を設けない場合の例を示している。なお、ここでは示さないが、上記変形例3と同様に、絶縁層31及び絶縁層33を設けない構成としてもよい。 Furthermore, Figure 11B shows an example in which the conductive film 24b having the recesses exemplified in Variation 1 above is applied to this configuration. Furthermore, Figures 11C and 11D show an example in which the insulating layer 31 is not provided, as in Variation 2 above. Although not shown here, a configuration in which the insulating layer 31 and insulating layer 33 are not provided may also be used, as in Variation 3 above.
以上が変形例についての説明である。 The above is an explanation of the modified version.
[作製方法例]
以下では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置の作製方法の一例について説明する。ここでは、上記構成例で例示したメモリセル15を含む半導体装置10を例に挙げて説明する。
[Example of manufacturing method]
An example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described below, taking the semiconductor device 10 including the memory cell 15 exemplified in the above structure example as an example.
なお、半導体装置を構成する薄膜(絶縁膜、半導体膜、導電膜等)は、スパッタリング法、化学気相堆積(CVD:Chemical Vapor Deposition)法、真空蒸着法、パルスレーザー堆積(PLD:Pulsed Laser Deposition)法、原子層堆積(ALD:Atomic Layer Deposition)法等を用いて形成することができる。CVD法としては、プラズマ化学気相堆積(PECVD:Plasma Enhanced CVD)法、熱CVD法などがある。また、熱CVD法のひとつに、有機金属化学気相堆積(MOCVD:Metal Organic CVD)法がある。 The thin films (insulating films, semiconductor films, conductive films, etc.) that make up semiconductor devices can be formed using methods such as sputtering, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), vacuum evaporation, pulsed laser deposition (PLD), and atomic layer deposition (ALD). CVD methods include plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition (PECVD) and thermal CVD. One type of thermal CVD method is metal organic chemical vapor deposition (MOCVD).
また、半導体装置を構成する薄膜(絶縁膜、半導体膜、導電膜等)は、スピンコート、ディップ、スプレー塗布、インクジェット、ディスペンス、スクリーン印刷、オフセット印刷、ドクターナイフ、スリットコート、ロールコート、カーテンコート、ナイフコート等の方法により形成することができる。 Furthermore, thin films (insulating films, semiconductor films, conductive films, etc.) that make up semiconductor devices can be formed by methods such as spin coating, dipping, spray coating, inkjet printing, dispensing, screen printing, offset printing, doctor knife, slit coating, roll coating, curtain coating, and knife coating.
スパッタリング法にはスパッタリング用電源に高周波電源を用いるRFスパッタリング法、直流電源を用いるDCスパッタリング法、さらにパルス的に電極に印加する電圧を変化させるパルスDCスパッタリング法がある。絶縁性のターゲットを用いた成膜には、RFスパッタリング法を用いることが好ましい。DCスパッタリング法は主に導電性のターゲットを用いて成膜する場合に用いられる。またDCスパッタリング法では、導電膜の形成のほか、パルスDCスパッタリング法を用いたリアクティブスパッタリングにより、絶縁膜の形成も可能である。具体的には、パルスDCスパッタリング法は、酸化物、窒化物、炭化物などの化合物をリアクティブスパッタリング法により成膜する際に用いることができる。 Sputtering methods include RF sputtering, which uses a high-frequency power supply for sputtering; DC sputtering, which uses a direct current power supply; and pulsed DC sputtering, which changes the voltage applied to the electrode in a pulsed manner. RF sputtering is preferable for depositing films using insulating targets. DC sputtering is mainly used when depositing films using conductive targets. In addition to forming conductive films, DC sputtering can also be used to form insulating films through reactive sputtering using pulsed DC sputtering. Specifically, pulsed DC sputtering can be used when depositing films of compounds such as oxides, nitrides, and carbides using reactive sputtering.
CVD法は、プラズマを利用するプラズマCVD(PECVD)法、熱を利用する熱CVD(TCVD:Thermal CVD)法、光を利用する光CVD(Photo CVD)法などに分類できる。さらに用いる原料ガスによって金属CVD(MCVD:Metal CVD)法、MOCVD法に分けることができる。 CVD methods can be classified into plasma-enhanced CVD (PECVD), which uses plasma; thermal CVD (TCVD), which uses heat; and photo-CVD (photo-CVD), which uses light. They can also be further divided into metal CVD (MCVD) and MOCVD, depending on the source gas used.
プラズマCVD法は、比較的低温で高品質の膜が得られる。また、熱CVD法は、プラズマを用いないため、被処理物へのプラズマダメージを小さくすることが可能である。また、熱CVD法では、成膜中のプラズマダメージが生じないため、欠陥の少ない膜が得られる。 Plasma CVD can produce high-quality films at relatively low temperatures. Furthermore, because thermal CVD does not use plasma, it is possible to minimize plasma damage to the workpiece. Furthermore, because thermal CVD does not cause plasma damage during film formation, it can produce films with fewer defects.
ALD法としては、プリカーサ及びリアクタントの反応を熱エネルギーのみで行う熱ALD法、プラズマ励起されたリアクタントを用いるPEALD法などを用いることができる。 ALD methods that can be used include thermal ALD, in which the reaction between the precursor and reactant is carried out using only thermal energy, and PEALD, which uses plasma-excited reactants.
CVD法およびALD法はスパッタリング法とは異なり、被処理物の形状の影響を受けにくく、良好な段差被覆性を有する成膜方法である。特に、ALD法は、優れた段差被覆性と、優れた厚さの均一性を有するため、アスペクト比の高い開口部の表面を被覆する場合などに好適である。ただし、ALD法は、比較的成膜速度が遅いため、成膜速度の速いCVD法などの他の成膜方法と組み合わせて用いることが好ましい場合もある。 Unlike sputtering, CVD and ALD are film formation methods that are less affected by the shape of the workpiece and have good step coverage. ALD, in particular, has excellent step coverage and excellent thickness uniformity, making it suitable for coating the surfaces of openings with high aspect ratios. However, because ALD has a relatively slow film formation rate, it may be preferable to use it in combination with other film formation methods, such as CVD, which has a faster film formation rate.
CVD法では、原料ガスの流量比によって、任意の組成の膜を成膜することができる。例えば、CVD法では、成膜しながら原料ガスの流量比を変化させることによって、組成が連続的に変化した膜を成膜することができる。原料ガスの流量比を変化させながら成膜する場合、複数の成膜室を用いて成膜する場合と比べて、搬送または圧力調整に掛かる時間を要さない分、成膜に掛かる時間を短くすることができる。したがって、半導体装置の生産性を高めることができる場合がある。 The CVD method allows for the deposition of films of any composition by adjusting the flow rate ratio of the raw material gases. For example, the CVD method allows for the deposition of films with continuously changing compositions by changing the flow rate ratio of the raw material gases while the film is being deposited. When depositing films while changing the flow rate ratio of the raw material gases, the time required for film deposition can be shortened compared to when multiple deposition chambers are used, as no time is required for transport or pressure adjustment. This can potentially increase the productivity of semiconductor devices.
ALD法では、異なる複数種のプリカーサを同時に導入することで任意の組成の膜を成膜することができる。または、異なる複数種のプリカーサを導入する場合、各プリカーサのサイクル数を制御することで任意の組成の膜を成膜することができる。またCVD法と同様に、組成が連続的に変化した膜を成膜することができる。 With the ALD method, films of any desired composition can be deposited by simultaneously introducing multiple different types of precursors. Alternatively, when multiple different types of precursors are introduced, films of any desired composition can be deposited by controlling the number of cycles of each precursor. Also, as with the CVD method, films with continuously changing compositions can be deposited.
また、半導体装置を構成する薄膜は、フォトリソグラフィ法等を用いて加工することができる。それ以外に、ナノインプリント法、サンドブラスト法、リフトオフ法などにより薄膜を加工してもよい。また、メタルマスクなどの遮蔽マスクを用いた成膜方法により、島状の薄膜を直接形成してもよい。 Furthermore, the thin films that make up the semiconductor device can be processed using methods such as photolithography. Alternatively, the thin films may be processed using methods such as nanoimprinting, sandblasting, and lift-off. Furthermore, island-shaped thin films may be directly formed using a film-forming method that uses a shielding mask such as a metal mask.
フォトリソグラフィ法としては、代表的には以下の2つの方法がある。一つは、加工したい薄膜上にレジストマスクを形成して、エッチング等により当該薄膜を加工し、レジストマスクを除去する方法である。もう一つは、感光性を有する薄膜を成膜した後に、露光、現像を行って、当該薄膜を所望の形状に加工する方法である。 There are two typical photolithography methods. One is to form a resist mask on the thin film to be processed, process the thin film by etching or other methods, and then remove the resist mask. The other is to form a photosensitive thin film, then expose and develop it to process it into the desired shape.
フォトリソグラフィ法において、露光に用いる光は、例えばi線(波長365nm)、g線(波長436nm)、h線(波長405nm)、またはこれらを混合させた光を用いることができる。そのほか、紫外線、KrFレーザ光、またはArFレーザ光等を用いることもできる。また、液浸露光技術により露光を行ってもよい。また、露光に用いる光として、極端紫外(EUV:Extreme Ultra−Violet)光、X線を用いてもよい。また、露光に用いる光に代えて、電子ビームを用いることもできる。極端紫外光、X線または電子ビームを用いると、極めて微細な加工が可能となるため好ましい。なお、電子ビームなどのビームを走査することにより露光を行う場合には、フォトマスクは不要である。 In photolithography, the light used for exposure can be, for example, i-line (wavelength 365 nm), g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), or a mixture of these. Other light sources that can be used include ultraviolet light, KrF laser light, and ArF laser light. Exposure can also be performed using immersion exposure technology. Extreme ultraviolet (EUV) light or X-rays can also be used as light for exposure. Electron beams can also be used instead of light for exposure. Extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, or electron beams are preferred because they enable extremely fine processing. When exposure is performed by scanning a beam such as an electron beam, a photomask is not required.
薄膜のエッチングには、ドライエッチング法、ウェットエッチング法、サンドブラスト法などを用いることができる。 Methods such as dry etching, wet etching, and sandblasting can be used to etch thin films.
図12A乃至図21は、以下で説明する作製方法例における、各工程に対応する断面概略図である。図12A乃至図12C、図13A、図14A、図15A、図16A、図17A乃至図21は、図1A中に示す切断線O−P−Qにおける断面に相当する。また、図13B、図14B、図15B、図16Bは、図1A中に示す切断線R−Sにおける断面に相当する。 FIGS. 12A to 21 are schematic cross-sectional views corresponding to each step in the exemplary fabrication method described below. FIGS. 12A to 12C, 13A, 14A, 15A, 16A, and 17A to 21 correspond to cross sections taken along the line O-P-Q in FIG. 1A. Also, FIGS. 13B, 14B, 15B, and 16B correspond to cross sections taken along the line R-S in FIG. 1A.
まず、基板(図示しない)を準備し、当該基板上に絶縁層11を形成し、絶縁層11上に絶縁層41を形成する。 First, a substrate (not shown) is prepared, an insulating layer 11 is formed on the substrate, and an insulating layer 41 is formed on the insulating layer 11.
基板としては、少なくとも後の熱処理に耐えうる程度の耐熱性を有する基板を用いることができる。 The substrate used can be one that is heat-resistant enough to withstand at least the subsequent heat treatment.
絶縁層11としては、酸化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜などの無機絶縁膜を用いることができる。また、絶縁層41としては、窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜などの無機絶縁膜を用いることができる。絶縁層11及び絶縁層41の成膜は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、ALD法などを用いることができる。絶縁層11の被形成面が平坦でない場合には、絶縁層11の成膜後に絶縁層11の上面が平坦となるように平坦化処理を行ってもよい。 Insulating layer 11 can be an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film or a silicon oxynitride film. Insulating layer 41 can be an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride oxide film. The insulating layers 11 and 41 can be formed by sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, ALD, or other methods. If the surface on which insulating layer 11 is to be formed is not flat, a planarization process may be performed after insulating layer 11 is formed to flatten the top surface of insulating layer 11.
続いて、絶縁層41上に導電膜24aとなる導電膜、及び導電膜24bとなる導電膜を順に成膜する。各導電膜は、それぞれスパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。続いて、導電膜24bとなる導電膜上にレジストマスクを形成して、各導電膜の不要な部分をエッチングにより除去することで、導電膜24a及び導電膜24bを含む導電層24を形成する。ここで、導電層24は、X方向に延在して形成される。 Next, a conductive film that will become conductive film 24a and a conductive film that will become conductive film 24b are formed in this order on insulating layer 41. Each conductive film can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD. Next, a resist mask is formed on the conductive film that will become conductive film 24b, and unnecessary portions of each conductive film are removed by etching, thereby forming conductive layer 24 including conductive film 24a and conductive film 24b. Here, conductive layer 24 is formed to extend in the X direction.
続いて、導電層24を覆って絶縁層42となる絶縁膜を成膜したのちに、導電膜24bの上面が露出するまで平坦化処理を行うことで、絶縁層42を形成することができる(図12A)。絶縁層42となる絶縁膜は、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。 Next, an insulating film that will become insulating layer 42 is formed to cover conductive layer 24, and then planarization is performed until the top surface of conductive film 24b is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 42 (Figure 12A). The insulating film that will become insulating layer 42 can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
なお、ここでは導電層24の形成後に絶縁層42を形成する例を示したが、絶縁層42の形成後に導電層24を形成してもよい。その場合、絶縁層42となる絶縁膜を成膜したのちに、導電層24を埋め込むための開口(または凹部)を形成することで絶縁層42が形成される。その後、それぞれ導電膜24a、導電膜24bとなる2つの導電膜を順に成膜したのち、絶縁層42の上面が露出するまで平坦化処理を行うことで、導電層24を形成することができる。 Note that although an example has been shown in which insulating layer 42 is formed after conductive layer 24 has been formed, conductive layer 24 may also be formed after insulating layer 42 has been formed. In this case, after depositing an insulating film that will become insulating layer 42, an opening (or recess) for burying conductive layer 24 is formed to form insulating layer 42. Thereafter, two conductive films that will become conductive film 24a and conductive film 24b are deposited in order, and then a planarization process is performed until the top surface of insulating layer 42 is exposed, thereby forming conductive layer 24.
続いて、導電層24及び絶縁層42上に絶縁層43を形成する(図12B)。まず絶縁層43となる絶縁膜を成膜する。次にフォトリソグラフィ法により当該絶縁膜をエッチングして、Y方向に延在された開口部47を形成する。開口部47は、導電膜25b及び絶縁層42に達するように形成する。このようにして、開口部47を有する絶縁層43を形成することができる。絶縁層43の形成後、開口部47において、導電膜24b、及び絶縁層42の上面が露出する。ここで、開口部47の底面の端部は、図7Aなどに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状であることが好ましい。 Next, an insulating layer 43 is formed on the conductive layer 24 and the insulating layer 42 (Figure 12B). First, an insulating film that will become the insulating layer 43 is deposited. Next, the insulating film is etched using photolithography to form an opening 47 extending in the Y direction. The opening 47 is formed so as to reach the conductive film 25b and the insulating layer 42. In this way, the insulating layer 43 having the opening 47 can be formed. After the insulating layer 43 is formed, the upper surfaces of the conductive film 24b and the insulating layer 42 are exposed in the opening 47. Here, it is preferable that the edge of the bottom surface of the opening 47 has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 7A, etc.
なお、絶縁層43の加工時に、絶縁層42がエッチングされ、薄膜化してしまう恐れがある。その場合には、絶縁層43となる絶縁膜の下にエッチングストップ膜として機能する絶縁層を設け、エッチングにより絶縁層43を形成したのちに、当該エッチングストップ膜を続けてエッチングすることで、絶縁層42等の上面を露出させることができる。 It should be noted that when processing insulating layer 43, there is a risk that insulating layer 42 may be etched and become thinner. In such cases, an insulating layer that functions as an etching stop film can be provided below the insulating film that will become insulating layer 43. After forming insulating layer 43 by etching, the etching stop film can be subsequently etched to expose the top surface of insulating layer 42, etc.
ここで、絶縁層43の厚さがトランジスタのチャネル長に影響するため、絶縁層43は厚さにばらつきが生じないようにすることが重要である。 Here, since the thickness of the insulating layer 43 affects the channel length of the transistor, it is important to ensure that the thickness of the insulating layer 43 does not vary.
絶縁層43の加工の際、側面が概略垂直となるように、異方性のドライエッチングにより加工することが好ましい。なお、加工条件によっては絶縁層43の側面が被形成面に垂直な方向に対して傾斜し、テーパ形状となる場合がある。 When processing the insulating layer 43, it is preferable to use anisotropic dry etching so that the side surfaces are roughly vertical. However, depending on the processing conditions, the side surfaces of the insulating layer 43 may be inclined relative to the direction perpendicular to the surface on which they are formed, resulting in a tapered shape.
また、絶縁層43の加工時に、導電膜24bの上部の一部をエッチングし、絶縁層43と重ならない領域の厚さを薄くすることができる。これにより、図8B等で示した、凹部を有する導電膜24bを形成することができる。このとき、導電膜24bが消失しないようにエッチング条件を決定する、またはあらかじめ導電膜24bを厚く形成しておくことが好ましい。ここで、導電膜24bの凹部の端部は、図8Bに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状であることが好ましい。 Furthermore, when processing the insulating layer 43, a portion of the upper part of the conductive film 24b can be etched to reduce the thickness of the area that does not overlap with the insulating layer 43. This allows the conductive film 24b with a recess, as shown in Figure 8B, etc., to be formed. At this time, it is preferable to determine the etching conditions so that the conductive film 24b does not disappear, or to form the conductive film 24b thick in advance. Here, it is preferable that the end of the recess in the conductive film 24b has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 8B.
絶縁層43となる絶縁膜は、加熱により酸素が放出される程度に酸素を多く含み、且つ、水素の含有量の少ない酸化物膜を用いることが好ましい。絶縁層43となる絶縁膜は、PECVD法、スパッタリング法、ALD法などの成膜方法により成膜できるが、特にスパッタリング法により成膜することが好ましい。特に、成膜ガスに水素が含まれるガスを用いず、且つ、酸素を含むガスを用いて成膜することにより、水素含有量が極めて少なく、且つ、酸素を過剰に含む絶縁膜を成膜することができる。このように、絶縁層43となる絶縁膜を成膜することで、絶縁層43から半導体層21のチャネル形成領域に酸素を供給し、酸素欠損の低減を図ることができる。 The insulating film that becomes insulating layer 43 is preferably an oxide film that contains enough oxygen to release oxygen when heated and has a low hydrogen content. The insulating film that becomes insulating layer 43 can be formed by a film formation method such as PECVD, sputtering, or ALD, but sputtering is particularly preferred. In particular, by forming the film using a gas that does not contain hydrogen and instead contains oxygen, an insulating film with an extremely low hydrogen content and excess oxygen can be formed. By forming the insulating film that becomes insulating layer 43 in this way, oxygen can be supplied from insulating layer 43 to the channel formation region of semiconductor layer 21, reducing oxygen vacancies.
続いて、加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱処理は、250℃以上650℃以下、好ましくは300℃以上500℃以下、さらに好ましくは320℃以上450℃以下で行えばよい。なお、加熱処理は、窒素ガスもしくは不活性ガスの雰囲気、または酸化性ガスを10ppm以上、1%以上、もしくは10%以上含む雰囲気で行う。例えば、窒素ガスと酸素ガスの混合雰囲気で加熱処理をする場合、酸素ガスを20%程度にすればよい。また、加熱処理は減圧状態で行ってもよい。または、加熱処理は、窒素ガスもしくは不活性ガスの雰囲気で加熱処理した後に、脱離した酸素を補うために酸化性ガスを10ppm以上、1%以上、または10%以上含む雰囲気で行ってもよい。以上のような加熱処理を行うことで、半導体層となる酸化物半導体膜の成膜前に、絶縁層43などに含まれる、水、水素などの不純物を低減できる。 Subsequently, heat treatment may be performed. The heat treatment may be performed at a temperature of 250°C to 650°C, preferably 300°C to 500°C, and more preferably 320°C to 450°C. Note that the heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere, or an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more. For example, when the heat treatment is performed in a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas, the oxygen gas concentration may be approximately 20%. The heat treatment may be performed under reduced pressure. Alternatively, the heat treatment may be performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere, followed by an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more to replenish desorbed oxygen. By performing the above-described heat treatment, impurities such as water and hydrogen contained in the insulating layer 43 or the like can be reduced before the formation of an oxide semiconductor film that serves as a semiconductor layer.
また、上記加熱処理で用いるガスは、高純度化されていることが好ましい。例えば、上記加熱処理で用いるガスに含まれる水分量が1ppb(0.001ppm)以下、好ましくは0.1ppb以下、より好ましくは0.05ppb以下にすればよい。高純度化されたガスを用いて加熱処理を行うことで、絶縁層43などに水分等が取り込まれることを可能な限り防ぐことができる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the gas used in the heat treatment be highly purified. For example, the amount of moisture contained in the gas used in the heat treatment should be 1 ppb (0.001 ppm) or less, preferably 0.1 ppb or less, and more preferably 0.05 ppb or less. By using highly purified gas to perform the heat treatment, it is possible to prevent moisture and other substances from being absorbed into the insulating layer 43, etc., as much as possible.
絶縁層43となる絶縁膜の成膜後、または絶縁層43に加工した後に、酸素を供給する処理を行ってもよい。これにより、のちに半導体膜21fの形成後にかかる熱などにより、絶縁層43から半導体膜21fに酸素を供給することができる。 After forming the insulating film that will become insulating layer 43, or after processing it into insulating layer 43, a process for supplying oxygen may be carried out. This allows oxygen to be supplied from insulating layer 43 to semiconductor film 21f later, due to heat or other factors applied after the formation of semiconductor film 21f.
酸素を供給する処理としては、例えば、酸素を含む雰囲気下での加熱処理、酸素を含む雰囲気下でのプラズマ処理(マイクロ波プラズマ処理を含む)などが挙げられる。ここで、マイクロ波プラズマ処理とは、例えばマイクロ波を用いて高密度プラズマを発生させる電源を有する装置を用いた処理のことを指す場合がある。または、スパッタリング法により酸素を含む雰囲気下にて、酸化物膜(好適には金属酸化物膜)を成膜することで、絶縁層に酸素を供給してもよい。成膜した酸化物膜は、直後に除去してもよいし、そのまま残してもよい。なお、酸素を含む雰囲気としては、酸素ガス(O2)だけでなく、オゾン(O3)、一酸化二窒素(N2O)などの酸素を含む化合物のガスを含む雰囲気を含む。 Examples of treatments for supplying oxygen include heat treatment in an oxygen-containing atmosphere and plasma treatment (including microwave plasma treatment) in an oxygen-containing atmosphere. Here, microwave plasma treatment may refer to treatment using, for example, an apparatus having a power source that generates high-density plasma using microwaves. Alternatively, oxygen may be supplied to the insulating layer by depositing an oxide film (preferably a metal oxide film) in an oxygen-containing atmosphere by sputtering. The deposited oxide film may be removed immediately or may be left as is. Note that the oxygen-containing atmosphere includes not only oxygen gas (O 2 ) but also atmospheres containing gases of oxygen-containing compounds such as ozone (O 3 ) and dinitrogen monoxide (N 2 O).
続いて、絶縁層43、導電膜24b、及び絶縁層42を覆って、のちに半導体層21となる半導体膜21fを成膜する(図12C)。 Next, a semiconductor film 21f, which will later become the semiconductor layer 21, is deposited to cover the insulating layer 43, the conductive film 24b, and the insulating layer 42 (Figure 12C).
半導体膜21fとしては、半導体特性を有する金属酸化物(酸化物半導体)膜を用いることができる。当該金属酸化物膜の成膜は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、ALD法などを適宜用いて行えばよい。ここで、当該金属酸化物膜は、絶縁層43の概略垂直な側面に接して形成されることが好ましい。そのため、当該金属酸化物膜の成膜は、被覆性が良好な成膜方法を用いることが好ましく、ALD法を用いることがより好ましい。 A metal oxide (oxide semiconductor) film with semiconductor properties can be used as the semiconductor film 21f. The metal oxide film can be formed using a suitable method, such as sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. It is preferable that the metal oxide film be formed in contact with the substantially vertical side surfaces of the insulating layer 43. Therefore, it is preferable to use a film formation method with good coverage for forming the metal oxide film, and it is more preferable to use the ALD method.
金属酸化物膜は、結晶性を有すると好ましい。本発明の一態様の金属酸化物膜は特に、CAAC構造を有する金属酸化物を有することが好ましい。 The metal oxide film preferably has crystallinity. In one embodiment of the present invention, the metal oxide film preferably has a metal oxide having a CAAC structure.
なお、金属酸化物膜の成膜中または金属酸化物膜の成膜後に、金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高める処理を行うと好適である。当該金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高める処理としては、例えば、加熱処理、プラズマ処理、マイクロ波(代表的には、2.45GHz)処理、マイクロ波プラズマ処理、及び光(例えば、紫外光)照射処理が挙げられる。なお、これらの処理のうち複数種を、同時に、または順に行ってもよい。例えば、加熱処理とマイクロ波プラズマ処理とを同時に行うことができる。または、加熱処理を行ったのち、マイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うことができる。 It is preferable to perform a treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film during or after the formation of the metal oxide film. Examples of treatments to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film include heat treatment, plasma treatment, microwave (typically 2.45 GHz) treatment, microwave plasma treatment, and light (e.g., ultraviolet light) irradiation treatment. Note that several of these treatments may be performed simultaneously or sequentially. For example, heat treatment and microwave plasma treatment may be performed simultaneously. Alternatively, microwave plasma treatment may be performed after heat treatment.
また、金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高める処理は、金属酸化物膜の成膜中に複数回行うと、より好適である。例えば、金属酸化物膜をALD法にて形成する場合、原子層を1層形成する毎にマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うと好適である。または、所定の範囲の膜厚の金属酸化物膜を形成する毎に結晶性を高める処理を行うと、生産性を高めることができ、好ましい。具体的には、1nm以上10nm以下の第1の金属酸化物膜を形成し、第1のマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行い、その後、1nm以上10nm以下の第2の金属酸化物膜を形成し、第2のマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行うと好適である。 Furthermore, it is more preferable to perform the treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film multiple times during the formation of the metal oxide film. For example, when forming a metal oxide film using the ALD method, it is preferable to perform microwave plasma treatment after each atomic layer is formed. Alternatively, it is preferable to perform the treatment to increase the crystallinity after each metal oxide film of a predetermined thickness is formed, as this increases productivity. Specifically, it is preferable to form a first metal oxide film of 1 nm to 10 nm in thickness, perform the first microwave plasma treatment, and then form a second metal oxide film of 1 nm to 10 nm in thickness, and perform the second microwave plasma treatment.
なお、第1の金属酸化物膜、及び第2の金属酸化物膜の成膜方法に特に限定はなく、それぞれ、ALD法またはスパッタリング法を用いればよい。特に、第1の金属酸化物膜をALD法で成膜することで、第1の金属酸化物膜中、及び第2の金属酸化物膜中に、被形成面を構成する層の元素が混入すること(ミキシングともいう)を防ぐことができ、好ましい。特に、被形成面を構成する層に含まれる当該元素が、金属酸化物の結晶化を阻害する場合(例えばシリコン、炭素などを含む場合)に好適である。また、第1の金属酸化物膜、及び第2の金属酸化物膜は、互いに異なる組成であってもよい。また、ここでは、第1の金属酸化物膜と、第2の金属酸化物膜と、の積層構造について例示したがこれに限定されない。金属酸化物膜は、単層、または3層以上の積層構造でも同様の処理を適用することができる。 There are no particular limitations on the deposition method for the first metal oxide film and the second metal oxide film; ALD or sputtering may be used, respectively. Depositing the first metal oxide film by ALD is particularly preferable because it prevents elements from the layers constituting the surface to be formed from being mixed into the first metal oxide film and the second metal oxide film (also known as mixing). This is particularly suitable when the elements contained in the layers constituting the surface to be formed inhibit the crystallization of the metal oxide (e.g., when silicon, carbon, etc. are included). The first metal oxide film and the second metal oxide film may have different compositions. While a stacked structure of a first metal oxide film and a second metal oxide film is illustrated here, this is not a limitation. Similar processing can be applied to metal oxide films with a single layer or a stacked structure of three or more layers.
また、金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高める処理は、金属酸化物膜の成膜後に行ってもよい。具体的には、当該処理を、成膜後の金属酸化物膜に対して直接行ってもよいし、金属酸化物膜上に成膜した絶縁膜などの他の膜を介して当該処理を行ってもよい。例えば、金属酸化物膜の成膜後にマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行う、または金属酸化物膜の成膜後に絶縁膜(例えば、窒化シリコン膜、酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜など)を成膜したのち、当該絶縁膜を介して金属酸化物膜に加熱処理またはマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行ってもよい。 Furthermore, treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film may be performed after the metal oxide film is formed. Specifically, this treatment may be performed directly on the formed metal oxide film, or may be performed via another film, such as an insulating film, formed on the metal oxide film. For example, microwave plasma treatment may be performed after the metal oxide film is formed, or an insulating film (e.g., a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, etc.) may be formed after the metal oxide film is formed, and then heat treatment or microwave plasma treatment may be performed on the metal oxide film via the insulating film.
なお、上述の金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高める処理は、金属酸化物膜に含まれる不純物を除去する処理を兼ねることができる。例えば、金属酸化物膜に含まれる、炭素、水素、窒素などを好適に除去することができる。または金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高める処理を酸素ガス雰囲気中で行うことで、金属酸化物膜中の酸素欠損を低減させることができる。 The above-mentioned treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film can also serve as a treatment to remove impurities contained in the metal oxide film. For example, carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, and the like contained in the metal oxide film can be preferably removed. Alternatively, by performing the treatment to increase the crystallinity of the metal oxide film in an oxygen gas atmosphere, oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide film can be reduced.
金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高める処理を行う際には、加熱処理の温度(基板の温度)を、室温(例えば25℃)以上、100℃以上700℃以下、100℃以上600℃以下、または300℃以上450℃以下とすることが好ましい。 When performing a process to increase the crystallinity of a metal oxide film, it is preferable to set the temperature of the heat treatment (substrate temperature) to room temperature (e.g., 25°C) or higher, 100°C or higher and 700°C or lower, 100°C or higher and 600°C or lower, or 300°C or higher and 450°C or lower.
金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高めることで、信頼性が良好なトランジスタを実現することができる。 By improving the crystallinity of the metal oxide film, it is possible to create highly reliable transistors.
金属酸化物膜は、例えば金属酸化物ターゲットを用いたスパッタリング法により形成することができる。 Metal oxide films can be formed, for example, by sputtering using a metal oxide target.
金属酸化物膜は、可能な限り欠陥の少ない緻密な膜とすることが好ましい。また、金属酸化物膜は、可能な限り水素、水などの不純物が低減され、高純度な膜であることが好ましい。特に、金属酸化物膜として、結晶性を有する金属酸化物膜を用いることが好ましい。 It is preferable that the metal oxide film be a dense film with as few defects as possible. It is also preferable that the metal oxide film be a highly pure film with as little impurities as possible, such as hydrogen and water. It is particularly preferable to use a crystalline metal oxide film as the metal oxide film.
また、金属酸化物膜を成膜する際に、酸素ガスと、不活性ガス(例えば、ヘリウムガス、アルゴンガス、キセノンガスなど)とを混合させてもよい。なお、金属酸化物膜を成膜する際の成膜ガス全体に占める酸素ガスの割合(以下、酸素流量比ともいう)が高いほど、金属酸化物膜の結晶性を高めることができ、信頼性の高いトランジスタを実現できる。一方、酸素流量比が低いほど、金属酸化物膜の結晶性が低くなり、オン電流が高められたトランジスタとすることができる。 Furthermore, when forming a metal oxide film, oxygen gas may be mixed with an inert gas (e.g., helium gas, argon gas, xenon gas, etc.). Note that the higher the ratio of oxygen gas to the total film-forming gas when forming the metal oxide film (hereinafter also referred to as the oxygen flow ratio), the more highly crystallinity the metal oxide film can be, resulting in a highly reliable transistor. On the other hand, the lower the oxygen flow ratio, the less highly crystallinity the metal oxide film can be, resulting in a transistor with a higher on-state current.
金属酸化物膜を成膜する際、基板温度が高いほど、結晶性が高く、緻密な金属酸化物膜とすることができる。一方、基板温度が低いほど、結晶性が低く、電気伝導性の高い金属酸化物膜とすることができる。 When forming a metal oxide film, the higher the substrate temperature, the higher the crystallinity and density of the resulting metal oxide film. On the other hand, the lower the substrate temperature, the lower the crystallinity and electrical conductivity of the resulting metal oxide film.
金属酸化物膜の成膜条件としては、基板温度を室温以上250℃以下、好ましくは室温以上200℃以下、より好ましくは基板温度を室温以上140℃以下とすればよい。例えば基板温度を、室温以上140℃未満とすると、生産性が高くなり好ましい。また、基板温度を室温とする、または意図的に加熱しない状態で、金属酸化物膜を成膜することにより、結晶性を低くすることができる。 The conditions for forming the metal oxide film are that the substrate temperature be between room temperature and 250°C, preferably between room temperature and 200°C, and more preferably between room temperature and 140°C. For example, a substrate temperature between room temperature and less than 140°C is preferred, as this increases productivity. Furthermore, by forming the metal oxide film at room temperature or without intentionally heating the substrate, the crystallinity can be reduced.
ALD法を用いる場合、熱ALD(Atomic Layer Deposition)法、またはPEALD(Plasma Enhanced ALD)等の成膜方法を用いることが好ましい。熱ALD法は極めて高い段差被覆性を示すため好ましい。またPEALD法は、高い段差被覆性を示すことに加え低温成膜が可能であるため好ましい。 When using the ALD method, it is preferable to use a film formation method such as thermal ALD (Atomic Layer Deposition) or PEALD (Plasma Enhanced ALD). The thermal ALD method is preferred because it exhibits extremely high step coverage. The PEALD method is also preferred because it not only exhibits high step coverage but also allows for low-temperature film formation.
例えば、半導体層21に金属酸化物を用いる場合、構成する金属元素を含むプリカーサと、酸化剤と、を用いてALD法により成膜することができる。 For example, if a metal oxide is used for the semiconductor layer 21, it can be deposited by the ALD method using a precursor containing the constituent metal elements and an oxidizing agent.
例えば、In−Ga−Zn酸化物を成膜する場合には、インジウムを含むプリカーサ、ガリウムを含むプリカーサ、および亜鉛を含むプリカーサの、3つのプリカーサを用いることができる。または、インジウムを含むプリカーサと、ガリウム及び亜鉛を含むプリカーサの2つのプリカーサを用いてもよい。 For example, when depositing an In-Ga-Zn oxide film, three precursors can be used: a precursor containing indium, a precursor containing gallium, and a precursor containing zinc. Alternatively, two precursors can be used: a precursor containing indium and a precursor containing gallium and zinc.
インジウムを含むプリカーサとして、トリメチルインジウム、トリエチルインジウム、トリス(2,2,6,6−テトラメチル−3,5−ヘプタンジオン酸)インジウム、シクロペンタジエニルインジウム、塩化インジウム(III)、(3−(ジメチルアミノ)プロピル)ジメチルインジウムなどを用いることができる。 Indium-containing precursors that can be used include trimethylindium, triethylindium, tris(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-3,5-heptanedionate)indium, cyclopentadienylindium, indium(III) chloride, and (3-(dimethylamino)propyl)dimethylindium.
また、ガリウムを含むプリカーサとして、トリメチルガリウム、トリエチルガリウム、トリス(ジメチルアミド)ガリウム(III)、ガリウム(III)アセチルアセトナート、トリス(2,2,6,6−テトラメチル−3,5−ヘプタンジオン酸)ガリウム、ジメチルクロロガリウム、ジエチルクロロガリウム、塩化ガリウム(III)などを用いることができる。 Furthermore, precursors containing gallium that can be used include trimethylgallium, triethylgallium, tris(dimethylamido)gallium(III), gallium(III) acetylacetonate, tris(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-3,5-heptanedionate)gallium, dimethylchlorogallium, diethylchlorogallium, and gallium(III) chloride.
また、亜鉛を含むプリカーサとして、ジメチル亜鉛、ジエチル亜鉛、ビス(2,2,6,6−テトラメチル−3,5−ヘプタンジオン酸)亜鉛、塩化亜鉛などを用いることができる。 Furthermore, zinc-containing precursors that can be used include dimethyl zinc, diethyl zinc, zinc bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-3,5-heptanedionate), zinc chloride, etc.
酸化剤としては、例えば、オゾン、酸素、水などを用いることができる。 Examples of oxidizing agents that can be used include ozone, oxygen, and water.
得られる膜の組成を制御する方法としては、原料ガスの流量比、原料ガスを流す時間、原料ガスを流す順番などを調整することが挙げられる。また、これらを調整することで、組成が連続して変化する膜を成膜することもできる。また、組成の異なる2以上の膜を連続して成膜することも可能となる。 Methods for controlling the composition of the resulting film include adjusting the flow rate ratio of the raw material gases, the time for which the raw material gases are flowed, and the order in which the raw material gases are flowed. Adjusting these also makes it possible to deposit a film whose composition changes continuously. It is also possible to deposit two or more films with different compositions in succession.
金属酸化物膜の成膜後、加熱処理を行うことが好ましい。加熱処理は、上記金属酸化物膜が多結晶化しない温度範囲で行えばよく、250℃以上650℃以下、好ましくは400℃以上600℃以下で行えばよい。なお、加熱処理は、窒素ガスもしくは不活性ガスの雰囲気、または酸化性ガスを10ppm以上、1%以上、もしくは10%以上含む雰囲気で行う。例えば、窒素ガスと酸素ガスの混合雰囲気で加熱処理をする場合、酸素ガスを20%程度にすればよい。また、加熱処理は減圧状態で行ってもよい。または、窒素ガスもしくは不活性ガスの雰囲気で加熱処理した後に、脱離した酸素を補うために酸化性ガスを10ppm以上、1%以上、または10%以上含む雰囲気で加熱処理を行ってもよい。 After the metal oxide film is formed, it is preferable to perform heat treatment. The heat treatment may be performed within a temperature range in which the metal oxide film does not polycrystallize, such as 250°C to 650°C, preferably 400°C to 600°C. The heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere, or in an atmosphere containing 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more of an oxidizing gas. For example, when performing heat treatment in a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas, the oxygen gas concentration should be approximately 20%. The heat treatment may also be performed under reduced pressure. Alternatively, after heat treatment in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere, heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere containing 10 ppm or more, 1% or more, or 10% or more of an oxidizing gas to replenish the desorbed oxygen.
また、上記加熱処理で用いるガスは、高純度化されていることが好ましい。例えば、上記加熱処理で用いるガスに含まれる水分量が1ppb以下、好ましくは0.1ppb以下、より好ましくは0.05ppb以下にすればよい。高純度化されたガスを用いて加熱処理を行うことで、上記金属酸化物膜などに水分等が取り込まれることを可能な限り防ぐことができる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the gas used in the heat treatment be highly purified. For example, the amount of moisture contained in the gas used in the heat treatment should be 1 ppb or less, preferably 0.1 ppb or less, and more preferably 0.05 ppb or less. By performing the heat treatment using a highly purified gas, it is possible to prevent moisture and other substances from being incorporated into the metal oxide film, etc., as much as possible.
図面では、半導体膜21fを単層で明示しているが、積層構造としてもよい。例えば、ALD法により形成した2層構造、ALD法により形成した3層構造、1層目をALD法により形成し、2層目をスパッタリング法により形成した2層構造、もしくは、1層目をALD法により形成し、2層目をスパッタリング法により形成し、3層目をALD法またはスパッタリング法により形成した3層構造などとすることができる。1層目をALD法で形成することでミキシングを抑制することができるため好ましいが、スパッタリング法により形成することもできる。なお、半導体膜21fは4層以上の積層構造としてもよい。 In the drawings, semiconductor film 21f is shown as a single layer, but it may also have a laminated structure. For example, it may have a two-layer structure formed by the ALD method, a three-layer structure formed by the ALD method, a two-layer structure in which the first layer is formed by the ALD method and the second layer is formed by sputtering, or a three-layer structure in which the first layer is formed by the ALD method, the second layer is formed by sputtering, and the third layer is formed by either the ALD method or the sputtering method. Forming the first layer by the ALD method is preferable because it can suppress mixing, but it can also be formed by sputtering. Semiconductor film 21f may also have a laminated structure of four or more layers.
続いて、犠牲層61と、レジストマスク65を形成する(図13A及び図13B)。レジストマスク65及び犠牲層61は、半導体膜21fに上述した領域21bを形成するためのマスクとして機能する。よって、レジストマスク65の開口は、後の工程で形成する半導体層21の領域21bに重なるように形成される。よって、図13A及び図13Bに示すように、導電層24の上、言い換えると後の工程で領域21aが形成される部分は、レジストマスク65に覆われている。 Next, a sacrificial layer 61 and a resist mask 65 are formed (Figures 13A and 13B). The resist mask 65 and the sacrificial layer 61 function as masks for forming the above-mentioned region 21b in the semiconductor film 21f. Therefore, the opening in the resist mask 65 is formed so as to overlap with region 21b of the semiconductor layer 21, which will be formed in a later step. Therefore, as shown in Figures 13A and 13B, the top of the conductive layer 24, in other words, the portion where region 21a will be formed in a later step, is covered by the resist mask 65.
犠牲層61には、塗布法により形成される有機材料または無機材料を用いることができる。より具体的な例としては、SOC(Spin On Carbon)膜、SOG(Spin On Glass)膜などの塗布型の絶縁膜を用いることができる。そのほか、犠牲層61としては、スパッタリング法、CVD法などの成膜方法により形成することができる。犠牲層61に用いる材料としては、厚く形成できること、垂直に形成または加工できること、除去しやすい(残渣が生じない、被形成面へのダメージが小さい)こと、などの条件を満たすことが好ましい。なお、犠牲層61は不要であれば設けなくてもよい。 The sacrificial layer 61 can be made of an organic or inorganic material formed by a coating method. More specific examples include coated insulating films such as SOC (Spin On Carbon) and SOG (Spin On Glass). The sacrificial layer 61 can also be formed by film formation methods such as sputtering and CVD. It is preferable that the material used for the sacrificial layer 61 satisfy certain conditions, such as being able to be formed thick, being able to be formed or processed vertically, and being easy to remove (leaving no residue and causing minimal damage to the surface on which it is formed). The sacrificial layer 61 need not be provided if it is not required.
続いて、犠牲層61の、レジストマスク65に覆われない部分をエッチングにより除去し、開口を形成する(図14A及び図14B)。つまり、犠牲層61の開口は、後の工程で形成する半導体層21の領域21bに重なるように形成される。 Next, the portions of the sacrificial layer 61 that are not covered by the resist mask 65 are removed by etching to form openings (Figures 14A and 14B). In other words, the openings in the sacrificial layer 61 are formed so as to overlap region 21b of the semiconductor layer 21, which will be formed in a later step.
続いて、レジストマスク65を除去することが好ましい。レジストマスク65の除去は、ウェットエッチング法またはドライエッチング法を用いることができる。また、ドライエッチング後に、プラズマを用いたドライ洗浄、もしくは薬液(酸またはアルカリを含む)、または水(炭酸水を含む)を用いたウェット洗浄を行ってもよい。 Next, it is preferable to remove the resist mask 65. The resist mask 65 can be removed by wet etching or dry etching. After dry etching, dry cleaning using plasma or wet cleaning using a chemical solution (including acid or alkali) or water (including carbonated water) may also be performed.
続いて、半導体膜21f及び犠牲層61を覆って、犠牲層67を成膜する(図15A及び図15B)。犠牲層67は、後の工程で、半導体膜21fに金属元素を添加するための層として機能する。上記の通り金属元素としては、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方が好ましい。よって、犠牲層67は、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方を含む酸化膜が好ましい。例えば、犠牲層67として、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ハフニウムまたはハフニウムアルミネートを用いることができる。ここで、後の工程で、半導体膜21fに酸素が過剰に添加されることを防ぐため、犠牲層67に含まれる酸素量は、化学量論的組成を満たす量よりも少ないことが好ましい。 Next, a sacrificial layer 67 is formed to cover the semiconductor film 21f and the sacrificial layer 61 (Figures 15A and 15B). The sacrificial layer 67 functions as a layer for adding a metal element to the semiconductor film 21f in a later process. As described above, the metal element is preferably either aluminum or hafnium, or both. Therefore, the sacrificial layer 67 is preferably an oxide film containing either aluminum or hafnium, or both. For example, aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, or hafnium aluminate can be used as the sacrificial layer 67. Here, to prevent excessive oxygen from being added to the semiconductor film 21f in a later process, the amount of oxygen contained in the sacrificial layer 67 is preferably less than the amount that satisfies the stoichiometric composition.
図15A及び図15Bに示すように、犠牲層67は、犠牲層61の開口の底部に位置する半導体膜21fに接するように形成する。このため、犠牲層67の成膜方法として、被覆性の良好な成膜方法を用いることが好ましい。また、犠牲層67は、膜厚が薄いことが好ましい。例えば、半導体膜21fより膜厚を薄くすることが好ましく、具体的には、膜厚を0.5nm以上1.0nm以下にすることができる。よって、犠牲層67の成膜には、被覆性が良好、且つ極薄膜を精密な膜厚で成膜可能なALD法を用いることが好ましい。 As shown in Figures 15A and 15B, the sacrificial layer 67 is formed so as to contact the semiconductor film 21f located at the bottom of the opening in the sacrificial layer 61. For this reason, it is preferable to use a film formation method with good coverage for forming the sacrificial layer 67. It is also preferable that the sacrificial layer 67 has a thin film thickness. For example, it is preferable to make the film thickness thinner than the semiconductor film 21f, and specifically, the film thickness can be set to 0.5 nm or more and 1.0 nm or less. Therefore, it is preferable to form the sacrificial layer 67 using the ALD method, which has good coverage and can form an ultra-thin film with a precise thickness.
続いて、プラズマ処理を行って、犠牲層67に含まれる金属元素を半導体膜21fに添加して、領域21fa及び領域21fbを形成する(図16A及び図16B)。膜厚の薄い犠牲層67にプラズマ処理を行うことで、犠牲層67に含まれる金属元素に衝撃を与えて、犠牲層67と半導体膜21fが接する領域において、当該金属元素を半導体膜21fに添加することができる。半導体膜21fの犠牲層67と接する領域は、上記金属元素が添加されて領域21fbとなり、半導体膜21fの犠牲層61に覆われた領域は、上記金属元素が添加されずに領域21faとなる。よって、領域21fbは、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方を含む。また、領域21fbは、領域21faより、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方の濃度が高い。ここで、領域21fb中に、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ハフニウム、及びハフニウムアルミネートのいずれか一または複数が形成される。 Subsequently, plasma treatment is performed to add the metal elements contained in the sacrificial layer 67 to the semiconductor film 21f, forming regions 21fa and 21fb (Figures 16A and 16B). By performing plasma treatment on the thin sacrificial layer 67, the metal elements contained in the sacrificial layer 67 are impacted, allowing the metal elements to be added to the semiconductor film 21f in the region where the sacrificial layer 67 and the semiconductor film 21f contact each other. The region of the semiconductor film 21f in contact with the sacrificial layer 67 is doped with the metal elements and becomes region 21fb, while the region of the semiconductor film 21f covered by the sacrificial layer 61 is not doped with the metal elements and becomes region 21fa. Therefore, region 21fb contains either aluminum or hafnium, or both. Furthermore, region 21fb has a higher concentration of either aluminum or hafnium than region 21fa. Here, one or more of aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, and hafnium aluminate are formed in region 21fb.
また、領域21fbは、上記のように金属元素が添加されることで、酸素欠損が形成されて、結晶性が低下することになる。このようにして、領域21fbはアモルファス構造を有することになる。よって、領域21fbは、領域21faより、酸素欠損量が多く、結晶性が低くなる。このような領域21fbは、領域21faより抵抗率が大きくなる。好ましくは、領域21fbの抵抗率が、領域21faの抵抗率の10倍以上になる。以上のようにして、素子分離領域として機能する領域21fbを形成することができる。 Furthermore, by adding metal elements as described above, oxygen vacancies are formed in region 21fb, resulting in a decrease in crystallinity. In this way, region 21fb has an amorphous structure. Therefore, region 21fb has more oxygen vacancies and lower crystallinity than region 21fa. Such region 21fb has a higher resistivity than region 21fa. Preferably, the resistivity of region 21fb is 10 times or more the resistivity of region 21fa. In this way, region 21fb, which functions as an element isolation region, can be formed.
上記プラズマ処理としては、例えば、逆スパッタリング処理を行うことが好ましい。ここで、逆スパッタリングとは、通常のスパッタリング法においては、スパッタターゲットにイオンを衝突させるところ、逆に、処理表面にイオンを衝突させることによってその表面を改質する方法のことをいう。処理表面にイオンを衝突させる方法としては、アルゴン雰囲気下で処理表面側に高周波電圧を印加して、基板付近にプラズマを生成する方法などがある。逆スパッタリング処理を用いた場合、領域21fbに上記金属元素に加えてアルゴンが添加されることになる。この場合、領域21bにおけるアルゴン濃度が、領域21aにおけるアルゴン濃度より高くなる。なお、アルゴンガスだけでなく、ヘリウムガス、一酸化二窒素(N2O)ガス、窒素ガス、または酸素ガスなどを用いることもできる。 As the plasma treatment, for example, reverse sputtering is preferably performed. Here, reverse sputtering refers to a method of modifying a surface by bombarding ions onto a surface to be treated, as opposed to the conventional sputtering method of bombarding a sputter target with ions. One method of bombarding ions onto the surface to be treated is to apply a high-frequency voltage to the surface to be treated in an argon atmosphere to generate plasma near the substrate. When reverse sputtering is used, argon is added to region 21fb in addition to the metal elements. In this case, the argon concentration in region 21b is higher than that in region 21a. In addition to argon gas, helium gas, nitrous oxide (N 2 O) gas, nitrogen gas, or oxygen gas can also be used.
また、上記プラズマ処理は、逆スパッタリング処理に限られるものではない。例えば、上述のマイクロ波プラズマ処理を行ってもよい。また、例えば、処理表面側にバイアス電圧を印加せずにプラズマ処理を行ってもよい。上記の処理においては、スパッタリング装置、CVD装置、ドライエッチング装置、高密度プラズマ源を用いたCVD装置、または、高密度プラズマ源を用いたドライエッチング装置などを用いることができる。 Furthermore, the above-mentioned plasma treatment is not limited to reverse sputtering treatment. For example, the above-mentioned microwave plasma treatment may be performed. Furthermore, for example, plasma treatment may be performed without applying a bias voltage to the treatment surface. For the above treatment, a sputtering device, a CVD device, a dry etching device, a CVD device using a high-density plasma source, or a dry etching device using a high-density plasma source may be used.
また、上記プラズマ処理の代わりに加熱処理を行う、上記プラズマ処理中に加熱処理を行う、上記プラズマ処理の前に加熱処理を行う、または上記プラズマ処理のあとに加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱処理の条件は、後述するゲッタリングのための加熱処理を参照すればよい。 Furthermore, heat treatment may be performed instead of the plasma treatment, during the plasma treatment, before the plasma treatment, or after the plasma treatment. For the conditions of the heat treatment, please refer to the heat treatment for gettering described below.
また、半導体膜21fに対する金属元素の添加は上記に限られるものではない。例えば、犠牲層67を設けずに、イオン注入法、またはイオンドーピング法を用いて、上記金属元素の添加を行ってもよい。 Furthermore, the addition of metal elements to semiconductor film 21f is not limited to the above. For example, the metal elements may be added using ion implantation or ion doping without providing a sacrificial layer 67.
続いて、加熱処理を行って、領域21faに含まれる水素及び過剰酸素を、領域21fbに捕獲または固着する(ゲッタリングするということもできる)。上述の通り、領域21fbは、領域21faより酸素欠損を多く含む。このため、加熱処理を行うことで、隣接する領域21faに含まれる水素、及び過剰酸素を捕獲または固着することができる。 Next, a heat treatment is performed to capture or fix (this can also be called gettering) the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in region 21fa in region 21fb. As mentioned above, region 21fb contains more oxygen vacancies than region 21fa. Therefore, by performing the heat treatment, the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in the adjacent region 21fa can be captured or fixed.
これにより、トランジスタ20において、チャネル形成領域として機能する領域21faの水素濃度を低減することができるため、トランジスタ20の初期特性のマイナスシフトを抑制し、ノーマリオフ特性にすることができる。また、+GBTストレス試験における、マイナスドリフト劣化を抑制することができる。 This reduces the hydrogen concentration in region 21fa, which functions as a channel formation region in transistor 20, thereby suppressing a negative shift in the initial characteristics of transistor 20 and enabling normally-off characteristics. It also suppresses negative drift degradation during +GBT stress testing.
また、トランジスタ20において、チャネル形成領域として機能する領域21faの過剰酸素を低減し、過剰酸素に起因する電子トラップの形成を抑制することができる。これにより、当該電子トラップに起因するトランジスタ20の初期特性の過剰なプラスシフトを抑制することができる。また、+GBTストレス試験における、過剰なプラスドリフト劣化を抑制することができる。以上のように、領域21faに含まれる水素及び過剰酸素を、領域21fbに捕獲または固着することで、トランジスタ20の電気特性及び信頼性の向上を図ることができる。 Furthermore, in the transistor 20, excess oxygen in the region 21fa, which functions as a channel formation region, can be reduced, and the formation of electron traps due to the excess oxygen can be suppressed. This can suppress an excessive positive shift in the initial characteristics of the transistor 20 due to the electron traps. Furthermore, excessive positive drift degradation in a +GBT stress test can be suppressed. As described above, by capturing or fixing the hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in the region 21fa in the region 21fb, the electrical characteristics and reliability of the transistor 20 can be improved.
当該加熱処理は、基板温度を200℃以上500℃以下、好ましくは400℃以上450℃以下で行うことが好ましい。また、当該加熱処理は、処理時間を1時間以上8時間以下で行うことが好ましい。また、酸素ガスを含まない雰囲気、または酸素ガスが少ない雰囲気で行うことが好ましい。例えば、窒素ガスまたは不活性ガスの雰囲気で加熱処理を行うことが好ましい。また、上記加熱処理で用いるガスは、高純度化されていることが好ましい。例えば、上記加熱処理で用いるガスに含まれる水分量が1ppb以下、好ましくは0.1ppb以下、より好ましくは0.05ppb以下にすればよい。 The heat treatment is preferably performed at a substrate temperature of 200°C or higher and 500°C or lower, preferably 400°C or higher and 450°C or lower. The heat treatment is preferably performed for a treatment time of 1 hour or higher and 8 hours or lower. The heat treatment is preferably performed in an atmosphere that does not contain oxygen gas or has a low oxygen gas content. For example, the heat treatment is preferably performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere. The gas used in the heat treatment is preferably highly purified. For example, the moisture content of the gas used in the heat treatment should be 1 ppb or lower, preferably 0.1 ppb or lower, and more preferably 0.05 ppb or lower.
続いて、犠牲層67及び犠牲層61を除去する(図17A)。犠牲層67及び犠牲層61の除去は、ウェットエッチング法またはドライエッチング法を用いることができる。また、ドライエッチング後に、プラズマを用いたドライ洗浄、もしくは薬液(酸またはアルカリを含む)、または水(炭酸水を含む)を用いたウェット洗浄を行ってもよい。なお、領域21fb近傍に犠牲層67が残存していてもよい。また、上記プラズマ処理及び上記加熱処理によって、犠牲層67と半導体膜21fの界面が明瞭でない場合があり、この場合、領域21fb近傍に犠牲層67が残存する場合がある。 Next, the sacrificial layers 67 and 61 are removed (Figure 17A). The sacrificial layers 67 and 61 can be removed by wet etching or dry etching. After dry etching, dry cleaning using plasma or wet cleaning using a chemical solution (including acid or alkali) or water (including carbonated water) may be performed. The sacrificial layer 67 may remain near region 21fb. The plasma treatment and heat treatment may make the interface between the sacrificial layer 67 and the semiconductor film 21f unclear, in which case the sacrificial layer 67 may remain near region 21fb.
続いて、新たに犠牲層62を形成する(図17B)。犠牲層62は、上記犠牲層61と同様の方法により形成することができる。 Next, a new sacrificial layer 62 is formed (Figure 17B). The sacrificial layer 62 can be formed using the same method as the sacrificial layer 61 described above.
続いて、絶縁層43の上面が露出するまで平坦化処理を行う(図17C)。これにより、半導体膜21fは、絶縁層43の上部に位置する部分が除去され、開口部47の中に位置する部分が残存する。このようにして、開口部47の内部に沿って配置された半導体層21を形成することができる。また、領域21faの中で残存した部分が領域21aとなり、領域21fbの中で残存した部分が領域21bとなる。図17Cに示すように、開口部47の中で、領域21aと領域21bは交互に配列される。 Next, a planarization process is performed until the top surface of insulating layer 43 is exposed (Figure 17C). As a result, the portion of semiconductor film 21f located on top of insulating layer 43 is removed, leaving the portion located inside opening 47. In this way, semiconductor layer 21 can be formed that is arranged along the inside of opening 47. Furthermore, the remaining portion of region 21fa becomes region 21a, and the remaining portion of region 21fb becomes region 21b. As shown in Figure 17C, regions 21a and 21b are arranged alternately within opening 47.
平坦化処理は、例えばCMP(Chemical Mechanical Polishing)法、ドライエッチングなどを用いることができる。半導体層21の形成後、犠牲層62を除去する。犠牲層62の除去は、上記犠牲層61の除去と同様の方法で行うことができる。 The planarization process can be performed using, for example, CMP (Chemical Mechanical Polishing) or dry etching. After the semiconductor layer 21 is formed, the sacrificial layer 62 is removed. The sacrificial layer 62 can be removed in the same manner as the sacrificial layer 61 described above.
続いて、半導体層21、絶縁層43、絶縁層42、導電層24などを覆って、のちに絶縁層22となる絶縁膜22fを成膜する。 Next, an insulating film 22f, which will later become insulating layer 22, is formed to cover semiconductor layer 21, insulating layer 43, insulating layer 42, conductive layer 24, etc.
絶縁膜22fは、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。絶縁膜22fは、半導体層21の垂直部分の表面に、出来るだけ均一な厚さで設けることが好ましい。そのため被覆性に極めて優れた成膜方法であるALD法により、絶縁膜22fを形成することが特に好ましい。なお、絶縁層43の側壁がテーパ形状である場合には、絶縁膜22fをスパッタリング法、CVD法などの成膜方法を用いて成膜することができる。 The insulating film 22f can be formed by a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD. It is preferable to provide the insulating film 22f with as uniform a thickness as possible on the surface of the vertical portion of the semiconductor layer 21. For this reason, it is particularly preferable to form the insulating film 22f by the ALD method, which is a film formation method with extremely excellent coverage. Note that if the sidewalls of the insulating layer 43 are tapered, the insulating film 22f can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering or CVD.
続いて、絶縁膜22fを覆って、のちに導電層23となる導電膜23fを成膜する。導電膜23fは、CVD法、ALD法、スパッタリング法などを用いることができる。被覆性の観点から、特にCVD法により形成することが好ましい。 Next, a conductive film 23f, which will later become the conductive layer 23, is formed to cover the insulating film 22f. The conductive film 23f can be formed using a method such as CVD, ALD, or sputtering. From the standpoint of coverage, it is particularly preferable to form it by the CVD method.
続いて、導電膜23fを覆って、のちに絶縁層31となる絶縁膜31fを成膜する(図18A)。絶縁膜31fは、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。 Next, an insulating film 31f, which will later become the insulating layer 31, is deposited to cover the conductive film 23f (Figure 18A). The insulating film 31f can be formed using a deposition method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
続いて、絶縁膜31fを異方性のエッチングを用いてエッチングすることで、導電膜23fの垂直部分に沿って設けられ、開口部47の中でY−Z面に対して対称に配置される一対の絶縁層31を形成することができる。続いて、絶縁層31をマスクとして、導電膜23fに対して異方性のエッチングを行うことで、開口部47の中でY−Z面に対して対称に配置される一対の導電層23を形成することができる。続いて、絶縁膜22fに対して異方性のエッチングを行うことで、絶縁層43を挟んで開口部47の中でY−Z面に対して対称に配置される一対の絶縁層22を形成することができる(図18B)。このようにして、開口部47の内部に沿って配置された、一対の絶縁層31、一対の導電層23、及び一対の絶縁層22を形成することができる。 Next, the insulating film 31f is anisotropically etched to form a pair of insulating layers 31 that are arranged along the vertical portions of the conductive film 23f and are symmetrically disposed with respect to the Y-Z plane within the opening 47. Next, the conductive film 23f is anisotropically etched using the insulating layer 31 as a mask to form a pair of conductive layers 23 that are symmetrically disposed with respect to the Y-Z plane within the opening 47. Next, the insulating film 22f is anisotropically etched to form a pair of insulating layers 22 that are symmetrically disposed with respect to the Y-Z plane within the opening 47, sandwiching the insulating layer 43 therebetween (Figure 18B). In this way, a pair of insulating layers 31, a pair of conductive layers 23, and a pair of insulating layers 22 that are arranged along the interior of the opening 47 can be formed.
なお、絶縁膜31f、導電膜23f、及び絶縁膜22fは、それぞれ異なるエッチング方法を用いて順にエッチングしてもよいし、2以上の膜を一のエッチング工程で同時にエッチングしてもよい。例えば、導電膜23fのエッチング工程において、導電膜23fの後に同一条件で絶縁膜22fを続けてエッチングしてもよい。 Note that the insulating film 31f, conductive film 23f, and insulating film 22f may be etched in order using different etching methods, or two or more films may be etched simultaneously in a single etching process. For example, in the etching process for conductive film 23f, insulating film 22f may be etched subsequently under the same conditions after conductive film 23f.
なお、図11Aなどに示すように、一対の導電層23の間の領域と重なる領域に、領域21bを形成することができる。この場合、図18Bに示す工程の後に、図13乃至図16に示す方法と同様の方法を用いればよい。 As shown in Figure 11A, etc., region 21b can be formed in the region overlapping the region between a pair of conductive layers 23. In this case, after the step shown in Figure 18B, a method similar to the method shown in Figures 13 to 16 can be used.
続いて、絶縁層32となる絶縁膜を成膜する。続いて、当該絶縁膜の凹部を埋めるように絶縁層33となる絶縁膜を形成する。これら絶縁膜は、それぞれ独立に、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。例えば絶縁層32となる絶縁膜をALD法により形成し、絶縁層33となる絶縁膜をCVD法により形成することができる。続いて、絶縁層33となる絶縁膜と、絶縁層32となる絶縁膜に対して、順に異方性のエッチングを行い、半導体層21、絶縁層22、導電層23、及び絶縁層31の上面を露出させる。 Next, an insulating film that will become insulating layer 32 is deposited. Next, an insulating film that will become insulating layer 33 is formed so as to fill the recesses in the insulating film. These insulating films can be formed independently using film deposition methods such as sputtering, ALD, and CVD. For example, the insulating film that will become insulating layer 32 can be formed using ALD, and the insulating film that will become insulating layer 33 can be formed using CVD. Next, the insulating film that will become insulating layer 33 and the insulating film that will become insulating layer 32 are anisotropically etched in order to expose the top surfaces of semiconductor layer 21, insulating layer 22, conductive layer 23, and insulating layer 31.
続いて、絶縁層34となる絶縁膜を成膜し、絶縁層43の上面が露出するまで平坦化処理を行うことにより、導電層23、絶縁層31、絶縁層32、及び絶縁層33の上面に接する絶縁層34を形成する(図18C)。絶縁層34となる絶縁膜は、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。 Next, an insulating film that will become insulating layer 34 is deposited, and a planarization process is performed until the top surface of insulating layer 43 is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 34 that contacts the top surfaces of conductive layer 23, insulating layer 31, insulating layer 32, and insulating layer 33 (Figure 18C). The insulating film that will become insulating layer 34 can be formed by a deposition method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
続いて、半導体層21に対してエッチングを行い、半導体層21の上面が導電層23の上面よりも低くなるように加工する(図19A)。このとき、絶縁層43の側面、絶縁層22の側面、及び半導体層21の上面に囲まれる凹部が形成される。続いて、当該凹部を埋めるように導電膜を成膜し、当該導電膜の不要な部分をフォトリソグラフィ法によりエッチングして除去することにより、導電層25を形成する(図19B)。 Next, the semiconductor layer 21 is etched so that the top surface of the semiconductor layer 21 is lower than the top surface of the conductive layer 23 (Figure 19A). At this time, a recess is formed that is surrounded by the side surfaces of the insulating layer 43, the side surfaces of the insulating layer 22, and the top surface of the semiconductor layer 21. Next, a conductive film is deposited to fill the recess, and unnecessary portions of the conductive film are etched and removed using photolithography to form the conductive layer 25 (Figure 19B).
なお、図7Bで示したように、導電膜25aと導電膜25bの積層構造にすることもできる。この場合、上述の導電膜24b及び導電膜24aと同様の積層導電膜を成膜して、当該積層導電膜を加工して導電層25を形成すればよい。 As shown in Figure 7B, a laminated structure of conductive film 25a and conductive film 25b can also be used. In this case, a laminated conductive film similar to the above-mentioned conductive film 24b and conductive film 24a is formed, and the laminated conductive film is processed to form conductive layer 25.
この時点で、トランジスタ20を形成することができる。 At this point, transistor 20 can be formed.
その後、絶縁層44となる絶縁膜を成膜し、導電層25の上面が露出するまで平坦化することにより、絶縁層44を形成する(図19C)。絶縁層44となる絶縁膜は、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。なお、導電層25が設けられていない領域においては、図3Bに示すように、絶縁層43の側面、絶縁層22の側面、及び半導体層21(例えば領域21b)の上面に囲まれる凹部に絶縁層44の一部が埋め込まれる。 Then, an insulating film that will become insulating layer 44 is deposited and planarized until the top surface of conductive layer 25 is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 44 (Figure 19C). The insulating film that will become insulating layer 44 can be formed by a film deposition method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD. Note that in areas where conductive layer 25 is not provided, as shown in Figure 3B, part of insulating layer 44 is embedded in a recess surrounded by the side surfaces of insulating layer 43, insulating layer 22, and the top surface of semiconductor layer 21 (e.g., region 21b).
続いて、絶縁層45を形成し、絶縁層45上に絶縁層46を形成する。絶縁層45及び絶縁層46は、それぞれ独立にスパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができる。 Next, insulating layer 45 is formed, and insulating layer 46 is formed on insulating layer 45. Insulating layers 45 and 46 can be formed independently by a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
続いて、絶縁層46及び絶縁層45に、導電層25に達する開口を形成する(図20A)。ここで、当該開口の底面の端部は、図7Aなどに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状であることが好ましい。なお、導電層25の上面の一部がエッチングされる場合がある。これを防ぐため、絶縁層45を絶縁層46のエッチングにおけるエッチングストップ膜として用いることもできる。 Next, openings are formed in insulating layer 46 and insulating layer 45, reaching conductive layer 25 (Figure 20A). Here, it is preferable that the bottom edge of the opening has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 7A, etc. Note that part of the top surface of conductive layer 25 may be etched. To prevent this, insulating layer 45 can be used as an etching stop film when etching insulating layer 46.
また、導電層25を導電膜25aと導電膜25bの積層構造にした場合、導電膜25bの上部の一部をエッチングし、導電膜25bの中央部の厚さを薄くすることができる。これにより、図7B等で示した、凹部を有する導電膜25bを形成することができる。このとき、導電膜25bが消失しないようにエッチング条件を決定する、またはあらかじめ導電膜25bを厚く形成しておくことが好ましい。ここで、導電膜25bの凹部の端部は、図7Bに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状であることが好ましい。 Furthermore, when the conductive layer 25 has a layered structure of conductive films 25a and 25b, it is possible to thin the thickness of the central portion of the conductive film 25b by etching a portion of the upper portion of the conductive film 25b. This makes it possible to form the conductive film 25b with a recess, as shown in Figure 7B, etc. In this case, it is preferable to determine the etching conditions so that the conductive film 25b does not disappear, or to form the conductive film 25b thick in advance. Here, it is preferable that the end of the recess in the conductive film 25b has a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in Figure 7B.
続いて、絶縁層46の上面、開口内における絶縁層46の側面、絶縁層45の側面、及び導電層25の上面を覆って、導電層51となる導電膜を成膜する。当該導電膜は、CVD法、ALD法、スパッタリング法などを用いることができる。被覆性の観点から、特にCVD法により形成することが好ましい。 Next, a conductive film that will become conductive layer 51 is formed to cover the top surface of insulating layer 46, the side surfaces of insulating layer 46 within the opening, the side surfaces of insulating layer 45, and the top surface of conductive layer 25. This conductive film can be formed using a method such as CVD, ALD, or sputtering. From the standpoint of coverage, it is particularly preferable to form it by CVD.
続いて、開口の凹部を被覆するように、導電膜上に犠牲層を形成し、絶縁層46の上面が露出するまで平坦化処理を行い、犠牲層を除去することで、開口の内部にのみ位置する導電層51を形成することができる(図20B)。 Next, a sacrificial layer is formed on the conductive film so as to cover the recessed portion of the opening, and a planarization process is performed until the top surface of the insulating layer 46 is exposed. The sacrificial layer is then removed, thereby forming a conductive layer 51 that is located only inside the opening (Figure 20B).
ここで、上記導電膜をエッチングして導電層51を形成することもできる。この場合、図7Aに示したように、導電層51の上端部が絶縁層46の上面より低い構造にすることができる。また、導電層51の上端部をテーパ形状にすることができる。ここで、導電層51の上端部、及び絶縁層46の上端部は、図7Aに示すように任意の曲率を有する、湾曲した形状であることが好ましい。 The conductive film can also be etched to form the conductive layer 51. In this case, as shown in FIG. 7A, the upper end of the conductive layer 51 can be configured to be lower than the upper surface of the insulating layer 46. The upper end of the conductive layer 51 can also be tapered. Here, it is preferable that the upper end of the conductive layer 51 and the upper end of the insulating layer 46 have a curved shape with an arbitrary curvature, as shown in FIG. 7A.
続いて、絶縁層46及び導電層51の表面に沿って絶縁層52を形成する。絶縁層52は、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などの成膜方法で形成することができるが、被覆性の観点からALD法を用いることが好ましい。続いて、絶縁層46の開口における凹部を埋めるように、絶縁層52上に導電層53を形成する(図21)。その後、必要に応じて導電層53の上面を平坦化してもよい。 Next, an insulating layer 52 is formed along the surfaces of the insulating layer 46 and the conductive layer 51. The insulating layer 52 can be formed using a film formation method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD, but ALD is preferable from the perspective of coverage. Next, a conductive layer 53 is formed on the insulating layer 52 so as to fill the recesses in the openings of the insulating layer 46 (Figure 21). Thereafter, the top surface of the conductive layer 53 may be planarized if necessary.
以上の工程により、トランジスタ20と、容量素子30と、を有する半導体装置を作製することができる。 Through the above steps, a semiconductor device having a transistor 20 and a capacitor 30 can be manufactured.
以上が、作製方法例についての説明である。 The above is an explanation of an example production method.
本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
(実施の形態2)
本実施の形態では、上記実施の形態とは異なる本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置900について説明する。半導体装置900は記憶装置として機能できる。
(Embodiment 2)
In this embodiment, a semiconductor device 900 according to one embodiment of the present invention, which is different from the above embodiment, will be described. The semiconductor device 900 can function as a memory device.
図22に、半導体装置900の構成例を示すブロック図を示す。図22に示す半導体装置900は、駆動回路910と、メモリアレイ920と、を有する。メモリアレイ920は、1以上のメモリセル950を有する。図22では、メモリアレイ920がマトリクス状に配置された複数のメモリセル950を有する例を示している。 FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an example configuration of a semiconductor device 900. The semiconductor device 900 shown in FIG. 22 has a driver circuit 910 and a memory array 920. The memory array 920 has one or more memory cells 950. FIG. 22 shows an example in which the memory array 920 has a plurality of memory cells 950 arranged in a matrix.
メモリセル950に、上記実施の形態で例示したメモリセル15などを適用することができる。 Memory cell 15, as exemplified in the above embodiment, can be applied to memory cell 950.
駆動回路910は、PSW931(パワースイッチ)、PSW932、および周辺回路915を有する。周辺回路915は、周辺回路911、コントロール回路912(Control Circuit)、および電圧生成回路928を有する。 The drive circuit 910 includes a PSW 931 (power switch), a PSW 932, and a peripheral circuit 915. The peripheral circuit 915 includes a peripheral circuit 911, a control circuit 912, and a voltage generation circuit 928.
半導体装置900において、各回路、各信号および各電圧は、必要に応じて、適宜取捨することができる。あるいは、他の回路または他の信号を追加してもよい。信号BW、信号CE、信号GW、信号CLK、信号WAKE、信号ADDR、信号WDA、信号PON1、信号PON2は外部からの入力信号であり、信号RDAは外部への出力信号である。信号CLKはクロック信号である。 In semiconductor device 900, each circuit, signal, and voltage can be selected or removed as needed. Alternatively, other circuits or signals may be added. Signals BW, CE, GW, CLK, WAKE, ADDR, WDA, PON1, and PON2 are input signals from the outside, and signal RDA is an output signal to the outside. Signal CLK is a clock signal.
また、信号BW、信号CE、および信号GWは制御信号である。信号CEはチップイネーブル信号であり、信号GWはグローバル書き込みイネーブル信号であり、信号BWはバイト書き込みイネーブル信号である。信号ADDRはアドレス信号である。信号WDAは書き込みデータであり、信号RDAは読み出しデータである。信号PON1、信号PON2は、パワーゲーティング制御用信号である。なお、信号PON1、信号PON2は、コントロール回路912で生成してもよい。 Furthermore, signals BW, CE, and GW are control signals. Signal CE is a chip enable signal, signal GW is a global write enable signal, and signal BW is a byte write enable signal. Signal ADDR is an address signal. Signal WDA is write data, and signal RDA is read data. Signals PON1 and PON2 are power gating control signals. Note that signals PON1 and PON2 may be generated by control circuit 912.
コントロール回路912は、半導体装置900の動作全般を制御する機能を有するロジック回路である。例えば、コントロール回路912は、信号CE、信号GWおよび信号BWを論理演算して、半導体装置900の動作モード(例えば、書き込み動作、読み出し動作)を決定する。または、コントロール回路912は、この動作モードが実行されるように、周辺回路911の制御信号を生成する。 The control circuit 912 is a logic circuit that has the function of controlling the overall operation of the semiconductor device 900. For example, the control circuit 912 performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operation mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the semiconductor device 900. Alternatively, the control circuit 912 generates a control signal for the peripheral circuit 911 so that this operation mode is executed.
電圧生成回路928は負電圧を生成する機能を有する。信号WAKEは、信号CLKの電圧生成回路928への入力を制御する機能を有する。例えば、信号WAKEとしてHレベルの信号が与えられると、信号CLKが電圧生成回路928へ入力され、電圧生成回路928は負電圧を生成する。 Voltage generation circuit 928 has the function of generating a negative voltage. Signal WAKE has the function of controlling the input of signal CLK to voltage generation circuit 928. For example, when a high-level signal is given as signal WAKE, signal CLK is input to voltage generation circuit 928, and voltage generation circuit 928 generates a negative voltage.
周辺回路911は、メモリセル950に対するデータの書き込みおよび読み出しをするための回路である。周辺回路911は、行デコーダ941、列デコーダ942、行ドライバ923、列ドライバ924、入力回路925、出力回路926、およびセンスアンプ927を有する。 The peripheral circuit 911 is a circuit for writing and reading data to and from the memory cells 950. The peripheral circuit 911 includes a row decoder 941, a column decoder 942, a row driver 923, a column driver 924, an input circuit 925, an output circuit 926, and a sense amplifier 927.
行デコーダ941および列デコーダ942は、信号ADDRをデコードする機能を有する。行デコーダ941は、アクセスする行を指定するための回路であり、列デコーダ942は、アクセスする列を指定するための回路である。行ドライバ923は、行デコーダ941が指定する行を選択する機能を有する。列ドライバ924は、データをメモリセル950に書き込む機能、メモリセル950からデータを読み出す機能、読み出したデータを保持する機能等を有する。 The row decoder 941 and column decoder 942 have the function of decoding the signal ADDR. The row decoder 941 is a circuit for specifying the row to be accessed, and the column decoder 942 is a circuit for specifying the column to be accessed. The row driver 923 has the function of selecting the row specified by the row decoder 941. The column driver 924 has the function of writing data to the memory cell 950, reading data from the memory cell 950, and retaining the read data.
入力回路925は、信号WDAを保持する機能を有する。入力回路925が保持するデータは、列ドライバ924に出力される。入力回路925の出力データが、メモリセル950に書き込むデータ(Din)である。列ドライバ924がメモリセル950から読み出したデータ(Dout)は、出力回路926に出力される。出力回路926は、Doutを保持する機能を有する。また、出力回路926は、Doutを半導体装置900の外部に出力する機能を有する。出力回路926から出力されるデータが信号RDAである。 The input circuit 925 has the function of holding the signal WDA. The data held by the input circuit 925 is output to the column driver 924. The output data of the input circuit 925 is the data (Din) to be written to the memory cell 950. The data (Dout) read from the memory cell 950 by the column driver 924 is output to the output circuit 926. The output circuit 926 has the function of holding Dout. The output circuit 926 also has the function of outputting Dout to the outside of the semiconductor device 900. The data output from the output circuit 926 is the signal RDA.
PSW931は周辺回路915へのVDDの供給を制御する機能を有する。PSW932は、行ドライバ923へのVHMの供給を制御する機能を有する。ここでは、半導体装置900の高電源電圧がVDDであり、低電源電圧はGND(接地電位)である。また、VHMは、ワード線を高レベルにするために用いられる高電源電圧であり、VDDよりも高い。信号PON1によってPSW931のオン・オフが制御され、信号PON2によってPSW932のオン・オフが制御される。図22では、周辺回路915において、VDDが供給される電源ドメインの数を1としているが、複数にすることもできる。この場合、各電源ドメインに対してパワースイッチを設ければよい。 PSW931 has the function of controlling the supply of VDD to the peripheral circuit 915. PSW932 has the function of controlling the supply of VHM to the row driver 923. Here, the high power supply voltage of the semiconductor device 900 is VDD, and the low power supply voltage is GND (ground potential). VHM is a high power supply voltage used to set the word line to a high level and is higher than VDD. The on/off of PSW931 is controlled by signal PON1, and the on/off of PSW932 is controlled by signal PON2. In Figure 22, the number of power domains to which VDD is supplied in the peripheral circuit 915 is one, but there can be multiple. In this case, a power switch can be provided for each power domain.
図23A乃至図23Hを用いて、メモリセル950に適用できる他のメモリセルの構成例について説明する。 Other memory cell configuration examples that can be applied to memory cell 950 will be described using Figures 23A to 23H.
[DOSRAM]
図23Aに、DRAMのメモリセルの回路構成例を示す。本明細書などにおいて、OSトランジスタを用いたDRAMを、DOSRAM(Dynamic Oxide Semiconductor Random Access Memory)と呼ぶ。メモリセル951は、トランジスタM1と、容量素子CAと、を有する。
[DOSRAM]
23A shows an example of a circuit configuration of a DRAM memory cell. In this specification and the like, a DRAM using an OS transistor is referred to as a dynamic oxide semiconductor random access memory (DOSRAM). The memory cell 951 includes a transistor M1 and a capacitor CA.
なお、トランジスタM1は、フロントゲート(単にゲートと呼ぶ場合がある。)、およびバックゲートを有していてもよい。このとき、バックゲートは定電位または信号が与えられる配線に接続されていてもよいし、フロントゲートとバックゲートとが接続されていてもよい。 Transistor M1 may have a front gate (sometimes simply referred to as the gate) and a back gate. In this case, the back gate may be connected to a wiring that supplies a constant potential or a signal, or the front gate and back gate may be connected.
トランジスタM1の第1端子は、容量素子CAの第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM1の第2端子は、配線BILと接続され、トランジスタM1のゲートは、配線WOLと接続されている。容量素子CAの第2端子は、配線CALと接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M1 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CA, the second terminal of transistor M1 is connected to wiring BIL, and the gate of transistor M1 is connected to wiring WOL. The second terminal of capacitance element CA is connected to wiring CAL.
配線BILは、ビット線として機能し、配線WOLは、ワード線として機能する。配線CALは、容量素子CAの第2端子に所定の電位を印加するための配線として機能する。データの書き込み時、および読み出し時において、配線CALには、低レベル電位(基準電位という場合がある。)を印加するのが好ましい。 The wiring BIL functions as a bit line, and the wiring WOL functions as a word line. The wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of the capacitance element CA. When writing and reading data, it is preferable to apply a low-level potential (sometimes called a reference potential) to the wiring CAL.
データの書き込みおよび読み出しは、配線WOLに高レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM1をオン状態にし、配線BILと容量素子CAの第1端子を導通状態(電流を流すことが可能な状態)にすることによって行われる。 Data is written and read by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL, turning on the transistor M1, and bringing the wiring BIL and the first terminal of the capacitance element CA into a conductive state (a state in which current can flow).
また、メモリセル950に用いることができるメモリセルは、メモリセル951に限定されず、回路構成の変更を行うことができる。例えば、図23Bに示すようなメモリセル952の構成でもよい。メモリセル952は、容量素子CA、及び配線CALを有さない場合の例である。トランジスタM1の第1端子は、電気的にフローティングの状態である。 Furthermore, the memory cell that can be used for memory cell 950 is not limited to memory cell 951, and the circuit configuration can be changed. For example, the configuration of memory cell 952 shown in FIG. 23B may also be used. Memory cell 952 is an example in which the capacitor element CA and the wiring CAL are not included. The first terminal of transistor M1 is in an electrically floating state.
メモリセル952において、トランジスタM1を介して書き込まれた電位は、破線で示す第1端子とゲートとの間の容量(寄生容量ともいう)に保持される。このような構成とすることで、メモリセルの構成を大幅に簡略化することができる。 In memory cell 952, the potential written via transistor M1 is held in the capacitance (also called parasitic capacitance) between the first terminal and gate, indicated by the dashed line. This configuration significantly simplifies the memory cell configuration.
なお、トランジスタM1としてOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。OSトランジスタは、オフ電流が極めて小さいという特性を有している。トランジスタM1としてOSトランジスタを用いることによって、トランジスタM1のリーク電流を非常に低くすることができる。つまり、書き込んだデータをトランジスタM1によって長時間保持することができるため、メモリセルのリフレッシュの頻度を少なくすることができる。または、メモリセルのリフレッシュ動作を不要にすることができる。また、リーク電流が非常に低いため、メモリセル951、及びメモリセル952に対して多値データ、またはアナログデータを保持することができる。 Note that it is preferable to use an OS transistor as transistor M1. OS transistors have the characteristic of having an extremely low off-state current. By using an OS transistor as transistor M1, the leakage current of transistor M1 can be made extremely low. That is, written data can be held by transistor M1 for a long time, reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cell. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cell can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, because the leakage current is extremely low, multilevel data or analog data can be held in memory cell 951 and memory cell 952.
[NOSRAM]
図23Cに、2トランジスタ1容量素子のゲインセル型のメモリセルの回路構成例を示す。メモリセル953は、トランジスタM2と、トランジスタM3と、容量素子CBと、を有する。本明細書などにおいて、トランジスタM2にOSトランジスタを用いたゲインセル型のメモリセルを有する記憶装置を、NOSRAM(Nonvolatile Oxide Semiconductor RAM)と呼ぶ。
[NOSRAM]
23C shows an example circuit configuration of a gain cell type memory cell having two transistors and one capacitor. The memory cell 953 includes a transistor M2, a transistor M3, and a capacitor CB. In this specification and the like, a memory device having a gain cell type memory cell in which the transistor M2 is an OS transistor is referred to as a nonvolatile oxide semiconductor RAM (NOSRAM).
トランジスタM2の第1端子は、容量素子CBの第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM2の第2端子は、配線WBLと接続され、トランジスタM2のゲートは、配線WOLと接続されている。容量素子CBの第2端子は、配線CALと接続されている。トランジスタM3の第1端子は、配線RBLと接続され、トランジスタM3の第2端子は、配線SLと接続され、トランジスタM3のゲートは、容量素子CBの第1端子と接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M2 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CB, the second terminal of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WBL, and the gate of transistor M2 is connected to wiring WOL. The second terminal of capacitance element CB is connected to wiring CAL. The first terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring RBL, the second terminal of transistor M3 is connected to wiring SL, and the gate of transistor M3 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CB.
配線WBLは、書き込みビット線として機能し、配線RBLは、読み出しビット線として機能し、配線WOLは、ワード線として機能する。配線CALは、容量素子CBの第2端子に所定の電位を印加するための配線として機能する。データの書き込み時、データ保持の最中、データの読み出し時において、配線CALには、低レベル電位(基準電位という場合がある)を印加するのが好ましい。 Wiring WBL functions as a write bit line, wiring RBL functions as a read bit line, and wiring WOL functions as a word line. Wiring CAL functions as a wiring for applying a predetermined potential to the second terminal of capacitance element CB. When writing data, while retaining data, and when reading data, it is preferable to apply a low-level potential (sometimes called a reference potential) to wiring CAL.
データの書き込みは、配線WOLに高レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM2をオン状態にし、配線WBLと容量素子CBの第1端子を導通状態にすることによって行われる。具体的には、トランジスタM2がオン状態のときに、配線WBLに記録する情報に対応する電位を印加し、容量素子CBの第1端子、およびトランジスタM3のゲートに該電位を書き込む。その後、配線WOLに低レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM2をオフ状態にすることによって、容量素子CBの第1端子の電位、およびトランジスタM3のゲートの電位を保持する。 Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL, turning on transistor M2, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring WBL and the first terminal of the capacitance element CB. Specifically, when transistor M2 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring WBL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitance element CB and the gate of transistor M3. Then, a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WOL, turning off transistor M2, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CB and the potential of the gate of transistor M3.
データの読み出しは、配線SLに所定の電位を印加することによって行われる。トランジスタM3のソース−ドレイン間に流れる電流、およびトランジスタM3の第1端子の電位は、トランジスタM3のゲートの電位、およびトランジスタM3の第2端子の電位によって決まるため、トランジスタM3の第1端子に接続されている配線RBLの電位を読み出すことによって、容量素子CBの第1端子(またはトランジスタM3のゲート)に保持されている電位を読み出すことができる。つまり、容量素子CBの第1端子(またはトランジスタM3のゲート)に保持されている電位から、このメモリセルに書き込まれている情報を読み出すことができる。 Data is read by applying a predetermined potential to the wiring SL. The current flowing between the source and drain of transistor M3 and the potential of the first terminal of transistor M3 are determined by the potential of the gate of transistor M3 and the potential of the second terminal of transistor M3. Therefore, by reading the potential of the wiring RBL connected to the first terminal of transistor M3, the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of capacitor CB (or the gate of transistor M3).
また、例えば、配線WBLと配線RBLを一本の配線BILとしてまとめた構成であってもよい。そのメモリセルの回路構成例を図23Dに示す。メモリセル954は、メモリセル953の配線WBLと配線RBLを一本の配線BILとして、トランジスタM2の第2端子、およびトランジスタM3の第1端子が、配線BILと接続されている構成となっている。つまり、メモリセル954は、書き込みビット線と、読み出しビット線と、を1本の配線BILとして動作する構成となっている。 Furthermore, for example, the wiring WBL and the wiring RBL may be combined into a single wiring BIL. An example circuit configuration of such a memory cell is shown in Figure 23D. Memory cell 954 is configured such that the wiring WBL and the wiring RBL of memory cell 953 are combined into a single wiring BIL, and the second terminal of transistor M2 and the first terminal of transistor M3 are connected to the wiring BIL. In other words, memory cell 954 is configured to operate with the write bit line and the read bit line as a single wiring BIL.
図23Eに示すメモリセル955は、メモリセル953における容量素子CB及び配線CALを省略した場合の例である。また、図23Fに示すメモリセル956は、メモリセル954における容量素子CB及び配線CALを省略した場合の例である。このような構成とすることで、メモリセルの集積度を高めることができる。 Memory cell 955 shown in Figure 23E is an example in which the capacitance element CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 953 have been omitted. Furthermore, memory cell 956 shown in Figure 23F is an example in which the capacitance element CB and wiring CAL in memory cell 954 have been omitted. This type of configuration allows for increased integration of the memory cells.
なお、少なくともトランジスタM2にはOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。特に、トランジスタM2、およびトランジスタM3にOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。 Note that it is preferable to use an OS transistor for at least transistor M2. In particular, it is preferable to use OS transistors for transistors M2 and M3.
OSトランジスタは、オフ電流が極めて小さいという特性を有しているため、書き込んだデータをトランジスタM2によって長時間保持することができるため、メモリセルのリフレッシュの頻度を少なくすることができる。または、メモリセルのリフレッシュ動作を不要にすることができる。また、リーク電流が非常に低いため、メモリセル953、メモリセル954、メモリセル955、メモリセル956に対して多値データ、またはアナログデータを保持することができる。 Since OS transistors have an extremely low off-state current, written data can be retained by transistor M2 for a long time, reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cells. Alternatively, refresh operations of the memory cells can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the leakage current is extremely low, multilevel data or analog data can be retained in memory cells 953, 954, 955, and 956.
トランジスタM2としてOSトランジスタを適用したメモリセル953、メモリセル954、メモリセル955、およびメモリセル956は、NOSRAMの一態様である。 Memory cell 953, memory cell 954, memory cell 955, and memory cell 956, in which an OS transistor is used as transistor M2, are one embodiment of NOSRAM.
なお、トランジスタM3としてSiトランジスタを用いてもよい。Siトランジスタは電界効果移動度を高めることができるほか、pチャネル型トランジスタとすることもできるため、回路設計の自由度を高めることができる。 It should be noted that a Si transistor may also be used as transistor M3. Si transistors can increase field-effect mobility and can also be used as p-channel transistors, allowing for greater freedom in circuit design.
また、トランジスタM3としてOSトランジスタを用いた場合、メモリセルをn型のトランジスタのみで構成することができる。 Furthermore, when an OS transistor is used as transistor M3, the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
また、図23Gに、3トランジスタ1容量素子のゲインセル型のメモリセル957を示す。メモリセル957は、トランジスタM4乃至トランジスタM6と、容量素子CCと、を有する。 Figure 23G shows a three-transistor, one-capacitor gain cell type memory cell 957. Memory cell 957 has transistors M4 to M6 and a capacitative element CC.
トランジスタM4の第1端子は、容量素子CCの第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM4の第2端子は、配線BILと接続され、トランジスタM4のゲートは、配線WOLと接続されている。容量素子CCの第2端子は、トランジスタM5の第1端子と、配線GNDLと、に接続されている。トランジスタM5の第2端子は、トランジスタM6の第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM5のゲートは、容量素子CCの第1端子と接続されている。トランジスタM6の第2端子は、配線BILと接続され、トランジスタM6のゲートは配線RWLと接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M4 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CC, the second terminal of transistor M4 is connected to wiring BIL, and the gate of transistor M4 is connected to wiring WOL. The second terminal of capacitance element CC is connected to the first terminal of transistor M5 and wiring GNDL. The second terminal of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of transistor M6, and the gate of transistor M5 is connected to the first terminal of capacitance element CC. The second terminal of transistor M6 is connected to wiring BIL, and the gate of transistor M6 is connected to wiring RWL.
配線BILは、ビット線として機能し、配線WOLは、書き込みワード線として機能し、配線RWLは、読み出しワード線として機能する。配線GNDLは、低レベル電位を与える配線である。 The wiring BIL functions as a bit line, the wiring WOL functions as a write word line, and the wiring RWL functions as a read word line. The wiring GNDL is a wiring that applies a low-level potential.
データの書き込みは、配線WOLに高レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM4をオン状態にし、配線BILと容量素子CCの第1端子を導通状態にすることによって行われる。具体的には、トランジスタM4がオン状態のときに、配線BILに記録する情報に対応する電位を印加し、容量素子CCの第1端子、およびトランジスタM5のゲートに該電位を書き込む。その後、配線WOLに低レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM4をオフ状態にすることによって、容量素子CCの第1端子の電位、およびトランジスタM5のゲートの電位を保持する。 Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL, turning on transistor M4, and establishing electrical continuity between the wiring BIL and the first terminal of the capacitance element CC. Specifically, when transistor M4 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BIL, and this potential is written to the first terminal of the capacitance element CC and the gate of transistor M5. Then, a low-level potential is applied to the wiring WOL, turning off transistor M4, thereby maintaining the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CC and the potential of the gate of transistor M5.
データの読み出しは、配線BILに所定の電位をプリチャージして、その後配線BILを電気的に浮遊状態にし、かつ配線RWLに高レベル電位を印加することによって行われる。配線RWLが高レベル電位となるため、トランジスタM6はオン状態となり、配線BILとトランジスタM5の第2端子が導通状態となる。このとき、トランジスタM5の第2端子には、配線BILの電位が印加されることになるが、容量素子CCの第1端子(またはトランジスタM5のゲート)に保持されている電位に応じて、トランジスタM5の第2端子の電位、および配線BILの電位が変化する。ここで、配線BILの電位を読み出すことによって、容量素子CCの第1端子(またはトランジスタM5のゲート)に保持されている電位を読み出すことができる。つまり、容量素子CCの第1端子(またはトランジスタM5のゲート)に保持されている電位から、このメモリセルに書き込まれている情報を読み出すことができる。 Data is read by precharging the wiring BIL to a predetermined potential, then electrically floating the wiring BIL and applying a high-level potential to the wiring RWL. Because the wiring RWL is at a high-level potential, the transistor M6 is turned on, and the wiring BIL and the second terminal of the transistor M5 are electrically connected. At this time, the potential of the wiring BIL is applied to the second terminal of the transistor M5. The potential of the second terminal of the transistor M5 and the potential of the wiring BIL change depending on the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5). By reading the potential of the wiring BIL, the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5) can be read. In other words, the information written in this memory cell can be read from the potential held in the first terminal of the capacitor CC (or the gate of the transistor M5).
なお、少なくともトランジスタM4にOSトランジスタを用いることが好ましい。 It is preferable to use an OS transistor for at least transistor M4.
なお、トランジスタM5およびM6としてSiトランジスタを用いてもよい。前述した通り、Siトランジスタは、半導体層に用いるシリコンの結晶状態などによっては、OSトランジスタよりも電界効果移動度が高くなる場合がある。 Note that Si transistors may be used as transistors M5 and M6. As mentioned above, Si transistors may have higher field-effect mobility than OS transistors depending on the crystalline state of the silicon used in the semiconductor layer.
また、トランジスタM5およびM6としてOSトランジスタを用いた場合、メモリセルをn型のトランジスタのみで構成することができる。 Furthermore, when OS transistors are used as transistors M5 and M6, the memory cell can be composed of only n-type transistors.
[OS−SRAM]
図23Hに、OSトランジスタを用いたSRAM(Static Random Access Memory)の一例を示す。本明細書などにおいて、OSトランジスタを用いたSRAMを、OS−SRAM(Oxide Semiconductor−SRAM)と呼ぶ。なお、図23Hに示すメモリセル958は、バックアップ可能なSRAMのメモリセルである。
[OS-SRAM]
23H shows an example of a static random access memory (SRAM) using an OS transistor. In this specification and the like, an SRAM using an OS transistor is referred to as an oxide semiconductor SRAM (OS-SRAM). Note that a memory cell 958 shown in FIG. 23H is a memory cell of an SRAM capable of backing up data.
メモリセル958は、トランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10と、トランジスタMS1乃至トランジスタMS4と、容量素子CD1と、容量素子CD2と、を有する。なお、トランジスタMS1、およびトランジスタMS2は、pチャネル型トランジスタであり、トランジスタMS3、およびトランジスタMS4は、nチャネル型トランジスタである。 Memory cell 958 includes transistors M7 to M10, transistors MS1 to MS4, and capacitors CD1 and CD2. Note that transistors MS1 and MS2 are p-channel transistors, and transistors MS3 and MS4 are n-channel transistors.
トランジスタM7の第1端子は、配線BILと接続され、トランジスタM7の第2端子は、トランジスタMS1の第1端子と、トランジスタMS3の第1端子と、トランジスタMS2のゲートと、トランジスタMS4のゲートと、トランジスタM10の第1端子と、に接続されている。トランジスタM7のゲートは、配線WOLと接続されている。トランジスタM8の第1端子は、配線BILBと接続され、トランジスタM8の第2端子は、トランジスタMS2の第1端子と、トランジスタMS4の第1端子と、トランジスタMS1のゲートと、トランジスタMS3のゲートと、トランジスタM9の第1端子と、に接続されている。トランジスタM8のゲートは、配線WOLと接続されている。 The first terminal of transistor M7 is connected to wiring BIL, and the second terminal of transistor M7 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS1, the first terminal of transistor MS3, the gate of transistor MS2, the gate of transistor MS4, and the first terminal of transistor M10. The gate of transistor M7 is connected to wiring WOL. The first terminal of transistor M8 is connected to wiring BILB, and the second terminal of transistor M8 is connected to the first terminal of transistor MS2, the first terminal of transistor MS4, the gate of transistor MS1, the gate of transistor MS3, and the first terminal of transistor M9. The gate of transistor M8 is connected to wiring WOL.
トランジスタMS1の第2端子は、配線VDLと接続されている。トランジスタMS2の第2端子は、配線VDLと接続されている。トランジスタMS3の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続されている。トランジスタMS4の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続されている。 The second terminal of transistor MS1 is connected to the wiring VDL. The second terminal of transistor MS2 is connected to the wiring VDL. The second terminal of transistor MS3 is connected to the wiring GNDL. The second terminal of transistor MS4 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
トランジスタM9の第2端子は、容量素子CD1の第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM9のゲートは、配線BRLと接続されている。トランジスタM10の第2端子は、容量素子CD2の第1端子と接続され、トランジスタM10のゲートは、配線BRLと接続されている。 The second terminal of transistor M9 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD1, and the gate of transistor M9 is connected to wiring BRL. The second terminal of transistor M10 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor CD2, and the gate of transistor M10 is connected to wiring BRL.
容量素子CD1の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続され、容量素子CD2の第2端子は、配線GNDLと接続されている。 The second terminal of the capacitance element CD1 is connected to the wiring GNDL, and the second terminal of the capacitance element CD2 is connected to the wiring GNDL.
配線BILおよび配線BILBは、ビット線として機能し、配線WOLは、ワード線として機能し、配線BRLは、トランジスタM9、およびトランジスタM10のオン状態、オフ状態を制御する配線である。 Wiring BIL and wiring BILB function as bit lines, wiring WOL functions as a word line, and wiring BRL is a wiring that controls the on/off states of transistors M9 and M10.
配線VDLは、高レベル電位を与える配線であり、配線GNDLは、低レベル電位を与える配線である。 The wiring VDL is a wiring that applies a high-level potential, and the wiring GNDL is a wiring that applies a low-level potential.
データの書き込みは、配線WOLに高レベル電位を印加し、かつ配線BRLに高レベル電位を印加することによって行われる。具体的には、トランジスタM10がオン状態のときに、配線BILに記録する情報に対応する電位を印加し、トランジスタM10の第2端子側に該電位を書き込む。 Data is written by applying a high-level potential to the wiring WOL and a high-level potential to the wiring BRL. Specifically, when the transistor M10 is on, a potential corresponding to the information to be recorded is applied to the wiring BIL, and this potential is written to the second terminal of the transistor M10.
ところで、メモリセル958は、トランジスタMS1乃至トランジスタMS2によってインバータループを構成しているため、トランジスタM8の第2端子側に、該電位に対応するデータ信号の反転信号が入力される。トランジスタM8がオン状態であるため、配線BILBには、配線BILに印加されている電位、すなわち配線BILに入力されている信号の反転信号が出力される。また、トランジスタM9、およびトランジスタM10がオン状態であるため、トランジスタM7の第2端子の電位、およびトランジスタM8の第2端子の電位は、それぞれ容量素子CD2の第1端子、および容量素子CD1の第1端子に保持される。その後、配線WOLに低レベル電位を印加し、かつ配線BRLに低レベル電位を印加し、トランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10をオフ状態にすることによって、容量素子CD1の第1端子、および容量素子CD2の第1端子の電位を保持する。 Meanwhile, since memory cell 958 forms an inverter loop using transistors MS1 and MS2, an inverted signal of the data signal corresponding to the potential is input to the second terminal of transistor M8. Because transistor M8 is on, the potential applied to wiring BIL, i.e., the inverted signal of the signal input to wiring BIL, is output to wiring BILB. Furthermore, because transistors M9 and M10 are on, the potentials of the second terminals of transistors M7 and M8 are held in the first terminals of capacitors CD2 and CD1, respectively. Thereafter, a low-level potential is applied to wiring WOL and a low-level potential is applied to wiring BRL, turning off transistors M7 to M10, thereby holding the potentials of the first terminals of capacitors CD1 and CD2.
データの読み出しでは、あらかじめ配線BILおよび配線BILBを所定の電位にプリチャージした後に、配線WOLに高レベル電位を印加し、配線BRLに高レベル電位を印加する。これによって、容量素子CD1の第1端子の電位が、メモリセル958のインバータループによってリフレッシュされ、配線BILBに出力される。また、容量素子CD2の第1端子の電位が、メモリセル958のインバータループによってリフレッシュされ、配線BILに出力される。配線BILおよび配線BILBでは、それぞれプリチャージされた電位から容量素子CD2の第1端子の電位、および容量素子CD1の第1端子の電位に変動するため、配線BILまたは配線BILBの電位から、メモリセルに保持された電位を読み出すことができる。 When reading data, the wiring BIL and wiring BILB are precharged to a predetermined potential, and then a high-level potential is applied to the wiring WOL and a high-level potential is applied to the wiring BRL. As a result, the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD1 is refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BILB. The potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD2 is also refreshed by the inverter loop of the memory cell 958 and output to the wiring BIL. The potentials of the wiring BIL and wiring BILB change from their precharged potentials to the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD2 and the potential of the first terminal of the capacitance element CD1, respectively, so the potential held in the memory cell can be read from the potential of the wiring BIL or wiring BILB.
なお、トランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10としてOSトランジスタを適用することが好ましい。これにより書き込んだデータをトランジスタM7乃至トランジスタM10によって長時間保持することができるため、メモリセルのリフレッシュの頻度を少なくすることができる。または、メモリセルのリフレッシュ動作を不要にすることができる。 Note that it is preferable to use OS transistors as transistors M7 to M10. This allows written data to be held for a long time by transistors M7 to M10, thereby reducing the frequency of refreshing the memory cells. Alternatively, refreshing the memory cells can be made unnecessary.
なお、トランジスタMS1乃至トランジスタMS4としてSiトランジスタを用いてもよい。 In addition, Si transistors may be used as transistors MS1 to MS4.
半導体装置900が有する駆動回路910とメモリアレイ920は同一平面上に設けてもよい。また、図24Aに示すように、駆動回路910とメモリアレイ920を重ねて設けてもよい。駆動回路910とメモリアレイ920を重ねて設けることで、信号伝搬距離を短くすることができる。また、図24Bに示すように、駆動回路910上にメモリアレイ920を複数層重ねて設けてもよい。 The drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 of the semiconductor device 900 may be provided on the same plane. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 24A, the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 may be provided overlapping each other. By providing the drive circuit 910 and memory array 920 overlapping each other, the signal propagation distance can be shortened. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 24B, the memory array 920 may be provided in multiple layers on top of the drive circuit 910.
続いて、上記記憶装置などの半導体装置を備えることができる演算処理装置の一例について説明する。 Next, we will explain an example of a processing device that can be equipped with a semiconductor device such as the above-mentioned memory device.
図25に、演算装置960のブロック図を示す。図25に示す演算装置960は、例えばCPU(Central Processing Unit)に適用することができる。また、演算装置960は、CPUよりも並列処理可能なプロセッサコアを多数(数10~数100個)有するGPU(Graphics Processing Unit)、TPU(Tensor Processing Unit)、NPU(Neural Processing Unit)などのプロセッサにも適用することができる。 Figure 25 shows a block diagram of the arithmetic unit 960. The arithmetic unit 960 shown in Figure 25 can be applied to, for example, a CPU (Central Processing Unit). The arithmetic unit 960 can also be applied to processors such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), TPU (Tensor Processing Unit), or NPU (Neural Processing Unit), which have a larger number (tens to hundreds) of processor cores capable of parallel processing than a CPU.
図25に示す演算装置960は、基板990上に、ALU991(ALU:Arithmetic logic unit、演算回路)、ALUコントローラ992、インストラクションデコーダ993、インタラプトコントローラ994、タイミングコントローラ995、レジスタ996、レジスタコントローラ997、バスインターフェイス998、キャッシュ999、およびキャッシュインターフェイス989を有している。基板990は、半導体基板、SOI基板、ガラス基板などを用いる。書き換え可能なROMおよびROMインターフェイスを有してもよい。また、キャッシュ999およびキャッシュインターフェイス989は、別チップに設けてもよい。 The arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 25 has an ALU 991 (ALU: Arithmetic logic unit, arithmetic circuit), an ALU controller 992, an instruction decoder 993, an interrupt controller 994, a timing controller 995, a register 996, a register controller 997, a bus interface 998, a cache 999, and a cache interface 989 on a substrate 990. The substrate 990 may be a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, or the like. It may also have a rewritable ROM and a ROM interface. The cache 999 and cache interface 989 may also be provided on separate chips.
キャッシュ999は、別チップに設けられたメインメモリとキャッシュインターフェイス989を介して接続される。キャッシュインターフェイス989は、メインメモリに保持されているデータの一部をキャッシュ999に供給する機能を有する。またキャッシュインターフェイス989は、キャッシュ999に保持されているデータの一部を、バスインターフェイス998を介してALU991またはレジスタ996等に出力する機能を有する。 The cache 999 is connected to the main memory provided on a separate chip via a cache interface 989. The cache interface 989 has the function of supplying part of the data held in the main memory to the cache 999. The cache interface 989 also has the function of outputting part of the data held in the cache 999 to the ALU 991 or register 996, etc. via the bus interface 998.
後述するように、演算装置960上に積層して、メモリアレイ920を設けることができる。メモリアレイ920はキャッシュとして用いることができる。このとき、キャッシュインターフェイス989はメモリアレイ920に保持されているデータをキャッシュ999に供給する機能を有していてよい。またこのとき、キャッシュインターフェイス989の一部に、駆動回路910を有することが好ましい。 As will be described later, a memory array 920 can be provided stacked on the arithmetic unit 960. The memory array 920 can be used as a cache. In this case, the cache interface 989 may have the function of supplying data held in the memory array 920 to the cache 999. In this case, it is also preferable that a drive circuit 910 be included as part of the cache interface 989.
なお、キャッシュ999を設けず、メモリアレイ920のみをキャッシュとして用いることもできる。 It is also possible to use only the memory array 920 as a cache without providing the cache 999.
図25に示す演算装置960は、その構成を簡略化して示した一例にすぎず、実際の演算装置960はその用途によって多種多様な構成を有している。例えば、図25に示す演算装置960を含む構成を一つのコアとし、当該コアを複数含み、それぞれのコアが並列で動作する、いわゆるマルチコアの構成とすることが好ましい。コアの数が多いほど、演算性能を高めることができる。コアの数は多いほど好ましいが、例えば2個、好ましくは4個、より好ましくは8個、さらに好ましくは12個、さらに好ましくは16個またはそれ以上とすることが好ましい。また、サーバー用途など非常に高い演算性能が求められる場合には、16個以上、好ましくは32個以上、さらに好ましくは64個以上のコアを有するマルチコアの構成とすることが好ましい。また、演算装置960が内部演算回路、データバスなどで扱えるビット数は、例えば8ビット、16ビット、32ビット、64ビットなどとすることができる。 The arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 25 is merely one example of a simplified configuration, and actual arithmetic devices 960 have a wide variety of configurations depending on their applications. For example, it is preferable to use a configuration including the arithmetic device 960 shown in FIG. 25 as one core, and to include multiple such cores, each of which operates in parallel, in a so-called multi-core configuration. The more cores there are, the higher the arithmetic performance can be. The more cores there are, the better, and it is preferable to have, for example, two, preferably four, more preferably eight, even more preferably 12, and even more preferably 16 or more cores. Furthermore, when extremely high arithmetic performance is required, such as for server applications, it is preferable to have a multi-core configuration with 16 or more, preferably 32 or more, and even more preferably 64 or more cores. Furthermore, the number of bits that the arithmetic device 960 can handle in its internal arithmetic circuits, data buses, etc. can be, for example, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, 64 bits, etc.
バスインターフェイス998を介して演算装置960に入力された命令は、インストラクションデコーダ993に入力され、デコードされた後、ALUコントローラ992、インタラプトコントローラ994、レジスタコントローラ997、タイミングコントローラ995に入力される。 Instructions input to the arithmetic unit 960 via the bus interface 998 are input to the instruction decoder 993, decoded, and then input to the ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995.
ALUコントローラ992、インタラプトコントローラ994、レジスタコントローラ997、タイミングコントローラ995は、デコードされた命令に基づき、各種制御を行う。具体的にALUコントローラ992は、ALU991の動作を制御するための信号を生成する。また、インタラプトコントローラ994は、演算装置960のプログラム実行中に、外部の入出力装置、周辺回路などからの割り込み要求を、その優先度、マスク状態などから判断し、処理する。レジスタコントローラ997は、レジスタ996のアドレスを生成し、演算装置960の状態に応じてレジスタ996の読み出し、書き込みなどを行う。 The ALU controller 992, interrupt controller 994, register controller 997, and timing controller 995 perform various controls based on the decoded instructions. Specifically, the ALU controller 992 generates signals to control the operation of the ALU 991. Furthermore, while the arithmetic unit 960 is executing a program, the interrupt controller 994 determines and processes interrupt requests from external input/output devices, peripheral circuits, etc. based on their priority, mask status, etc. The register controller 997 generates the address of the register 996 and performs read and write operations on the register 996 depending on the state of the arithmetic unit 960.
また、タイミングコントローラ995は、ALU991、ALUコントローラ992、インストラクションデコーダ993、インタラプトコントローラ994、およびレジスタコントローラ997の動作のタイミングを制御する信号を生成する。例えばタイミングコントローラ995は、基準クロック信号を元に、内部クロック信号を生成する内部クロック生成部を備えており、内部クロック信号を上記各種回路に供給する。 The timing controller 995 also generates signals that control the timing of the operations of the ALU 991, ALU controller 992, instruction decoder 993, interrupt controller 994, and register controller 997. For example, the timing controller 995 includes an internal clock generation unit that generates an internal clock signal based on a reference clock signal, and supplies the internal clock signal to the various circuits mentioned above.
図25に示す演算装置960において、レジスタコントローラ997は、ALU991からの指示に従い、レジスタ996における保持動作の選択を行う。すなわち、レジスタ996が有するメモリセルにおいて、フリップフロップによるデータの保持を行うか、容量素子によるデータの保持を行うかを、選択する。フリップフロップによるデータの保持が選択されている場合、レジスタ996内のメモリセルへの、電源電圧の供給が行われる。容量素子におけるデータの保持が選択されている場合、容量素子へのデータの書き換えが行われ、レジスタ996内のメモリセルへの電源電圧の供給を停止することができる。 In the arithmetic unit 960 shown in FIG. 25, the register controller 997 selects the holding operation in the register 996 in accordance with instructions from the ALU 991. That is, it selects whether the memory cells in the register 996 will hold data using flip-flops or capacitive elements. If holding data using flip-flops is selected, power supply voltage is supplied to the memory cells in the register 996. If holding data in capacitive elements is selected, the data is rewritten to the capacitive elements, and the supply of power supply voltage to the memory cells in the register 996 can be stopped.
メモリアレイ920と演算装置960は、重ねて設けることができる。図26Aおよび図26Bに半導体装置970Aの斜視図を示す。半導体装置970Aは、演算装置960上に、メモリアレイが設けられた層930を有する。層930には、メモリアレイ920L1、メモリアレイ920L2、及びメモリアレイ920L3が設けられている。演算装置960と各メモリアレイは、互いに重なる領域を有する。半導体装置970Aの構成を分かりやすくするため、図26Bでは演算装置960および層930を分離して示している。 The memory array 920 and the arithmetic unit 960 can be provided overlapping each other. Figures 26A and 26B show perspective views of a semiconductor device 970A. The semiconductor device 970A has a layer 930 on which a memory array is provided above the arithmetic unit 960. The layer 930 is provided with memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3. The arithmetic unit 960 and each memory array have overlapping areas. To make the configuration of the semiconductor device 970A easier to understand, Figure 26B shows the arithmetic unit 960 and layer 930 separated.
メモリアレイを有する層930と演算装置960を重ねて設けることで、両者の接続距離を短くすることができる。よって、両者間の通信速度を高めることができる。また、接続距離が短いため消費電力を低減できる。 By stacking the layer 930 having the memory array and the arithmetic unit 960, the connection distance between them can be shortened. This increases the communication speed between them. In addition, the short connection distance reduces power consumption.
メモリアレイを有する層930と演算装置960とを積層する方法としては、演算装置960上に直接メモリアレイを有する層930を積層する方法(モノリシック積層ともいう)を用いてもよいし、演算装置960と層930とをそれぞれ異なる基板上に形成し、2つの基板を貼り合せ、貫通ビアまたは導電膜の接合技術(Cu−Cu接合など)を用いて接続する方法を用いてもよい。前者は貼合わせにおける位置ずれを考慮する必要がないため、チップサイズを小さくできるだけでなく、作製コストを削減できる。 As a method for stacking the layer 930 having the memory array and the arithmetic unit 960, a method of stacking the layer 930 having the memory array directly on the arithmetic unit 960 (also known as monolithic stacking) may be used, or a method may be used in which the arithmetic unit 960 and the layer 930 are formed on different substrates, and the two substrates are bonded together and connected using through-vias or conductive film bonding technology (such as Cu-Cu bonding). The former method does not require consideration of misalignment during bonding, and therefore not only can the chip size be reduced, but manufacturing costs can also be reduced.
ここで、演算装置960にキャッシュ999を有さず、層930に設けられるメモリアレイ920L1、920L2、及び920L3は、それぞれキャッシュとして用いることができる。このとき、例えばメモリアレイ920L1をL1キャッシュ(レベル1キャッシュともいう)として用い、メモリアレイ920L2をL2キャッシュ(レベル2キャッシュともいう)として用い、メモリアレイ920L3をL3キャッシュ(レベル3キャッシュともいう)として用いることができる。3つのメモリアレイのうち、メモリアレイ920L3が最も容量が大きく、且つ、最もアクセス頻度が低い。また、メモリアレイ920L1が最も容量が小さく、且つ最もアクセス頻度が高い。 Here, the arithmetic unit 960 does not have a cache 999, and the memory arrays 920L1, 920L2, and 920L3 provided in the layer 930 can each be used as a cache. In this case, for example, memory array 920L1 can be used as an L1 cache (also called a level 1 cache), memory array 920L2 can be used as an L2 cache (also called a level 2 cache), and memory array 920L3 can be used as an L3 cache (also called a level 3 cache). Of the three memory arrays, memory array 920L3 has the largest capacity and is accessed least frequently. Furthermore, memory array 920L1 has the smallest capacity and is accessed most frequently.
なお、演算装置960に設けられるキャッシュ999をL1キャッシュとして用いる場合は、層930に設けられる各メモリアレイを、それぞれ下位のキャッシュ、またはメインメモリとして用いることができる。メインメモリはキャッシュよりも容量が大きく、アクセス頻度の低いメモリである。 Note that when the cache 999 provided in the arithmetic unit 960 is used as an L1 cache, each memory array provided in layer 930 can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory. Main memory has a larger capacity than the cache and is accessed less frequently.
また、図26Bに示すように、駆動回路910L1、駆動回路910L2、及び駆動回路910L3が設けられている。駆動回路910L1は接続電極940L1を介してメモリアレイ920L1と接続されている。同様に駆動回路910L2は接続電極940L2を介してメモリアレイ920L2と、駆動回路910L3は接続電極940L3を介してメモリアレイ920L3と接続されている。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26B, drive circuits 910L1, 910L2, and 910L3 are provided. Drive circuit 910L1 is connected to memory array 920L1 via connection electrode 940L1. Similarly, drive circuit 910L2 is connected to memory array 920L2 via connection electrode 940L2, and drive circuit 910L3 is connected to memory array 920L3 via connection electrode 940L3.
なお、ここではキャッシュとして機能するメモリアレイを3つとした場合を示したが、1つまたは2つでもよいし、4つ以上であってもよい。 Note that while three memory arrays functioning as caches are shown here, the number may be one, two, or even four or more.
メモリアレイ920L1をキャッシュとして用いる場合、駆動回路910L1はキャッシュインターフェイス989の一部として機能してもよいし、駆動回路910L1がキャッシュインターフェイス989と接続される構成としてもよい。同様に、駆動回路910L2、駆動回路910L3も、キャッシュインターフェイス989の一部として機能する、またはこれと接続される構成としてもよい。 When the memory array 920L1 is used as a cache, the drive circuit 910L1 may function as part of the cache interface 989, or the drive circuit 910L1 may be configured to be connected to the cache interface 989. Similarly, the drive circuit 910L2 and the drive circuit 910L3 may also function as part of the cache interface 989, or may be configured to be connected to it.
メモリアレイ920をキャッシュとして機能させるか、メインメモリとして機能させるかは、各駆動回路910が有するコントロール回路912によって決定される。コントロール回路912は、演算装置960から供給された信号に基づいて、半導体装置900が有する複数のメモリセル950の一部をRAMとして機能させることができる。 Whether the memory array 920 functions as a cache or as main memory is determined by the control circuit 912 of each drive circuit 910. Based on a signal supplied from the arithmetic device 960, the control circuit 912 can cause some of the multiple memory cells 950 in the semiconductor device 900 to function as RAM.
半導体装置900は、複数のメモリセル950の一部をキャッシュとして機能させ、他の一部をメインメモリとして機能させることができる。すなわち半導体装置900はキャッシュとしての機能と、メインメモリとしての機能を併せ持つことができる。本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置900は、例えば、ユニバーサルメモリとして機能できる。 The semiconductor device 900 can cause some of the multiple memory cells 950 to function as cache, and the other part to function as main memory. In other words, the semiconductor device 900 can function as both a cache and a main memory. The semiconductor device 900 according to one aspect of the present invention can function as, for example, a universal memory.
また、一つのメモリアレイ920を有する層930を演算装置960に重ねて設けてもよい。図27Aに半導体装置970Bの斜視図を示す。 Alternatively, a layer 930 having one memory array 920 may be provided over the computing device 960. Figure 27A shows a perspective view of the semiconductor device 970B.
半導体装置970Bでは、一つのメモリアレイ920を複数のエリアに分けて、それぞれ異なる機能で使用することができる。図27Aでは、領域L1をL1キャッシュとして、領域L2をL2キャッシュとして、領域L3をL3キャッシュとして用いる場合の例を示している。 In semiconductor device 970B, one memory array 920 can be divided into multiple areas, each of which can be used for different functions. Figure 27A shows an example in which area L1 is used as an L1 cache, area L2 as an L2 cache, and area L3 as an L3 cache.
また半導体装置970Bでは、領域L1乃至領域L3のそれぞれの容量を状況に応じて変えることができる。例えばL1キャッシュの容量を増やしたい場合には、領域L1の面積を大きくすることにより実現する。このような構成とすることで、演算処理の効率化を図ることができ、処理速度を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, in semiconductor device 970B, the capacity of each of areas L1 to L3 can be changed depending on the situation. For example, if it is desired to increase the capacity of the L1 cache, this can be achieved by increasing the area of area L1. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the efficiency of calculation processing and increase processing speed.
また、複数のメモリアレイを積層してもよい。図27Bに半導体装置970Cの斜視図を示している。 Alternatively, multiple memory arrays may be stacked. Figure 27B shows a perspective view of semiconductor device 970C.
半導体装置970Cは、メモリアレイ920L1を有する層930L1と、その上にメモリアレイ920L2を有する層930L2と、その上にメモリアレイ920L3を有する層930L3とが積層されている。最も演算装置960に物理的に近いメモリアレイ920L1を上位のキャッシュに用い、最も遠いメモリアレイ920L3を下位のキャッシュまたはメインメモリに用いることができる。このような構成とすることで、各メモリアレイの容量を増大させることができるため、より処理能力を向上させることができる。 Semiconductor device 970C has a layer 930L1 having memory array 920L1 stacked on top of which is a layer 930L2 having memory array 920L2, and a layer 930L3 having memory array 920L3 stacked on top of that. Memory array 920L1, which is physically closest to the arithmetic device 960, can be used as a higher-level cache, and memory array 920L3, which is the farthest, can be used as a lower-level cache or main memory. With this configuration, the capacity of each memory array can be increased, thereby further improving processing power.
本実施の形態で例示した構成例、及びそれらに対応する図面等は、少なくともその一部を他の構成例、または図面等と適宜組み合わせることができる。 The configuration examples illustrated in this embodiment and the corresponding drawings, etc., can be combined, at least in part, with other configuration examples or drawings, etc., as appropriate.
(実施の形態3)
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置の応用例について説明する。本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、例えば、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器、及びデータセンター(Data Center:DCとも呼称する)に用いることができる。本発明の一態様の半導体装置を用いた、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器、及びデータセンターは、低消費電力化といった高性能化に有効である。
(Embodiment 3)
In this embodiment, an application example of a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers (also referred to as data centers (DCs)). The electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers using the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention are effective in achieving high performance, such as low power consumption.
[電子部品]
電子部品700が実装された基板(実装基板704)の斜視図を、図28Aに示す。図28Aに示す電子部品700は、モールド711内に半導体装置710を有している。図28Aは、電子部品700の内部を示すために、一部の記載を省略している。電子部品700は、モールド711の外側にランド712を有する。ランド712は電極パッド713と電気的に接続され、電極パッド713は半導体装置710とワイヤ714を介して電気的に接続されている。電子部品700は、例えばプリント基板702に実装される。このような電子部品が複数組み合わされて、それぞれがプリント基板702上で電気的に接続されることで実装基板704が完成する。
[Electronic Components]
FIG. 28A shows a perspective view of a substrate (mounting substrate 704) on which electronic component 700 is mounted. Electronic component 700 shown in FIG. 28A has a semiconductor device 710 inside a mold 711. FIG. 28A omits some parts to show the interior of electronic component 700. Electronic component 700 has lands 712 on the outside of mold 711. Lands 712 are electrically connected to electrode pads 713, and electrode pads 713 are electrically connected to semiconductor device 710 via wires 714. Electronic component 700 is mounted on, for example, a printed circuit board 702. A plurality of such electronic components are combined and electrically connected on printed circuit board 702 to complete mounting substrate 704.
また、半導体装置710は、駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、を有する。なお、記憶層716は、複数のメモリセルアレイが積層された構成である。駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、が積層された構成は、モノリシック積層の構成とすることができる。モノリシック積層の構成では、TSV(Through Silicon Via)などの貫通電極技術、及び、Cu−Cu直接接合などの接合技術、を用いることなく、各層間を接続することができる。駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、をモノリシック積層の構成とすることで、例えば、プロセッサ上にメモリが直接形成される、いわゆるオンチップメモリの構成とすることができる。オンチップメモリの構成とすることで、プロセッサと、メモリとのインターフェース部分の動作を高速にすることが可能となる。 Semiconductor device 710 also has a drive circuit layer 715 and a memory layer 716. The memory layer 716 is configured with multiple memory cell arrays stacked on top of each other. The stacked configuration of drive circuit layer 715 and memory layer 716 can be a monolithic stacked configuration. A monolithic stacked configuration allows connections between the layers without using through-electrode technology such as TSV (Through Silicon Via) or bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding. By configuring drive circuit layer 715 and memory layer 716 as a monolithic stacked configuration, it is possible to achieve a so-called on-chip memory configuration, in which memory is formed directly on a processor, for example. An on-chip memory configuration enables faster operation of the interface between the processor and memory.
また、オンチップメモリの構成とすることで、TSVなどの貫通電極を用いる技術と比較し、接続配線などのサイズを小さくできるため、接続ピン数を増加させることも可能となる。接続ピン数を増加させることで、並列動作が可能となるため、メモリのバンド幅(メモリバンド幅ともいう)を向上させることが可能となる。 Furthermore, by configuring the memory on-chip, the size of the connection wiring can be reduced compared to technologies that use through electrodes such as TSVs, making it possible to increase the number of connection pins. Increasing the number of connection pins enables parallel operation, making it possible to improve the memory bandwidth (also known as memory bandwidth).
また、記憶層716が有する、複数のメモリセルアレイを、OSトランジスタを用いて形成し、当該複数のメモリセルアレイをモノリシックで積層することが好ましい。複数のメモリセルアレイをモノリシック積層の構成とすることで、メモリのバンド幅、及びメモリのアクセスレイテンシの一方または双方を向上させることができる。なお、バンド幅とは、単位時間あたりのデータ転送量であり、アクセスレイテンシとは、アクセスしてからデータのやり取りが始まるまでの時間である。なお、記憶層716にSiトランジスタを用いる構成の場合、OSトランジスタと比較し、モノリシック積層の構成とすることが困難である。そのため、モノリシック積層の構成において、OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタよりも優れた構造であるといえる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the multiple memory cell arrays included in the memory layer 716 are formed using OS transistors and that the multiple memory cell arrays are monolithically stacked. By configuring the multiple memory cell arrays as a monolithic stack, it is possible to improve either or both of the memory bandwidth and the memory access latency. Note that the bandwidth is the amount of data transferred per unit time, and the access latency is the time from access to the start of data exchange. Note that when Si transistors are used for the memory layer 716, it is more difficult to achieve a monolithic stack configuration than OS transistors. Therefore, it can be said that OS transistors have a superior structure to Si transistors in a monolithic stack configuration.
また、半導体装置710を、ダイと呼称してもよい。なお、本明細書等において、ダイとは、半導体チップの製造工程で、例えば円盤状の基板(ウエハともいう)などに回路パターンを形成し、さいの目状に切り分けて得られたチップ片を表す。なお、ダイに用いることのできる半導体材料として、例えば、シリコン(Si)、炭化ケイ素(SiC)、または窒化ガリウム(GaN)などが挙げられる。例えば、シリコン基板(シリコンウエハともいう)から得られたダイを、シリコンダイという場合がある。 Semiconductor device 710 may also be referred to as a die. In this specification, a die refers to a chip piece obtained during the semiconductor chip manufacturing process by forming a circuit pattern on, for example, a disk-shaped substrate (also called a wafer) and dicing it into cubes. Semiconductor materials that can be used for the die include, for example, silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), or gallium nitride (GaN). For example, a die obtained from a silicon substrate (also called a silicon wafer) may be called a silicon die.
次に、電子部品730の斜視図を図28Bに示す。電子部品730は、SiP(System in Package)またはMCM(Multi Chip Module)の一例である。電子部品730は、パッケージ基板732(プリント基板)上にインターポーザ731が設けられ、インターポーザ731上に半導体装置735、及び複数の半導体装置710が設けられている。 Next, Figure 28B shows a perspective view of electronic component 730. Electronic component 730 is an example of a SiP (System in Package) or MCM (Multi-Chip Module). Electronic component 730 has an interposer 731 provided on a package substrate 732 (printed circuit board), and a semiconductor device 735 and multiple semiconductor devices 710 provided on interposer 731.
電子部品730では、半導体装置710を広帯域メモリ(HBM:High Bandwidth Memory)として用いる例を示している。また、半導体装置735は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)、GPU(Graphics Processing Unit)、NPU(Neural Processing Unit)またはFPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array)等の集積回路に用いることができる。 Electronic component 730 shows an example in which semiconductor device 710 is used as a high bandwidth memory (HBM). Semiconductor device 735 can also be used in integrated circuits such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), NPU (Neural Processing Unit), or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
パッケージ基板732は、例えば、セラミックス基板、プラスチック基板、または、ガラスエポキシ基板を用いることができる。インターポーザ731は、例えば、シリコンインターポーザ、または樹脂インターポーザを用いることができる。 The package substrate 732 can be, for example, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, or a glass epoxy substrate. The interposer 731 can be, for example, a silicon interposer or a resin interposer.
インターポーザ731は、複数の配線を有し、端子ピッチの異なる複数の集積回路を電気的に接続する機能を有する。複数の配線は、単層または多層で設けられる。また、インターポーザ731は、インターポーザ731上に設けられた集積回路をパッケージ基板732に設けられた電極と電気的に接続する機能を有する。これらのことから、インターポーザを「再配線基板」または「中間基板」と呼ぶ場合がある。また、インターポーザ731に貫通電極を設けて、当該貫通電極を用いて集積回路とパッケージ基板732を電気的に接続する場合もある。また、シリコンインターポーザでは、貫通電極として、TSVを用いることもできる。 The interposer 731 has multiple wirings and functions to electrically connect multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches. The multiple wirings are provided in a single layer or multiple layers. The interposer 731 also functions to electrically connect the integrated circuits provided on the interposer 731 to electrodes provided on the package substrate 732. For these reasons, the interposer is sometimes called a "rewiring substrate" or "intermediate substrate." In some cases, through electrodes are provided in the interposer 731, and the integrated circuits and package substrate 732 are electrically connected using these through electrodes. In addition, with silicon interposers, TSVs can also be used as through electrodes.
HBMでは、広いメモリバンド幅を実現するために多くの配線を接続する必要がある。このため、HBMを実装するインターポーザには、微細かつ高密度の配線形成が求められる。よって、HBMを実装するインターポーザには、シリコンインターポーザを用いることが好ましい。 In an HBM, many wiring connections are required to achieve a wide memory bandwidth. For this reason, the interposer on which the HBM is mounted must be able to form fine, high-density wiring. Therefore, it is preferable to use a silicon interposer for the interposer on which the HBM is mounted.
また、シリコンインターポーザを用いた、SiP及びMCM等では、集積回路とインターポーザ間の膨張係数の違いによる信頼性の低下が生じにくい。また、シリコンインターポーザは表面の平坦性が高いため、シリコンインターポーザ上に設ける集積回路とシリコンインターポーザ間の接続不良が生じにくい。特に、インターポーザ上に複数の集積回路を横に並べて配置する2.5Dパッケージ(2.5次元実装)では、シリコンインターポーザを用いることが好ましい。 Furthermore, in SiPs and MCMs that use silicon interposers, a decrease in reliability due to differences in the coefficient of expansion between the integrated circuit and the interposer is less likely. Furthermore, because the surface of a silicon interposer is highly flat, poor connections between the integrated circuit mounted on the silicon interposer and the silicon interposer are less likely to occur. It is particularly preferable to use silicon interposers in 2.5D packages (2.5-dimensional packaging), in which multiple integrated circuits are arranged horizontally on an interposer.
一方で、シリコンインターポーザ、及びTSVなどを用いて端子ピッチの異なる複数の集積回路を電気的に接続する場合、当該端子ピッチの幅などのスペースが必要となる。そのため、電子部品730のサイズを小さくしようとした場合、上記の端子ピッチの幅が問題になり、広いメモリバンド幅を実現するために必要な多くの配線を設けることが、困難になる場合がある。そこで、前述したように、OSトランジスタを用いたモノリシック積層の構成が好適である。TSVを用いて積層したメモリセルアレイと、モノリシック積層したメモリセルアレイと、を組み合わせた複合化構造としてもよい。 On the other hand, when electrically connecting multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches using a silicon interposer, TSV, or the like, space is required to accommodate the width of the terminal pitch. Therefore, when attempting to reduce the size of the electronic component 730, the width of the terminal pitch becomes an issue, and it may become difficult to provide the large number of wirings required to achieve a wide memory bandwidth. Therefore, as mentioned above, a monolithic stacked configuration using OS transistors is preferable. A composite structure may also be used that combines a memory cell array stacked using TSVs with a monolithic stacked memory cell array.
また、電子部品730と重ねてヒートシンク(放熱板)を設けてもよい。ヒートシンクを設ける場合は、インターポーザ731上に設ける集積回路の高さを揃えることが好ましい。例えば、本実施の形態に示す電子部品730では、半導体装置710と半導体装置735の高さを揃えることが好ましい。 Furthermore, a heat sink (heat sink) may be provided overlapping the electronic component 730. When a heat sink is provided, it is preferable to align the height of the integrated circuit provided on the interposer 731. For example, in the electronic component 730 shown in this embodiment, it is preferable to align the height of the semiconductor device 710 and the semiconductor device 735.
電子部品730を他の基板に実装するため、パッケージ基板732の底部に電極733を設けてもよい。図28Bでは、電極733を半田ボールで形成する例を示している。パッケージ基板732の底部に半田ボールをマトリクス状に設けることで、BGA(Ball Grid Array)実装を実現できる。また、電極733を導電性のピンで形成してもよい。パッケージ基板732の底部に導電性のピンをマトリクス状に設けることで、PGA(Pin Grid Array)実装を実現できる。 Electrodes 733 may be provided on the bottom of package substrate 732 in order to mount electronic component 730 on another substrate. Figure 28B shows an example in which electrodes 733 are formed from solder balls. By providing solder balls in a matrix on the bottom of package substrate 732, BGA (Ball Grid Array) mounting can be achieved. Electrodes 733 may also be formed from conductive pins. By providing conductive pins in a matrix on the bottom of package substrate 732, PGA (Pin Grid Array) mounting can be achieved.
電子部品730は、BGA及びPGAに限らず様々な実装方法を用いて他の基板に実装することができる。実装方法としては、例えば、SPGA(Staggered Pin Grid Array)、LGA(Land Grid Array)、QFP(Quad Flat Package)、QFJ(Quad Flat J−leaded package)、及び、QFN(Quad Flat Non−leaded package)が挙げられる。 Electronic component 730 can be mounted on other substrates using various mounting methods, not limited to BGA and PGA. Examples of mounting methods include SPGA (Staggered Pin Grid Array), LGA (Land Grid Array), QFP (Quad Flat Package), QFJ (Quad Flat J-leaded package), and QFN (Quad Flat Non-leaded package).
[大型計算機]
大型計算機5600の斜視図を図29Aに示す。大型計算機5600には、ラック5610にラックマウント型の計算機5620が複数格納されている。なお、大型計算機5600を、スーパーコンピュータと呼称してもよい。
[Large computer]
29A shows a perspective view of a mainframe computer 5600. The mainframe computer 5600 has a rack 5610 housing a plurality of rack-mounted computers 5620. The mainframe computer 5600 may also be called a supercomputer.
図29Bに計算機5620の一例の斜視図を示す。計算機5620は、マザーボード5630する。マザーボード5630には複数のスロット5631、及び複数の接続端子が設けられる。スロット5631には、PCカード5621が挿入されている。加えて、PCカード5621は、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625を有し、それぞれ、マザーボード5630に接続されている。 Figure 29B shows a perspective view of an example of a computer 5620. Computer 5620 is mounted on a motherboard 5630. Motherboard 5630 has multiple slots 5631 and multiple connection terminals. A PC card 5621 is inserted into slot 5631. In addition, PC card 5621 has connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, each of which is connected to motherboard 5630.
図29CにPCカード5621の一例を示す。PCカード5621は、例えばCPU、GPU、記憶装置などを備えた処理ボードである。PCカード5621は、ボード5622と、ボード5622に実装される、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625、電子部品5626、電子部品5627、電子部品5628、接続端子5629などを有する。なお、図29Cには、電子部品5626、電子部品5627、及び電子部品5628以外の部品を図示している。 Figure 29C shows an example of a PC card 5621. PC card 5621 is a processing board equipped with, for example, a CPU, GPU, and storage device. PC card 5621 has board 5622 and, mounted on board 5622, connection terminals 5623, 5624, 5625, electronic components 5626, 5627, 5628, and 5629. Note that Figure 29C also shows components other than electronic components 5626, 5627, and 5628.
接続端子5629は、マザーボード5630のスロット5631に挿入することができる形状を有しており、接続端子5629は、PCカード5621とマザーボード5630とを接続するためのインターフェースとして機能する。接続端子5629の規格としては、例えば、PCIeなどが挙げられる。 The connection terminal 5629 has a shape that allows it to be inserted into the slot 5631 of the motherboard 5630, and functions as an interface for connecting the PC card 5621 and the motherboard 5630. The connection terminal 5629 may conform to, for example, PCIe.
接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625は、例えば、PCカード5621に対して電力供給、信号入力などを行うためのインターフェースとすることができる。また、例えば、PCカード5621によって計算された信号の出力などを行うためのインターフェースとすることができる。接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625のそれぞれの規格としては、例えば、USB(Universal Serial Bus)、SATA(Serial ATA)、SCSI(Small Computer System Interface)などが挙げられる。また、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625から映像信号を出力する場合、それぞれの規格としては、HDMI(登録商標)などが挙げられる。 Connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 can be, for example, interfaces for supplying power to PC card 5621, inputting signals, etc. They can also be, for example, interfaces for outputting signals calculated by PC card 5621. Examples of standards for connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 include USB (Universal Serial Bus), SATA (Serial ATA), and SCSI (Small Computer System Interface). Also, when outputting video signals from connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, examples of standards for each include HDMI (registered trademark).
電子部品5626は、信号の入出力を行う端子(図示しない)を有しており、当該端子をボード5622が備えるソケット(図示しない)に対して差し込むことで、電子部品5626とボード5622を電気的に接続することができる。 Electronic component 5626 has terminals (not shown) for inputting and outputting signals, and by inserting these terminals into sockets (not shown) provided on board 5622, electronic component 5626 and board 5622 can be electrically connected.
電子部品5627及び電子部品5628は、複数の端子を有しており、当該端子をボード5622が備える配線に対して、例えば、リフロー方式のはんだ付けを行うことで、実装することができる。電子部品5627としては、例えば、FPGA、GPU、CPUなどが挙げられる。電子部品5627として、例えば、電子部品730を用いることができる。電子部品5628としては、例えば、記憶装置などが挙げられる。電子部品5628として、例えば、電子部品700を用いることができる。 Electronic component 5627 and electronic component 5628 have multiple terminals, and can be mounted to wiring on board 5622 by, for example, reflow soldering the terminals. Examples of electronic component 5627 include FPGAs, GPUs, and CPUs. Electronic component 5627 can be, for example, electronic component 730. Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, a memory device. Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, electronic component 700.
大型計算機5600は並列計算機としても機能できる。大型計算機5600を並列計算機として用いることで、例えば、人工知能の学習、及び推論に必要な大規模の計算を行うことができる。 The mainframe computer 5600 can also function as a parallel computer. By using the mainframe computer 5600 as a parallel computer, it is possible to perform large-scale calculations required for, for example, artificial intelligence learning and inference.
[宇宙用機器]
本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、宇宙用機器に好適に用いることができる。
[Space equipment]
The semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be suitably used in space equipment.
本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、OSトランジスタを含む。OSトランジスタは、放射線照射による電気特性の変動が小さい。つまり放射線に対する耐性が高いため、放射線が入射しうる環境において好適に用いることができる。例えば、OSトランジスタは、宇宙空間にて使用する場合に好適に用いることができる。具体的には、OSトランジスタを、スペースシャトル、人工衛星、または、宇宙探査機に設けられる半導体装置を構成するトランジスタに用いることができる。放射線として、例えば、X線、及び中性子線が挙げられる。なお、宇宙空間とは、例えば、高度100km以上を指すが、本明細書に記載の宇宙空間は、熱圏、中間圏、及び成層圏のうち一つまたは複数を含んでもよい。 A semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention includes an OS transistor. The change in electrical characteristics of an OS transistor due to radiation exposure is small. That is, the OS transistor has high radiation resistance and can be suitably used in environments where radiation may be incident. For example, an OS transistor can be suitably used in outer space. Specifically, an OS transistor can be used as a transistor for a semiconductor device provided in a space shuttle, an artificial satellite, or a space probe. Examples of radiation include X-rays and neutron rays. Note that outer space refers to an altitude of 100 km or higher, but the outer space described in this specification may include one or more of the thermosphere, mesosphere, and stratosphere.
図30Aには、宇宙用機器の一例として、人工衛星6800を示している。人工衛星6800は、機体6801と、ソーラーパネル6802と、アンテナ6803と、二次電池6805と、制御装置6807と、を有する。なお、図30Aにおいては、宇宙空間に惑星6804を例示している。 Figure 30A shows an artificial satellite 6800 as an example of space equipment. The artificial satellite 6800 has a body 6801, a solar panel 6802, an antenna 6803, a secondary battery 6805, and a control device 6807. Note that Figure 30A also shows a planet 6804 in space.
また、図30Aには、図示していないが、二次電池6805に、バッテリマネジメントシステム(BMSともいう)、またはバッテリ制御回路を設けてもよい。前述のバッテリマネジメントシステム、またはバッテリ制御回路に、OSトランジスタを用いると、消費電力が低く、且つ宇宙空間においても高い信頼性を有するため好適である。 Although not shown in Figure 30A, the secondary battery 6805 may be provided with a battery management system (also referred to as BMS) or a battery control circuit. Using an OS transistor in the battery management system or battery control circuit described above is preferable because it consumes low power and has high reliability even in space.
また、宇宙空間は、地上に比べて100倍以上、放射線量の高い環境である。なお、放射線として、例えば、X線、及びガンマ線に代表される電磁波(電磁放射線)、並びにアルファ線、ベータ線、中性子線、陽子線、重イオン線、中間子線などに代表される粒子放射線が挙げられる。 In addition, outer space is an environment with radiation levels more than 100 times higher than on Earth. Examples of radiation include electromagnetic waves (electromagnetic radiation) such as X-rays and gamma rays, as well as particle radiation such as alpha rays, beta rays, neutron rays, proton rays, heavy ion rays, and meson rays.
ソーラーパネル6802に太陽光が照射されることにより、人工衛星6800が動作するために必要な電力が生成される。しかしながら、例えばソーラーパネルに太陽光が照射されない状況、またはソーラーパネルに照射される太陽光の光量が少ない状況では、生成される電力が少なくなる。よって、人工衛星6800が動作するために必要な電力が生成されない可能性がある。生成される電力が少ない状況下であっても人工衛星6800を動作させるために、人工衛星6800に二次電池6805を設けるとよい。なお、ソーラーパネルは、太陽電池モジュールと呼ばれる場合がある。 When sunlight is irradiated onto the solar panel 6802, the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate is generated. However, for example, in situations where sunlight is not irradiated onto the solar panel, or where the amount of sunlight irradiating the solar panel is low, the amount of power generated will be small. Therefore, there is a possibility that the power required for the satellite 6800 to operate will not be generated. In order to operate the satellite 6800 even in situations where the amount of power generated is low, it is recommended that a secondary battery 6805 be provided on the satellite 6800. Note that the solar panel is sometimes called a solar cell module.
人工衛星6800は、信号を生成することができる。当該信号は、アンテナ6803を介して送信され、例えば地上に設けられた受信機、または他の人工衛星が当該信号を受信することができる。人工衛星6800が送信した信号を受信することにより、当該信号を受信した受信機の位置を測定することができる。以上より、人工衛星6800は、衛星測位システムを構成することができる。 Satellite 6800 can generate a signal. This signal is transmitted via antenna 6803, and can be received, for example, by a receiver located on the ground or by another satellite. By receiving the signal transmitted by satellite 6800, the position of the receiver that received the signal can be determined. As described above, satellite 6800 can constitute a satellite positioning system.
また、制御装置6807は、人工衛星6800を制御する機能を有する。制御装置6807としては、例えば、CPU、GPU、及び記憶装置の中から選ばれるいずれか一または複数を用いて構成される。なお、制御装置6807には、本発明の一態様であるOSトランジスタを含む半導体装置を用いると好適である。OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタと比較し、放射線照射による電気特性の変動が小さい。つまり放射線が入射しうる環境においても信頼性が高く、好適に用いることができる。 The control device 6807 also has a function of controlling the satellite 6800. The control device 6807 is configured using, for example, one or more of a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device. Note that a semiconductor device including an OS transistor, which is one embodiment of the present invention, is preferably used for the control device 6807. The electrical characteristics of an OS transistor change less when exposed to radiation than those of a Si transistor. In other words, an OS transistor has high reliability even in an environment where radiation may be incident, and can be preferably used.
また、人工衛星6800は、センサを有する構成とすることができる。例えば、可視光センサを有する構成とすることにより、人工衛星6800は、地上に設けられている物体に当たって反射された太陽光を検出する機能を有することができる。または、熱赤外センサを有する構成とすることにより、人工衛星6800は、地表から放出される熱赤外線を検出する機能を有することができる。以上より、人工衛星6800は、例えば地球観測衛星としての機能を有することができる。 Furthermore, the artificial satellite 6800 can be configured to include a sensor. For example, by configuring it to include a visible light sensor, the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting sunlight reflected off an object on the ground. Or, by configuring it to include a thermal infrared sensor, the artificial satellite 6800 can have the function of detecting thermal infrared rays emitted from the earth's surface. As described above, the artificial satellite 6800 can function as, for example, an Earth observation satellite.
なお、本実施の形態においては、宇宙用機器の一例として、人工衛星について例示したがこれに限定されない。例えば、本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、宇宙船、宇宙カプセル、宇宙探査機などの宇宙用機器に好適に用いることができる。 Note that although an artificial satellite is used as an example of space equipment in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be suitably used in space equipment such as a spaceship, a space capsule, or a space probe.
以上の説明の通り、OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタと比較し、広いメモリバンド幅の実現が可能なこと、放射線耐性が高いこと、といった優れた効果を有する。 As explained above, OS transistors have the advantages of being able to achieve a wider memory bandwidth and having higher radiation resistance compared to Si transistors.
[データセンター]
本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、例えば、データセンターなどに適用されるストレージシステムに好適に用いることができる。データセンターは、データの不変性を保障するなど、データの長期的な管理を行うことが求められる。長期的なデータを管理する場合、膨大なデータを記憶するためのストレージ及びサーバの設置、データを保持するための安定した電源の確保、あるいはデータの保持に要する冷却設備の確保、など建屋の大型化が必要となる。
[Data Center]
The semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be suitably used in a storage system applied to, for example, a data center. The data center is required to perform long-term management of data, such as ensuring data immutability. To manage long-term data, the building must be large enough to accommodate the installation of storage devices and servers for storing a huge amount of data, a stable power source for storing the data, or cooling equipment required for storing the data.
データセンターに適用されるストレージシステムに本発明の一態様の半導体装置を用いることにより、データの保持に要する電力の低減、データを保持する半導体装置の小型化を図ることができる。そのため、ストレージシステムの小型化、データを保持するための電源の小型化、冷却設備の小規模化、などを図ることができる。そのため、データセンターの省スペース化を図ることができる。 By using a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention in a storage system applied to a data center, the power required to store data can be reduced and the semiconductor device that stores data can be made smaller. This allows for the storage system to be made smaller, the power supply for storing data to be made smaller, and cooling equipment to be made smaller. This allows for space savings in the data center.
また、本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、消費電力が低いため、回路からの発熱を低減することができる。よって、当該発熱によるその回路自体、周辺回路、及びモジュールへの悪影響を低減できる。また、本発明の一態様の半導体装置を用いることにより、高温環境下においても動作が安定したデータセンターを実現できる。よってデータセンターの信頼性を高めることができる。 Furthermore, the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention has low power consumption, and therefore heat generation from the circuit can be reduced. Therefore, adverse effects of the heat generation on the circuit itself, peripheral circuits, and modules can be reduced. Furthermore, by using the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention, a data center that operates stably even in a high-temperature environment can be realized. Therefore, the reliability of the data center can be improved.
図30Bにデータセンターに適用可能なストレージシステムを示す。図30Bに示すストレージシステム6000は、ホスト6001(Host Computerと図示)として複数のサーバ6001sbを有する。また、ストレージ6003(Storageと図示)として複数の記憶装置6003mdを有する。ホスト6001とストレージ6003とは、ストレージエリアネットワーク6004(SAN:Storage Area Networkと図示)及びストレージ制御回路6002(Storage Controllerと図示)を介して接続されている形態を図示している。 Figure 30B shows a storage system applicable to a data center. The storage system 6000 shown in Figure 30B has multiple servers 6001sb as hosts 6001 (illustrated as Host Computers). It also has multiple storage devices 6003md as storage 6003 (illustrated as Storage). The host 6001 and storage 6003 are shown connected via a storage area network 6004 (illustrated as SAN: Storage Area Network) and a storage control circuit 6002 (illustrated as Storage Controller).
ホスト6001は、ストレージ6003に記憶されたデータにアクセスするコンピュータに相当する。ホスト6001同士は、ネットワークで互いに接続されていてもよい。 The host 6001 corresponds to a computer that accesses data stored in the storage 6003. The hosts 6001 may be connected to each other via a network.
ストレージ6003は、フラッシュメモリを用いることで、データのアクセススピード、つまりデータの記憶及び出力に要する時間を短くしているものの、当該時間は、ストレージ内のキャッシュメモリとして用いることのできるDRAMが要する時間に比べて格段に長い。ストレージシステムでは、ストレージ6003のアクセススピードの長さの問題を解決するために、通常ストレージ内にキャッシュメモリを設けてデータの記憶及び出力に要する時間を短くしている。 Storage 6003 uses flash memory to reduce data access speed, i.e., the time required to store and output data, but this time is significantly longer than the time required for DRAM, which can be used as cache memory within the storage. In order to solve the problem of the slow access speed of storage 6003, storage systems typically provide cache memory within the storage to reduce the time required to store and output data.
前述のキャッシュメモリは、ストレージ制御回路6002及びストレージ6003内に用いられる。ホスト6001とストレージ6003との間でやり取りされるデータは、ストレージ制御回路6002及びストレージ6003内の当該キャッシュメモリに記憶されたのち、ホスト6001またはストレージ6003に出力される。 The aforementioned cache memory is used within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003. Data exchanged between the host 6001 and storage 6003 is stored in the cache memory within the storage control circuit 6002 and storage 6003, and then output to the host 6001 or storage 6003.
前述のキャッシュメモリのデータを記憶するためのトランジスタとして、OSトランジスタを用いてデータに応じた電位を保持する構成とすることで、リフレッシュする頻度を減らし、消費電力を低くすることができる。またメモリセルアレイを積層する構成とすることで小型化が可能である。 By using OS transistors as transistors for storing data in the cache memory and maintaining a potential corresponding to the data, the frequency of refreshes can be reduced, lowering power consumption. Furthermore, by stacking the memory cell array, miniaturization is possible.
なお、本発明の一態様の半導体装置を、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器、及びデータセンターの中から選ばれるいずれか一または複数に適用することで、消費電力を低減させる効果が期待される。そのため、半導体装置の高性能化、または高集積化に伴うエネルギー需要の増加が見込まれる中、本発明の一態様の半導体装置を用いることで、二酸化炭素(CO2)に代表される、温室効果ガスの排出量を低減させることも可能となる。また、本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、低消費電力であるため地球温暖化対策としても有効である。 Note that the application of a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention to one or more selected from electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers is expected to have an effect of reducing power consumption. Therefore, while energy demand is expected to increase with the improvement in performance or high integration of semiconductor devices, the use of a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can also reduce emissions of greenhouse gases, typified by carbon dioxide (CO 2 ). Furthermore, the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention is effective as a measure against global warming due to its low power consumption.
本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
10:半導体装置、11:絶縁層、15:メモリセル、20:トランジスタ、21:半導体層、21a:領域、21b:領域、21f:半導体膜、21fa:領域、21fb:領域、22:絶縁層、22f:絶縁膜、23:導電層、23f:導電膜、24:導電層、24a:導電膜、24b:導電膜、25:導電層、25a:導電膜、25b:導電膜、30:容量素子、30a:容量素子、31:絶縁層、31f:絶縁膜、32:絶縁層、33:絶縁層、34:絶縁層、41:絶縁層、42:絶縁層、43:絶縁層、44:絶縁層、45:絶縁層、46:絶縁層、47:開口部、51:導電層、52:絶縁層、53:導電層、61:犠牲層、62:犠牲層、65:レジストマスク、67:犠牲層、81:導電層、82:プラグ、83:プラグ、85:絶縁層、86:絶縁層、87:絶縁層、90:トランジスタ、91:基板、92:半導体領域、93:絶縁層、94:導電層、95a:低抵抗領域、95b:低抵抗領域、98:素子分離層、700:電子部品、702:プリント基板、704:実装基板、710:半導体装置、711:モールド、712:ランド、713:電極パッド、714:ワイヤ、715:駆動回路層、716:記憶層、730:電子部品、731:インターポーザ、732:パッケージ基板、733:電極、735:半導体装置、900:半導体装置、910:駆動回路、911:周辺回路、912:コントロール回路、915:周辺回路、920:メモリアレイ、923:行ドライバ、924:列ドライバ、925:入力回路、926:出力回路、927:センスアンプ、928:電圧生成回路、930:層、931:PSW、932:PSW、941:行デコーダ、942:列デコーダ、950:メモリセル、951:メモリセル、952:メモリセル、953:メモリセル、954:メモリセル、955:メモリセル、956:メモリセル、957:メモリセル、958:メモリセル、960:演算装置、970A:半導体装置、970B:半導体装置、970C:半導体装置、989:キャッシュインターフェイス、990:基板、991:ALU、992:ALUコントローラ、993:インストラクションデコーダ、994:インタラプトコントローラ、995:タイミングコントローラ、996:レジスタ、997:レジスタコントローラ、998:バスインターフェイス、999:キャッシュ、5600:大型計算機、5610:ラック、5620:計算機、5621:PCカード、5622:ボード、5623:接続端子、5624:接続端子、5625:接続端子、5626:電子部品、5627:電子部品、5628:電子部品、5629:接続端子、5630:マザーボード、5631:スロット、6000:ストレージシステム、6001:ホスト、6001sb:サーバ、6002:ストレージ制御回路、6003:ストレージ、6003md:記憶装置、6800:人工衛星、6801:機体、6802:ソーラーパネル、6803:アンテナ、6804:惑星、6805:二次電池、6807:制御装置 10: Semiconductor device, 11: Insulating layer, 15: Memory cell, 20: Transistor, 21: Semiconductor layer, 21a: Region, 21b: Region, 21f: Semiconductor film, 21fa: Region, 21fb: Region, 22: Insulating layer, 22f: Insulating film, 23: Conductive layer, 23f: Conductive film, 24: Conductive layer, 24a: Conductive film, 24b: Conductive film, 25: Conductive layer, 25a: Conductive film, 25b: Conductive film, 30: Capacitor element, 30a: capacitor element, 31: insulating layer, 31f: insulating film, 32: insulating layer, 33: insulating layer, 34: insulating layer, 41: insulating layer, 42: insulating layer, 43: insulating layer, 44: insulating layer, 45: insulating layer, 46: insulating layer, 47: opening, 51: conductive layer, 52: insulating layer, 53: conductive layer, 61: sacrificial layer, 62: sacrificial layer, 65: resist mask, 67: sacrificial layer, 81: conductive layer, 82 : plug, 83: plug, 85: insulating layer, 86: insulating layer, 87: insulating layer, 90: transistor, 91: substrate, 92: semiconductor region, 93: insulating layer, 94: conductive layer, 95a: low resistance region, 95b: low resistance region, 98: element isolation layer, 700: electronic component, 702: printed circuit board, 704: mounting substrate, 710: semiconductor device, 711: mold, 712: land, 713: electrode pad, 714: wire, 715: drive circuit layer, 716: memory layer, 730: electronic component, 731: interposer, 732: package substrate, 733: electrode, 735: semiconductor device, 900: semiconductor device, 910: drive circuit, 911: peripheral circuit, 912: control circuit, 915: peripheral circuit, 920: memory array, 923: row driver, 924: column driver , 925: input circuit, 926: output circuit, 927: sense amplifier, 928: voltage generation circuit, 930: layer, 931: PSW, 932: PSW, 941: row decoder, 942: column decoder, 950: memory cell, 951: memory cell, 952: memory cell, 953: memory cell, 954: memory cell, 955: memory cell, 956: memory cell, 957: memory cell, 958: memory cell, 960: arithmetic unit, 970A: semiconductor device, 970B: semiconductor device, 970C: semiconductor device, 989: cache interface, 990: substrate, 991: ALU, 992: ALU controller, 993: instruction decoder, 994: interrupt controller, 995: timing controller, 996: register, 997: Register controller, 998: Bus interface, 999: Cache, 5600: Mainframe, 5610: Rack, 5620: Computer, 5621: PC card, 5622: Board, 5623: Connection terminal, 5624: Connection terminal, 5625: Connection terminal, 5626: Electronic component, 5627: Electronic component, 5628: Electronic component, 5629: Connection terminal, 5630: Motherboard, 5631: Slot, 6000: Storage system, 6001: Host, 6001sb: Server, 6002: Storage control circuit, 6003: Storage, 6003md: Storage device, 6800: Satellite, 6801: Airframe, 6802: Solar panel, 6803: Antenna, 6804: Planet, 6805: Secondary battery, 6807: Control device
Claims (11)
前記一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、第1の金属酸化物を含み、
前記一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、第1の領域及び第2の領域を有し、
前記第1の領域の少なくとも一部は、チャネル形成領域として機能し、
前記第2の領域は、前記第1の領域より抵抗率が高く、
前記第1の導電層は、第1の方向に延在され、
前記一対の第3の導電層、前記一対の半導体層、前記一対の第2の絶縁層、及び前記開口部は、前記第1の方向と交差する第2の方向に延在され、
前記一対の第3の導電層、前記一対の半導体層、及び前記一対の第2の絶縁層は、それぞれ前記開口部内に対称に設けられ、
前記第1の領域と前記第2の領域は、交互に前記第2の方向に配列され、
前記第1の絶縁層は、前記第1の導電層上に設けられ、
前記開口部は、前記第1の導電層の上面に達し、
前記一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、前記開口部の側壁と接する垂直部分、及び前記第1の導電層の上面と接する水平部分を有し、
前記一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、前記第1の領域において、前記第1の導電層の上面に接し、
前記一対の第2の導電層はそれぞれ、前記第1の絶縁層より上方に位置する部分を有し、且つ、前記垂直部分と接し、
前記一対の第2の絶縁層はそれぞれ、前記垂直部分及び前記水平部分を覆い、
前記一対の第3の導電層はそれぞれ、前記第2の絶縁層を介して前記垂直部分及び前記水平部分を覆う、
半導体装置。 a first conductive layer, a pair of second conductive layers, a pair of third conductive layers, a pair of semiconductor layers, a first insulating layer having an opening, and a pair of second insulating layers;
each of the pair of semiconductor layers includes a first metal oxide;
each of the pair of semiconductor layers has a first region and a second region;
at least a portion of the first region functions as a channel formation region;
the second region has a higher resistivity than the first region;
the first conductive layer extends in a first direction;
the pair of third conductive layers, the pair of semiconductor layers, the pair of second insulating layers, and the opening extend in a second direction intersecting the first direction;
the pair of third conductive layers, the pair of semiconductor layers, and the pair of second insulating layers are respectively provided symmetrically within the opening;
the first regions and the second regions are alternately arranged in the second direction,
the first insulating layer is provided on the first conductive layer;
the opening reaches the top surface of the first conductive layer;
each of the pair of semiconductor layers has a vertical portion in contact with a sidewall of the opening and a horizontal portion in contact with an upper surface of the first conductive layer;
each of the pair of semiconductor layers contacting an upper surface of the first conductive layer in the first region;
each of the pair of second conductive layers has a portion located above the first insulating layer and in contact with the vertical portion;
the pair of second insulating layers respectively covering the vertical portion and the horizontal portion;
the pair of third conductive layers respectively cover the vertical portion and the horizontal portion via the second insulating layer;
Semiconductor device.
前記第2の領域は、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方を含む、
半導体装置。 In claim 1,
the second region includes either or both of aluminum and hafnium;
Semiconductor device.
前記第2の領域は、前記第1の領域より、アルミニウム及びハフニウムのいずれか一方または両方の濃度が高い、
半導体装置。 In claim 2,
the second region has a higher concentration of either or both of aluminum and hafnium than the first region;
Semiconductor device.
前記第1の導電層は、第1の導電膜と、当該第1の導電膜上の第2の導電膜と、を有し、
前記一対の半導体層はそれぞれ、前記第2の導電膜と接し、
前記第2の導電膜は、第2の金属酸化物を含み、
前記第1の導電膜は、金属を含む、
半導体装置。 In claim 1,
the first conductive layer includes a first conductive film and a second conductive film on the first conductive film;
the pair of semiconductor layers are each in contact with the second conductive film;
the second conductive film includes a second metal oxide;
the first conductive film contains a metal;
Semiconductor device.
前記第1の金属酸化物、及び前記第2の金属酸化物は、In、Sn、Zn、Ga、及びTiのうち、同じ元素を一以上含む、
半導体装置。 In claim 4,
the first metal oxide and the second metal oxide contain one or more of the same elements selected from In, Sn, Zn, Ga, and Ti;
Semiconductor device.
前記第2の導電膜は、凹部を有し、
前記一対の半導体層は、前記凹部内に位置する部分を有し、且つ、前記凹部内における前記第2の導電膜の側面及び上面と接する、
半導体装置。 In claim 4,
the second conductive film has a recess;
the pair of semiconductor layers have portions located within the recess and in contact with the side surface and the top surface of the second conductive film within the recess;
Semiconductor device.
一対の第3の絶縁層を有し、
前記一対の第3の絶縁層はそれぞれ、前記第2の絶縁層及び前記第3の導電層を介して前記垂直部分及び前記水平部分を覆い、
前記第3の絶縁層は、水素を捕獲または固着する機能を有する、
半導体装置。 In claim 1,
a pair of third insulating layers;
the pair of third insulating layers respectively cover the vertical portion and the horizontal portion via the second insulating layer and the third conductive layer;
the third insulating layer has a function of capturing or fixing hydrogen;
Semiconductor device.
前記第2の導電層上に、容量素子を有し、
前記容量素子は、前記第2の導電層と接する第4の導電層と、第5の導電層と、これらの間に第4の絶縁層と、を有する、
半導体装置。 In any one of claims 1 to 7,
a capacitance element on the second conductive layer;
the capacitive element includes a fourth conductive layer in contact with the second conductive layer, a fifth conductive layer, and a fourth insulating layer therebetween;
Semiconductor device.
前記第4の導電層は、凹部を有し、
前記第4の絶縁層は、前記凹部に沿って設けられる部分を有し、
前記第5の導電層は、前記第4の絶縁層を介して前記凹部内に位置する部分を有し、且つ、前記凹部内における前記第4の絶縁層の側面及び上面と接する、
半導体装置。 In claim 8,
the fourth conductive layer has a recess;
the fourth insulating layer has a portion provided along the recess,
the fifth conductive layer has a portion located within the recess with the fourth insulating layer interposed therebetween, and is in contact with a side surface and an upper surface of the fourth insulating layer within the recess;
Semiconductor device.
前記第4の導電層は、柱状の形状を有し、
前記第4の絶縁層は、前記第4の導電層を覆い、
前記第5の導電層は、前記第4の絶縁層を介して前記第4の導電層の上面および側面を覆って設けられる、
半導体装置。 In claim 8,
the fourth conductive layer has a columnar shape,
the fourth insulating layer covers the fourth conductive layer;
the fifth conductive layer is provided to cover an upper surface and side surfaces of the fourth conductive layer via the fourth insulating layer;
Semiconductor device.
前記第1の導電層よりも下に、トランジスタを有し、
前記トランジスタは、チャネルが形成される半導体にシリコンを含み、
前記トランジスタのソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方は、前記第1の導電層と接続する、
半導体装置。 In any one of claims 1 to 7,
a transistor below the first conductive layer;
The transistor includes silicon as a semiconductor in which a channel is formed,
one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor is connected to the first conductive layer;
Semiconductor device.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2024-013170 | 2024-01-31 | ||
| JP2024013170 | 2024-01-31 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025163445A1 true WO2025163445A1 (en) | 2025-08-07 |
Family
ID=96589923
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/IB2025/050748 Pending WO2025163445A1 (en) | 2024-01-31 | 2025-01-24 | Semiconductor device |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025163445A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2013102158A (en) * | 2011-10-21 | 2013-05-23 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP2013149965A (en) * | 2011-12-23 | 2013-08-01 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Semiconductor device |
| JP2016149552A (en) * | 2015-02-11 | 2016-08-18 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
| WO2022160885A1 (en) * | 2021-01-26 | 2022-08-04 | 华为技术有限公司 | Thin film transistor, memory and manufacturing method, and electronic device |
| WO2023166378A1 (en) * | 2022-03-04 | 2023-09-07 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
-
2025
- 2025-01-24 WO PCT/IB2025/050748 patent/WO2025163445A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2013102158A (en) * | 2011-10-21 | 2013-05-23 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP2013149965A (en) * | 2011-12-23 | 2013-08-01 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Semiconductor device |
| JP2016149552A (en) * | 2015-02-11 | 2016-08-18 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
| WO2022160885A1 (en) * | 2021-01-26 | 2022-08-04 | 华为技术有限公司 | Thin film transistor, memory and manufacturing method, and electronic device |
| WO2023166378A1 (en) * | 2022-03-04 | 2023-09-07 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US12363880B2 (en) | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof | |
| JP2025109755A (en) | Semiconductor Device | |
| US20240314999A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025163445A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025163446A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025153928A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025163450A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025186691A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025243161A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025243155A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| JP2025126148A (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025257689A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for producing semiconductor device | |
| US20260020289A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device | |
| WO2026013523A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for fabricating semiconductor device | |
| WO2026033401A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for producing semiconductor device | |
| US20250016973A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the semiconductor device | |
| WO2025219842A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| TW202533701A (en) | semiconductor devices | |
| JP2026012101A (en) | Semiconductor Devices | |
| WO2025163448A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| KR20260009219A (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2024241188A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device | |
| WO2025163452A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2025181637A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2023209484A1 (en) | Semiconductor device |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 25748526 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |